££zj=. 

•<// 


0i  time  ®heolo0tC4; 


PRINCETON,  N.  J. 


%■> 


% 


PRESENTED  BY 

THE  PRESBYTERIAN  BOARD  OF  PUBLICATION 

U L 


# 


SCS> 

73,737 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/gemsfromcoralisl00gill_0 


Capt.  Cook  Landing  on  Eromarga. 


GEMS 


PROM 

THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


SHtsftnt  IJdljtusia: 


COMPRISING 


THE  NEW  HEBRIDES  GROUP 
THE  LOYALTY  GROUP 
NEW  CALEDONIA  GROUP. 


BV  THE 


/ 


REV.  WILLIAM  GILL, 


RAROTONGA. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

PRESBYTERIAN  BOARD  OF  PUBLICATION, 

NO.  265  CHESTNUT  STREET. 


STEREOTYPED  BY 

JESPER  HARDING  & SON, 

NO.  57  SOUTH  THIRD  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA. 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  writer  of  the  following  pages  left  England  seventeen 
years  ago,  to  proceed  as  a missionary,  under  the  auspices  of 
the  London  Missionary  Society,  to  the  islands  of  the  South 
Sea.  During  this  period  he  has  been  actively  engaged  in 
the  Christian  instruction,  and  the  consequent  civilization, 
of  the  barbarous  tribes  inhabiting  those  islands. 

Many  persons  who  have  heard  oral  details  respecting  the 
advancing  improvement  going  on  amongst  the  islanders, 
and  who  are  interested  in  the  universal  education  and  ele- 
vation of  heathen  nations,  have  urged  that  a narrative  of 
facts,  connected  with  missionary  work  on  those  islands,  du- 
ring the  last  sixteen  years,  should  be  put  through  the  press  ; 
especially  illustrating  the  labours  of  Native  Teachers. 

Every  island  gained  to  Christianity  and  civilization,  west- 
ward of  the  Tahitian  group,  has  been  gained  through  the  la- 
bours of  Native  Missionaries;  and  many  stations  in  the  Her- 
vey,  Samoa,  Penrhyn,  New  Hebrides,  and  New  Caledonia 
groups,  are  now  suitably  occupied  and  efficiently  worked  by 
Native  Teachers  and  Pastors. 

The  present  volume  contains  an  account  of  the  introduc- 
tion of  Christianity  into  the  islands  of  three  of  the  largest 
groups  of  Western  Polynesia;  the  formation  of  Native 
churches — the  character  of  Native  evangelists — the  work 

(iii) 


iv 


INTRODUCTION. 


they  have  to  do — the  manner  in  which  they  do  it,  and  the 
results  of  their  labours ; giving  a complete  Missionary  history 
of  each  island  in  those  groups  to  the  present  time. 

Commending  this  work  to  the  kind  notice  of  his  brethren 
in  the  ministry,  to  teachers  in  Sabbath-schools,  and  to  all 
who  desire  the  universal  extinction  of  heathenism,  he  hopes 
that,  in  their  various  circles,  they  will  aid  the  circulation  of 
information  thus  given ; and  that  the  results  may  be  an  in- 
creased acquaintance  with  the  progress  of  Missionary  labour 
in  those  islands,  a due  appreciation  of  what  the  infant  Na- 
tive churches  on  those  islands  are  doing  to  extend  the  bles- 
sings of  Christianity  to  the  heathen  lands  beyond  them,  and  an 
augmentation  of  the  resources  by  which  Missionary  Societies, 
in  this  country,  shall  be  able  to  continue  and  to  extend  their 
aggressions  upon  the  world  of  heathen  darkness,  idolatry, 
and  degradation. 


1855. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Island  of  Mare  ....  7 

Island  of  Fate  ....  51 

Island  of  Eromanga  ....  93 

Island  of  Fotuna  . . . 132 

Island  of  Aneiteum  ....  139 

Island  of  Lifu  . . . . 175 

Island  of  Toka  ....  190 

Island  of  Uea  ....  193 

Island  of  New  Caledonia.  . . . 199 

Isle  of  Pines  ....  209 

Island  of  Tana  ....  217 

O) 


i * 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


PAGE 

Nasilini,  Native  of  Marb  . . . 31 

Rejected  War  Weapons  ...  48 

Natives  of  Fate  ....  50 

Head  and  Dress  of  a Fate  Chief  . . 65 

Captain  Cook  landing  on  Eromanga  . . 98 

Dillon’s  Bay,  Eromanga  . . . 106 

Eromangan  Native  expounding  the  Scriptures  . 128 

An  Eromangan  Club  . . . 129 

Map  of  the  New  Hebrides  . . . 138 

A Native  of  Aneiteum  . . . 143 

Map  of  Loyalty  Group  . . . . 174 

View  of  New  Caledonia  . . . 198 

A Native  of  New  Caledonia  . . . 208 

Natives  of  Tana,  and  the  Volcano  . . 216 

(vi) 


THE  ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


CHAPTER  I. 

Name  of  the  island — Heathen  condition  of  the  people — Their  objects  of 
worship — Superstitious  practices  in  drought  and  in  floods — Conse- 
cration of  youth  to  war  and  to  priesthood — Delight  in  cannibalism 
— The  contrast — Massacre  of  white  men  by  the  natives. 

The  Island  of  Mare  is  one  of  the  Loyalty  group  in 
Western  Polynesia.  It  is  a low  coral  reef  land,  about  sixty 
miles  west  of  New  Caledonia. 

The  natives  call  this  island  Nengone ; the  name  of  Mark 
is  derived  from  the  Isle  of  Pines,  a small  island  off  the 
south  end  of  New  Caledonia,  with  the  people  of  which  the 
inhabitants  of  Mark  have  had  intercourse  from  time  imme- 
morial. This  island  is  nearly  70  miles  in  circumference,  and 
has  a population  of  6000  souls.  This  population  is  divided 
into  four  distinct  tribes  or  clans,  who  were,  when  first  visited 
by  us,  living  on  the  most  barbarous  terms.  They  were  con- 
tinually at  war — and  were  amongst  the  most  degraded  sav- 
age races  of  the  South  Sea  Islanders. 


(') 


8 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Before  giving  an  account  of  our  visits  to  this  people,  and 
of  the  successes  gained  in  their  education  and  civilization, 
it  may  he  well  to  state,  as  briefly  as  possible,  a few  partic- 
ulars respecting  their  heathen  character,  together  with  their 
idolatrous  superstitious. 

In  common  with  all  the  South  Sea  Islanders,  the  people 
of  Marh  believed  in  the  existence  of  a great  unseen  power 
or  personage,  whom  they  honoured  as  God.  They  had  no 
carved  images,  but  worshipped  this  superior  governing 
power,  through  the  medium  of  sacred  stones  and  wood,  and 
relics  of  departed  relatives  and  heroes. 

On  the  death  of  an  individual,  renowned  either  as  priest, 
or  warrior,  or  navigator,  the  hair  of  his  head  was  cut  off,  and 
his  eye-lashe3  were  carefully  plucked,  both  of  which  were 
sacredly  preserved ; the  body  was  then  buried,  and  ten  days 
after  interment,  the  priest  of  the  district,  in  company  with 
the  relatives  of  the  deceased,  went  to  the  grave,  and,  with 
much  ceremony,  extracted  from  the  corpse  its  finger-nails 
and  toe-nails,  and  certain  bones  of  the  arms  and  legs ; these 
relics  were  consecrated  and  kept  with  the  greatest  care, 
from  one  generation  to  another,  and  were  honoured  as  a 
medium  of  communion  between  the  people  and  their  gods. 
Happy  did  the  degraded  females  of  a family  deem  them- 
selves, who  had  the  skull  of  a departed  mother,  to  place  in 
the  centre  of  their  plantation.  Before  planting  yams,  they 
presented  an  offering  of  fruit  to  this  relic,  saying,  while 
prostrate  before  it,  “ 0 mother,  let  thy  power  be  seen,  and 
compassionate  these  thy  children ; see  thou  that  the  rains 
descend,  and  that  the  sun  shine  on  this  onr  work.  Let  our 
fruits  be  abundant,  and  thy  fame,  and  the  fame  of  thy  fam- 
ily, shall  be  great  in  the  land.’' 

In  the  practices  of  incantation  also  these  relics  were  used 
as  a medium  to  draw  down  vengeance  on  their  enemies.  A 
priest  to  whom  this  work  was  committed  watched  his  oppor- 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


9 


tunity  to  enter,  unobserved,  the  house  of  the  intended  vic- 
tim ; he  then  spread  out  the  relics  with  au  observed  order ; 
and  having  thus  gained  his  position,  announced  his  presence 
to  the  inmates  of  the  house  by  vociferating  most  hideous 
yells,  while,  in  the  name  of  those  represented  by  the  relics, 
he  invoked  the  gods  to  manifest  their  power,  either  in  the 
sickness  or  death  of  the  individual  thus  cursed. 

Amongst  the  many  superstitious  ceremonies  of  this  people, 
those  observed  in  seasons  of  drought  were  not  a little  sin- 
gular. In  drought  two  sacred  men,  having,  as  an  act  of 
humiliation,  besmeared  their  bodies,  from  head  to  foot,  with 
a mixture  of  lamp-black  and  mud,  visited  the  grave  of  some 
renowned  person  recently  buried;  every  bone  of  the  corpse 
was  then  carefully  cleansed,  and  with  the  skill  of  practised 
anatomists  the  priest  carefully  reunited  bone  to  bone,  until 
the  skeleton  was  complete.  This  work  was  performed  iu  a 
consecrated  cave;  and  hanging  up  the  skeleton,  water  was 
poured  on  it,  the  sacred  men  at  the  same  time  presenting  a 
prayer  to  the  gods  for  rain.  It  was  supposed  that  the 
spirit  of  the  departed  had  power  with  the  gods  to  convey 
this  oblation  of  water  into  the  heavens ; and  by  being  thus 
propitiated,  they  would  create  clouds,  and  again  cause  rain 
to  fall  on  their  famishing  land. 

Something  of  the  same  service  was  performed  in  seasons 
of  floods,  only  instead  of  pouring  water  on  the  skeleton, 
every  bone  was  then  entirely  consumed  by  fire,  and  it  was 
thought  by  these  deluded  people  that  the  fire  would  be  used 
instrumentally  by  the  gods  to  dry  up  the  rains  which  de- 
luged the  land.  The  sacred  men  who  performed  these  rites 
never  left  the  cave  until  the  object  desired  was  secured. 

The  entire  male  population  of  Marb,  in  early  youth,  was 
consecrated  either  to  the  oflice  of  the  priesthood  or  to  the 
service  of  war.  War  was  their  constant  employment,  and 
in  it  they  had  the  greatest  delight;  in  its  practice  they 


10 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


were  strangely  clever  and  fiendlike.  In  most  instances  ex- 
cited by  revenge,  and  at  all  times  impelled  by  cannibal  pro- 
pensities, the  warriors  were  frantic  in  their  efforts  to  secure 
victims.  In  fight  they  were  fearless;  and  although  many 
fell  in  a conflict,  yet  they  kept  a steady  aim,  until  a leading 
warrior  or  chief  of  the  opposing  party  was  slain.  During 
these  heathen  wars  the  warriors  ate  but  little  food,  and  re- 
garded themselves  as  sacred  to  the  service  of  the  gods. 

The  following  is  a brief  description  of  the  manner  the 
people  of  Mare  treated  victims  taken  in  war.  Using  the 
most  guarded  language,  and  curtailing  its  details  to  the 
shortest  possible  limits,  it  is  horrifying  in  the  extreme.  A 
reference  to  it  is,  however,  necessary  to  show  the  awfully 
degraded  condition  of  these  tribes  previous  to  their  instruc- 
tion by  the  Christian  teacher,  and  also  to  lead  us  more 
fully  to  comprehend  the  subduing  and  elevating  power  of 
Christianity  in  the  glorious  and  happy  change  now  seen  in 
them. 

If  the  victim  secured  in  fight  was  a chief  or  a renowned 
hero,  the  body  was  divided  in  small  pieces,  and  distributed 
to  every  male  member  of  the  conquering  tribe,  and  each 
one,  young  and  old,  was  expected  to  cook  his  own  portion, 
and  eat  it,  performing  at  the  same  time  certain  religious 
ceremonies.  In  this  manner  the  children  and  the  young 
men  were  taught  to  be  brave  in  fight.  If  a female  was 
taken  in  war,  her  arms  and  feet  only  were  eaten  ; the 
body  was  either  buried  or  thrown  into  the  sea. 

One  of  our  first  Christian  teachers  to  this  island,  after 
describing  .scenes  practised  by  the  people  in  reference  to 
their  cannibalism,  which  cannot  be  described,  says,  in  his 
first  letters  to  his  missionary,  “ These  things  are  so  bad  that 
you  may  enquire  if  I myself  have  seen  them  done.  I tell 
you  in  truth  I see  them  every  day ; I am  constantly  going 
about  in  the  midst  of  them.  I dare  not  tell  you  all  I see  of 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


11 


cannibalism  in  this  land  of  darkness  ; you  could  not  bear  it. 
Not  only  do  these  people  eat  bodies  taken  in  war,  but  on 
occasions  of  strife  and  jealousy,  a father  kills  and  eats  his 
son, — a son  his  father, — a brother  his  brother.  Alas,  alas  ! 
they  are  more  like  wild  beasts  than  men/' 

Repulsive  indeed  must  have  been  the  state  of  things 
which  so  much  distressed  a Christian  islander,  whose  own 
father,  only  five-and-twenty  years  before,  was  accustomed  to 
the  same  deeds  of  cruelty  and  savageism.  But  looking  at 
the  Rarotougan  Christian  in  contrast  with  the  Mar£  heathen, 
we  see  the  transforming  power  of  the  gospel  of  Jesus,  and 
also  how  it  fills  the  heart  of  man  with  a Divine  compassion, 
which  enables  him,  even  at  the  peril  of  life,  to  devote  him- 
self for  the  elevation  of  those  who  are  in  the  same  state  of 
degradation  as  his  fathers  were,  before  they  knew  the  word 
of  God. 

By  the  united  agency  of  Christian  natives  from  the  Sa- 
moan and  Rarotongan  islands,  we  shall  have  to  record,  in  this 
narrative,  details  of  important  moral  and  spiritual  triumph. 
But  in  tracing  the  difficult  path  through  which  these  devoted 
teachers  have  had  to  pass  to  their  present  position  of  re- 
ward, we  must  notice  many  deeds  of  cruelty  and  bloodshed 
which  have  been  committed  in  the  first  contacts  of  the  na- 
tives with  white  men. 

In  1841,  a boat’s  crew  of  six  men,  belonging  to  a small 
trading  ship  from  Sidney,  went  on  shore  for  the  purpose  of 
bartering  for  supplies  of  yams  and  other  vegetables.  The 
crew  landed  on  the  north  side  of  the  island,  and  under 
covert  of  fire-arms  succeeded  in  concluding  their  barter  on 
terms  of  comparative  friendliness.  As  the  white  men  were 
leaving  the  beach,  the  chief  of  the  district  expressed  a de- 
sire to  accompany  them  on  board  the  ship.  This  proposition 
was  resolutely  opposed,  and  in  the  hurry  and  bustle  of  the 
boat’s  crew  pushing  off  to  sea,  one  of  the  oars  struck  the 


12 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


chief  on  the  head.  A shout  for  revenge  was  immediately 
raised,  a fight  ensued,  and  the  six  unfortunate  white  men 
became  victims  to  the  cruelty  and  cannibalism  of  the  savages 
of  Mark. 

At  a later  date  another  English  ship  touched  at  Mare. 
One  of  the  Christian  teachers,  then  on  shore,  went  off  to  it, 
told  the  captain  of  the  former  massacre,  and  urged  on  him 
not  to  attempt  a landing.  This  advice,  however,  was  not 
heeded ; a boat’s  crew  were  sent  to  the  beach,  and  at  the 
same  time  a number  of  the  natives  were  admitted  on  board 
the  ship.  A premeditated  signal  was  given,  a simultaneous 
attack  was  made  by  both  parties  of  natives  on  the  foreign- 
ers, and  ten  white  men  were  murdered  in  the  affray ! 


Ezclciel  xxxvii.  “ The  hand  of  the  Lord  was  upon  me,  and  he  set  me 
down  in  the  midst  of  the  valley  which  was  full  of  bones,  and  behold 
there  were  very  many ; and,  lo,  they  were  very  dry.  And  he  said  unto 
me,  Son  of  man,  can  these  bones  live  ?” 


CHAPTER  II. 

Unfair  barter  of  tbe  captain  of  a merchant  vessel — Evil  results — A gun- 
powder explosion — Natives  revenged  by  the  murder  of  five  white  men 
— Two  white  men  saved — Their  ingratitude — The  chief’s  forbear- 
ance under  great  provocation — Landing  of  the  first  Christian  teach- 
ers in  Mar& — Daily  school  commenced — the  chief’s  sou  interested 
in  learning — The  difference  between  the  language  of  the  Western 
groups  and  the  Eastern  groups — A general  and  fatal  sickness  on 
the  people — Heathen  sacrifice  to  propitiate  the  gods — The  teachers 
devoted  to  death  by  the  people — Teachers  ransomed  by  the  sons  of 
Jeiue,  the  old  heathen  chief — Unfavourable  reports  to  the  natives 
from  Englishmen  respecting  the  Christian  roligion. 

The  next  account  of  intercourse  these  barbarous  savages 
had  with  Englishmen  is  still  more  disastrous  than  the  pre- 
ceding. The  tragic  event  was  minutely  recorded,  at  the 
time  of  occurrence,  by  the  teachers  who  themselves  were 
daily  in  jeopardy  of  their  lives. 

A chief  accompanied  some  of  his  people,  who  went  on 
board  a small  Sydney  vessel  for  the  purpose  of  selling  yams 
for  hoop-iron.  The  chief  proposed  terms  for  barter,  to 
which  the  captain  would  not  agree ; a quarrel  ensued,  and 
the  captain  unwittingly  gave  the  savage  prince  a rope’s-end 
thrashing,  and  sent  him  on  shore. 

A war  consultation  was  immediately  held  by  the  natives, 
who  resolved  to  be  revenged  for  the  indignity  done  to  their 
2 (13) 


14 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


chief.  On  the  following  day  the  wind,  being  light,  favoured 
their  diabolical  scheme.  A number  of  canoes  surrounded 
the  vessel;  the  captain  and  the  whole  of  the  crew  were 
murdered,  most  of  the  movable  property  was  taken  on 
shore,  and  the  vessel  itself  burnt  to  the  water’s  edge,  and 
then  sunk. 

Amongst  the  treasures  secured  by  the  natives  of  Mare,  in 
this  daring  act,  was  a quantity  of  gunpowder.  With  this 
they  were  one  day  amusing  themselves  by  throwing  small 
portions  into  the  fire ; unfortunately  some  sparks  fell  on  the 
open  barrels,  and,  greatly  to  the  consternation  of  the  igno- 
rant people,  an  awful  explosion  took  place;  the  large  hut  in 
which  they  were  assembled  was  blown  to  atoms,  several  of 
their  company  were  severely  wounded,  and  four  of  them 
were  killed  on  the  spot. 

The  infuriated  people,  thus  ensnared  in  their  own  trap, 
concluded  that  this  judgment  was  an  act  of  revenge  from 
the  God  of  the  white  man;  and  instead  of  manifesting 
cither  fear  or  humility,  they  resolved  further  retaliation  on 
the  next  white  man’s  ship  that  should  be  seen  off  the  shores 
of  their  land. 

Not  long  after  this  a large  open  boat,  having  in  her  seven 
Englishmen,  visited  this  people.  Five  of  this  party  were 
murdered,  whose  bodies  were  cooked  and  eaten  with  more 
than  usual  revcngefulness,  while  they  were  still  feeling  the 
effects  of  the  recent  gunpowder  explosion. 

The  other  two  of  the  seven  men  escaped  to  a district 
where  the  people  were  being  brought  under  the  influences 
of  Christian  instruction ; and  owing  to  the  interposition  of 
the  teachers,  their  lives  were  spared.  It  might  be  supposed 
that  these  two  men  would  have  manifested  their  gratitude 
at  least  by  kindliness  of  conduct  towards  the  natives;  but, 
alas ! the  tale  to  be  told  reveals  a recklessness  and  a deprav- 
ity not  exceeded  even  by  the  heathen  themselves. 


1ST, AND  <)F  MARE. 


15 


Having  resolved  to  escape  to  an  island  about  sixty  miles 
distant,  these  men  equipped  themselves  by  stealing  from  the 
chief,  who  had  been  their  friend,  a quantity  of  clothes  and 
other  articles,  and  even  many  garments  belonging  to  the 
teachers,  who  had  been  the  means  of  sparing  their  lives. 
Thus  laden  with  ill-gotten  spoil,  one  morning  just  before 
daybreak,  they  took  the  mission  canoe,  and  put  to  sea. 

Before,  however,  they  had  made  much  progress,  their 
deed  of  darkness  was  discovered,  and  a party  of  exasperated 
semi-savage  natives  took  to  their  canoes,  and  at  a distance 
of  about  two  miles  at  sea  overtook  the  ungrateful  delin- 
quents. Thinking  their  conduct  would  be  punished  by 
death,  the  two  men  attempted  to  drown  themselves;  the 
natives,  however,  dived  after  them,  and  half  dead  they  were 
taken  out  of  the  sea,  and  returned  as  prisoners  to  the 
shore. 

On  their  arrival,  the  first  thought  of  the  heathen  chief 
was  to  kill  the  two  scoundrels,  but  yielding  to  the  persua- 
sion of  the  Christian  teacher,  he  spared  their  lives,  and  they 
were  permitted  to  leave  the  island,  on  board  the  first  ship 
that  came  after  the  affair. 

In  these  notices  we  see  the  inveterate  revengeful  and  can- 
nibal propensities  of  those  heathen  tribes;  we  also  see  how 
easily  those  propensities  are  excited  to  cruelty  of  actiou,  iu 
some  instances  by  the  imprudence,  and  in  others  by  the  in- 
justice, of  our  own  countrymen  ; and  we  further  witness  the 
practical  development  of  the  first  influences  of  Christian  in- 
struction taming  the  ferociousness  of  the  savage,  inducing 
him  to  yield  to  the  argument  of  love,  and  securing  from 
him  the  exercise  of  forbearance  towards  objects  who  had 
deserved  punishment  at  his  hands. 

Having  thus  given  a brief  insight  of  the  heathen  char- 
acter of  the  people  of  Mare,  we  must  proceed  to  narrate 
details  more  immediately  connected  with  the  introduction  of 


16 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Christianity  to  them  : the  difficulties  it  has  had  to  contend 
with,  the  triumph  it  has  won,  and  its  present  advanced  posi- 
tion amongst  this  once  degraded,  but  now  deeply  interesting 
people ; many  of  whom  are  moral  and  spiritual  gems,  sought 
out  from  the  deepest  depths  of  human  ruin,  and  who,  pol- 
ished by  the  agency  of  a preached  gospel,  are  destined  to 
shine  as  the  stars  of  the  firmament,  in  the  region  of  complete 
and  eternal  purity  and  bliss. 

The  first  Christian  teachers  who  landed  among  this  people 
on  the  island  of  Mare,  were  two  educated  intelligent  na- 
tives, from  the  Rarotongan  and  the  Samoan  islands.  Two 
years  after  their  landing,  they  were  visited  in  the  missionary 
ship  by  the  Rev.  A.  Murray,  who  was  pleased  to  find  that  a 
favourable  impression  was  being  made  on  the  minds  of  some 
of  the  people  in  favour  of  Christianity. 

After  this  visit,  the  teachers  were  permitted  to  build 
themselves  a house ; which,  being  finished,  stood  in  perfect 
contrast  to  the  wretched  hovels  occupied  by  the  people  of 
the  land.  It  was  the  first  appearance  of  civilization  seen  by 
these  rude  savages.  A large  space  in  the  centre  of  the 
building  was  set  apart  for  week-day  instruction  and  Sabbath- 
day  preaching.  The  teachers  in  erecting  this  house  were 
assisted  by  many  of  the  young  men  of  the  island,  who  saw 
with  wonder,  how  materials  so  nigh  at  hand,  could  by  the 
proper  use  of  the  saw,  and  adze,  and  plane — tools  which 
they  had  never  before  seen — be  formed  into  so  commodious 
a dwelling-place,  and  also  into  articles  of  furniture  .and 
domestic  use. 

In  the  first  class  of  heathen  youths  gathered  together  for 
daily  instruction,  there  were  two  sons  of  Jeiue,  the  old 
heathen  chieftain  of  the  district.  These  two  young  men 
soon  became  deeply  interested  in  the  new  instruction  the 
teachers  imparted,  and  were  raised  up,  by  God,  to  protect 
them,  when  the  rage  of  their  heathen  father  and  of  tho 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


17 


people  would  have  destroyed  them.  Before,  however,  much 
progress  could  be  made  in  instructing  the  people  of  Mare, 
the  teachers  had  to  learn  their  language.  This  was  no  easy 
task.  In  the  eastern  groups  we  find  but  different  dialects 
of  the  same  language,  but  in  these  western  groups,  the  lan- 
guage is  quite  different  in  its  structure  and  idiom. 

The  following  translation  of  Mark  x.  14,  “ Suffer  little 
children,"  &c  , in  two  dialects  of  the  eastern  groups,  and 
two  different  languages  of  the  western  islands,  will  serve  as 
a specimen. 

Eastern  Islands,  Tahitian,  Mark  x.  14. 

A tuu  mai  i te  tamarii  rii  ia  haere  noa  mai  ia’  u nei,  e 
eiaha  e tapea  hia'  tu. 

Rarotonga , Mark  x.  14. 

Ka  tuku  mai  ana  i te  tamariki  meangiti  kia  aere  mai  ana 
kiaku,  auraka  e tapuia  atu. 

Western  Islands,  Mark,  Mark  x.  14. 

Uajiro  maichaman  uaam,  jo  hue  tu  nu,  ake  jori  maru  nui 
puiji  ekereso  o no  re,  me  ne  nge  roi  o makeze. 

New  Caledonia,  Mark  x.  14. 

Yano  me  vanikore  tonie,  mo  ve  pete  me  iera,  nowi  tene 
ve  avetete  mo  toko  o Jehova. 


THE 

numerals. 

Rarotonga. 

Tana. 

Loyalty  Island. 

New  Caledonia. 

1.  Tai 

Liti 

Chas 

Ta 

2.  Rua 

Karu 

Luetse 

Bo 

8.  Toru 

Kahar 

Konite 

Beti 

4.  A 

Kefa 

Eketse 

Beu 

5.  Rima 

Crirum 

Tipi 

Tahue 

6.  Ono 

— 

Chagemen 

No-ta 

7.  Itu 

— 

Luegemen 

No  bo 

8.  Yaru 

' — 

Konigemen 

No-beti 

9.  Iva 

— 

Ekegemen 

No-bcu 

10.  Nqauru 

— 

Luepi 

De-kau 

2* 

18 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


These  brief  specimens  will  give  an  idea  of  the  diffi- 
culty the  natives  of  the  Rarotongan  and  Samoan  islands  had 
in  learning  the  languages  of  the  western  groups ; especially 
when  it  is  remembered  that  the  people  had  no  knowledge  of 
any  letter  or  sign,  or  any  character  whatever  by  which  to 
signify  the  sounds  they  uttered.  Yet  this  difficulty  has 
been  mastered  by  our  teachers;  they  also  made  the  first 
attempt  to  reduce  the  languages  to  a written  form,  and 
invariably  are  the  pundits  of  the  first  European  missionaries 
who  resided  among  these  tribes. 

Just  as  the  teachers  on  Mark  were  getting  proficient  in 
the  language,  and  were  cheered  by  the  daily  attendance  of 
many  of  the  natives  on  their  instruction,  a very  general  and 
fatal  epidemic  broke  out  on  the  land,  great  numbers  of  the 
people  died,  the  same  day  they  were  attacked,  in  agony 
most  severe.  The  only  medicine  to  which  the  afflicted  had 
resort  was  sea-water,  of  which  they  drank  in  great  quanti- 
ties. Various  religious  services  were  also  performed  by 
the  “ sacred  men,”  but  all  without  success.  The  poor  peo- 
ple died  in  great  numbers  daily,  and  the  land  was  full  of 
lamentation. 

At  length  with  a view  to  propitiate  the  gods,  two  of  the 
“ sacred  men”  were  appointed  to  die  ; a day  for  the  sacrifice 
was  fixed  on,  the  people  who  could  attend  assembled  around 
the  altar — the  victims  were  murdered — but  there  was  no 
abatement  of  the  disease,  many  of  the  people  were  taken 
off  daily  by  its  virulence. 

In  the  midst  of  this  extreme  distress,  it  was  concluded, 
that  the  teachers  of  the  new  religion  must  die,  and  be 
offered  in  sacrifice  to  the  gods. 

Knowing  the  superstitious  notions  of  the  islanders,  the 
native  Christians  realized  their  danger,  and  calmly  resigned 
themselves  to  the  will  of  God.  The  time  of  trial  was  now 
come.  An  influential  party  of  heathen  natives  came  from 


ISLAND  OP  MARE. 


19 


a distant  district,  to  that  where  the  teachers  lived,  and 
with  much  solemnity  demanded  au  interview  with  the  prin- 
cipal chief.  They  said,  that  they  had  brought  a present  of 
food  and  native  property  to  him,  and  expressed  their  deter- 
mination to  take  off  the  Rarotongan  and  Samoan  teachers,  to 
put  them  to  death  immediately,  and  to  present  their  bodies 
to  the  gods ; stating  that  this  was  the  only  hope  left  to  them 
to  save  their  population. 

The  old  chief,  Jeiue,  accepted  the  present  thus  brought, 
and  consented  to  the  proposal  of  the  visitors.  Death 
seemed  inevitable,  but  God  interposed,  through  the  means 
of  Jeiue’s  sons.  Much  distressed  at  the  decision  of  their 
father,  they  placed  a ransom  in  the  hands  of  the  visitors,  and 
thus  succeeded  in  saving  the  lives  of  the  two  Christian  men. 
whom  they  now  esteemed  as  their  best  friends. 

A few  weeks  after  the  above  took  place,  the  virulence  of 
the  disease  abated,  but  before  the  people  had  quite  recovered 
from  their  distress,  or  the  teachers  had  realized  the  mercy 
of  their  salvation,  another  cloud  gathered  blackness,  and 
threatened  destruction. 

A brother  chief  of  old  Jeiue  on  Lifu,  an  island  about 
seventy  miles  from  Marh,  having  heard  that  death  was 
sweeping  away  so  many  of  the  people  of  Marh,  manned  his 
double  canoe,  and  sent  a special  messenger  to  advise  him  to 
rid  his  land,  without  delay,  of  the  Samoan  and  Rarotongan 
teachers  of  “ the  new  religion.”  This  advice  was  urged  on 
the  fact,  that  an  English  sandal-wood  ship  had  lately  touched 
at  Lifu,  the  captain  of  which  had  positively  affirmed  “ that 
Jehovah,  the  God  whom  the  Rarotongans  wished  them  to 
worship,  was  a man-slaying  God,  and  that  the  people  of 
Rarotonga  and  Samoa  were  fast  dying,  since  they  had 
received  this  new  religion.”  These  statements  led  the  old 
chief  of  Marh  again  to  resolve  that  the  work  of  Christian  in- 
struction should  not  advance  amongst  his  people  ; and  but 


20 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


for  the  interposition  of  the  young  men  before  mentioned, 
the  teachers  would  have  been  put  to  death. 

Alas  ! that  we  are  constrained  to  admit  the  fact,  that  our 
own  countrymen  give  out  to  a heathen  people  such  vile 
reports  as  the  above.  Such,  however,  is  the  fact,  and  god- 
less Britons  have,  in  this  and  other  ways,  done  more  to 
prevent  the  progress  of  Christianity  and  civilization  in  the 
islands  of  Western  Polynesia,  than  all  the  united  agency  of 
savageism  and  idolatry  of  the  natives,  whom  we  have  sought 
to  bless. 

Under  such  circumstances,  the  Christian  teacher  has  to 
sow  the  seed  of  instruction  with  much  weeping,  and  it  is  only 
as  he  receives  from  his  God  daily  supplies  of  faith,  patience, 
and  love,  that  he  labours  on  with  present  comfort,  or  has 
any  prospect  of  a future  and  successful  harvest. 


CHAPTER  III. 

The  first  visit  of  the  “ John  Williams”  to  Marft — Reinforcements  of  native 
teachers  for  the  island — The  first  teachers’  report  of  labours  during 
the  mission  vessel’s  absence — Dawn  of  hopeful  success  in  1847 — Old 
Jeiue’s  selfish  schemes  to  hinder  the  good  work — The  native  tea- 
chers’adaptation  to  their  work — Commencement  of  evening  classes 
for  native  youth — War  prevented — Jeiue  mortified. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  in  making  a voyage  from 
the  parent  missions  in  the  Rarotonga  group  to  the  island 
of  Marti,  we  have  to  travel  some  three  thousand  miles. 
Hence  the  joy  of  the  missionaries  on  the  arrival  of  the 
Children  of  England’s  Missionary  Ship,  to  the  islands.  We 
had  long  felt  a desire  to  be  able  to  visit  the  Western  Islauds 
with  more  frequency  and  regularity  than  could  possibly  be 
secured  by  any  other  vessels. 

In  1846,  accompanied  by  several  Rarotongan  Christian 
teachers,  we  left  Rarotonga,  in  this  mission  ship,  and  after 
calling  at  the  Samoan  islands,  where  we  were  joined  by  the 
Rev.  H.  Nisbet,  and  several  native  brethren  from  that 
mission,  we  sailed  to  the  islands  of  the  distant  Loyalty  group. 

On  approaching  the  shores  of  Mare  we  saw  hundreds  of 
the  wild  naked  savage  heathen  population  running  along 
the  beach,  or  dancing  through  the  cocoa-nut  groves,  in  the 
utmost  state  of  frenzy,  and  so  loud  was  the  yelling  as  to  be 
distinctly  heard  on  board  the  ship  as  we  sailed  some  distance 
from  the  shore. 


(21) 


22 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Arriving  off  the  settlement  where  the  teachers  had  been 
landed  two  years  before,  we  were  cheered  by  soon  seeing 


one  of  them  coming  off  to  us  in  a canoe,  and  on  reaching 
the  ship  we  were  glad  to  find  him  accompanied  by  two  sous 
of  the  chief,  who  had  now  resolved  to  abide  by  the  instruc- 
tion of  the  word  of  God. 

Although  much  encouraging  progress  had  been  made,  yet 
it  was  not  deemed  prudent  for  the  ship  to  come  to  an  anchor, 
nor  even  that  we  should  trust  ourselves  on  shore.  The 
lives  of  the  teachers  were  safe,  yet  such  was  the  wildness 
and  unsubdued  savageism  of  the  masses  of  the  people  on 
shore  that  no  dependence  could  be  placed  on  them  at  this  pe- 
riod, for  the  security  of  life,  for  even  our  clothes  were  sufficient 
to  present  a temptation  to  them  to  commit  acts  of  violence. 

The  teachers  had  made  good  progress  in  the  language, 
and  it  was  pleasing  to  see  that  the  people  now  thoroughly 
understood  the  object  of  our  visit,  in  contrast  with  that  of 
those  foreigners  who  had  come  among  them  for  other  pur- 
poses. 

Gaining  much  valuable  information  on  this  visit  respect- 
ing this  early  stage  of  the  people’s  advance  in  knowledge, 
we  were  permitted  to  land  two  other  teachers,  to  strengthen 
and  to  extend  the  good  work  thus  commenced. 

From  the  journals  of  these  devoted  pioneers  we  learn 


ISLAND  OF  MAKE. 


23 


much  respecting  the  difficult  nature  of  their  first  labours. 
They  give  a vivid  picture  of  the  fallow  ground  which  had  to 
be  broken  up  before  the  seed  sown  could  take  root  and 
yield  fruit.  Trials  and  difficulties  abounded,  yet  the  faith 
aud  patience  of  the  husbandmen  were  sustained  by  witness- 
ing the  slow  but  sure  advance  made  on  the  mental  darkness 
and  the  degraded  habits  of  the  people. 

Early  in  1847  the  teachers  thus  write  : — “We  have  been 
long  weeping,  but  now  we  are  becoming  glad.  We  see  our 
work  is  not  altogether  in  vain.  Our  house  is  open  for 
daily  teaching.  Many  of  the  old  people  frequently  come, 
and  are  attentive  to  instruction ; and  nearly  all  the  children 
who  live  near  us  are  constant  in  their  attendance.  We 
have  week-day  services  explaining  the  word  of  God,  and 
two  public  assemblies  on  the  Sabbath.  These  are  now  well 
attended ; but,  alas  ! alas  ! the  poor  people  come,  almost 
without  exception,  in  their  heathen  naked  condition.  Some 
few  of  them  get  plaited  leaves,  which  they  wear  around  the 
loins.  Alas ! as  we  look  at  them,  our  heart  is  sick  with 
compassion  towards  them,  and  we  have  given  to  them  the 
native  cloth  sent  by  you  last  year.  The  childreu  who  at- 
tend school  have  nothing  but  plaited  leaves  to  cover  them. 
But  they  are  making  progress,  and  their  parents  are  be- 
ginning to  be  interested  in  the  ‘ new  words  we  teach.' 
Brethren,  pray  for  us.  We  often  retire  in  secret,  and  pray 
that  God  would  speedily  cause  his  word  to  grow  in  this  land.” 

While  the  people  were  thus  making  progress  in  Christian 
instruction,  the  old  chief,  Jeiue,  urged  on  by  the  jea- 
lousy of  the  heathen  “ sacred  men,”  did  all  he  could  to 
annoy  and  oppose  the  teachers.  Because  his  two  sons  had 
espoused  the  new  religion,  he  just  gave  the  Rarotongan  and 
Samoan  men  the  protection  of  his  despotic  power ; at  the 
same  time  he  was  secretly  enraged  at  their  successes,  and 
resolved  to  banish  them  the  island  as  soon  as  possible.  To 


24 


OEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


save  time,  this  heathen  chieftain  devised  a plan  that 
should  interfere  as  much  as  possible  with  the  schools.  He 
ordered  a new  house  to  be  built  for  himself  in  Rarotongan 
style,  and  demanded  that  the  teachers  should  be  the  archi- 
tects. They  were  to  follow  his  servants  to  the  felling  of 
trees,  they  were  to  saw  the  trees  into  planks,  and  they  were 
to  be  at  the  work  every  day  from  daybreak  until  sunset 
until  the  house  was  finished. 

Although  necessity  was  thus  laid  on  them,  and  to  have 
resisted  would  have  been  fatal,  yet  our  devoted  teachers,  in 
the  spirit  of  Him  who  became  all  things  to  all  men,  gave 
themselves  to  the  erection  of  this  first  building  on  the 
island,  for  the  chief’s  residence,  worthy  the  name  of  a house. 
Iu  this  doubtless  they  were  right;  their  knowledge  of  the 
use  of  tools,  in  building  comfortable  houses,  in  making  su- 
perior canoes,  and  in  teaching  the  people  to  make  articles  of 
furniture  connected  with  civilized  domestic  life,  aided  them 
much  in  accelerating  the  advance  of  this  savage  people  from 
the  degradation  of  heathenism  to  a moral  and  social  eleva- 
tion. 

In  this  instance  it  was  intended  by  the  old  Jeiue  to 
interrupt  the  daily  teaching  in  the  schools,  but  the  restraint 
thus  enforced  gave  increased  impetus  to  the  desires  after 
knowledge  already  created  in  the  minds  of  the  chief’s  two 
sons,  and  also  in  a few  other  young  people  who  were  now  en- 
tering on  a new  state  of  life.  They  consequently  requested 
the  teachers  to  have  an  evening  class,  to  which  they  might 
attend  after  the  labours  of  the  day  about  the  house.  A class 
was  formed  as  they  requested,  a goodly  number  of  the  young 
people  attended,  and  every  evening’s  fresh  acquisition  of 
knowledge  increased  their  desire  to  gain  more.  Thus  a 
double  blessing  was  secured  where  the  opposing  heathen 
chieftain  had  designed  nothing  but  evil. 

About  this  time,  while  the  work  of  instruction  was  ad- 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


25 


vaneing  amongst  the  people  with  whom  the  teachers  resided, 
the  heathen  tribes  on  the  other  side  of  the  laud  created  an 
occasion  of  disturbance  which  threatened  to  destroy  all 
hopes  of  success. 

One  Sabbath  day,  while  the  people  were  assembled  for 
worship,  a party  of  these  wild  savages  arrived  in  the  settle- 
ment. The  war  whoop  was  vociferated  by  a hundred 
voices,  and  at  an  unexpected  moment  all  was  excitement 
and  confusion.  They  announced  to  the  chief  that  their 
tribes  had  been  attacked  by  another  tribe,  that  many  of 
their  people  had  been  killed,  that  most  of  their  plantations 
had  been  desolated,  and  their  huts  destroyed  by  fire.  They 
had  now  come  to  Jeiue  and  his  people  as  their  allies,  and 
requested  that  without  delay  they  would  unite  with  them 
in  an  act  of  retaliation  upon  their  enemies. 

To  secure  this  object  they  had  brought  the  dead  bodies 
of  five  men,  secured  from  among  the  slain  of  the  opposing 
tribe.  These,  as  was  the  usual  custom,  were  intended  to 
supply  a cannibal  feast  before  uniting  in  the  proposed 
attack. 

Much  to  the  distress  of  the  little  party,  who  were  now 
yielding  themselves  to  the  iufluenees  of  Christian  instruc- 
tion, the  old  chief  Jeiue  gave  the  visitors  a cordial  welcome, 
confirmed  their  old  alliance,  and  ordered  the  bodies  of  the 
humau  beings  before  him  to  be  cooked  in  the  ovens.  This 
was  a day  of  great  anxiety  to  the  Christian  teachers;  but 
nerved  with  more  than  usual  boldness,  they  determined  to 
present  themselves  before  the  half-deified  heathen  chief. 
After  giving  expression  to  the  distress  of  their  minds  at  the 
circumstances  of  the  day,  they  assured  him  that  if  he 
yielded  to  the  request  made,  and  especially,  if  he  persisted 
in  having  the  proposed  feast  on  the  bodies  brought,  that  his 
sin^  against  Jehovah  would  be  greater  now  than  it  would 
have  been  in  the  days  of  his  complete  ignorance.  They 
3 


26 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


exhorted  him  to  consider  his  ways,  and  to  set  aside  his  pre- 
vious wicked  designs.  These  exhortations  were  sustained 
by  the  advice  of  his  sons.  Jeiue  yielded,  the  five  bodies 
were  decently  buried,  the  cannibal  feast  was  prevented,  aud 
a proclamation  was  made  to  the  warriors  that  none  would 
be  compelled  to  go  to  the  war  against  their  own  desires. 

Still,  however,  the  heart  of  this  old  despot  remained  un- 
changed, and  he  continued  to  create  circumstances  of  annoy- 
ance to  the  Christian  party.  Soon  after  the  above  defeat, 
one  Sabbath  morning  he  sent  his  messengers  throughout 
the  settlement,  announcing  his  determination  to  have  fish- 
ing sport  that  morning  in  the  sea;  aud  demanded  that  his 
people  should  accompany  him,  bringing  their  lances  and 
their  nets.  This  act  was  wantonly  determined  on  to  annoy 
the  teachers,  at  the  time  of  worship ; and  to  a great  mea- 
sure it  was  successful. 

Unexpectedly,  however,  Jeiue  and  his  party  attended 
public  service  in  the  house  of  God  on  the  evening  of  the 
day,  but  their  behaviour,  in  the  midst  of  the  congregation, 
manifested  the  same  spirit  of  daring  opposition  that  had 
led  them  on  in  their  moruiug’s  diversion.  Seeing  this  to  be 
the  case,  the  teacher,  in  the  practical  application  of  the 
sermon,  waxed  warm,  and  perhaps  exceeded  the  limits  of 
prudence,  in  his  reference  to  the  conduct  of  the  party, 
whom  he  addressed  personally. 

Enraged  at  this  public  reproof,  Jeiue  felt  himself  hum- 
bled in  the  sight  of  his  people,  over  whom  he  had  reigned 
with  diabolical  tyranny,  before  the  introduction  of  “ the  new 
religion.”  He  gathered  together  his  principal  people — 
proclaimed  a prohibition  under  severe  penalties,  against  the 
people  attending  the  instruction  of  the  teachers,  and  vowed 
that  he  would  adhere  to  his  heathen  practices  to  the  day  of 
his  death. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


Act  of  incantation  on  the  teachers — The  people  suffer  from  fever  and 
ague — Illness  of  the  chief’s  sons — Lives  of  the  teachers  again 
threatened — Old  Jeiue’s  illness — His  state  of  mind — His  death — 
More  difficulties  from  heathen  tribes — Advance  of  mission. 

Under  the  combined  influences  of  mortified  pride  and 
inveterate  hatred  to  the  new  state  of  things,  the  chief  was 
now  determined  to  bring  things  to  a crisis.  His  priests 
came  to  his  aid,  and  in  good  earnest  they  commenced  the 
ceremonies  of  incantation,  with  a view  to  destroy  the  new 
religion  by  taking  away  the  lives  of  the  teachers. 

Several  of  the  principal  “ sacred  men  ” waited  day  by  day, 
in  acts  of  worship  before  the  gods,  and  their  devotions  being 
complete  they  came  one  evening,  and  surrounded  the 
teachers’  house.  The  oldest  of  their  party  secretly  entered, 
having  with  him  his  basket  of  sacred  relics.  These  he 
arranged  in  due  order,  and  then  the  whole  company  of 
‘‘sacred  men”  wrought  themselves  into  fanatic  excitement; 
— running  in  and  out  of  the  house,  they  first  flourished 
their  clubs  in  the  air,  and  then  with  awful  fury  struck  them 
ou  the  ground,  at  the  same  time  vociferating  their  hellish 
imprecations  ou  the  devoted  objects  of  their  hate. 

(27) 


28 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


At  length,  alike  exhausted  and  confounded,  they  returned 
unsuccessful  to  their  homes;  for  smiles,  and  life,  and  good 
humour  were  manifested  by  the  teachers,  on  whom  they 
had  sought  to  produce  fear,  consternation  and  death. 

Slowly  yet  surely  the  cause  of  education  and  civilization 
was  progressing  among  the  people  of  Mare,  when  nearly  the 
whole  population  were  again  laid  low  by  the  general  preva- 
lence of  influenza,  with  fever  and  ague.  The  whole  of  the 
people  were  more  or  less  affected — many  were  seriously  ill 
— and  not  a few  died. 

Jeiue,  the  superstitious  chief,  escaped  an  attack,  but  his 
two  sons  had  the  complaint  so  severely,  that  it  was  thought 
they  would  die.  The  father,  notwithstanding  many  signal 
defeats  in  his  opposition  to  the  advance  of  Christian  instruc- 
tion, availed  himself  of  the  illness  of  his  sons,  to  manifest 
his  continued  hatred  to  the  teachers,  and  iu  the  name  of  his 
gods,  he  vowed,  that  if  either  of  them  died,  that  very  hour 
the  teachers’  lives  should  be  sacrificed.  This  was  a season 
of  more  than  ordinary  trial  to  those  devoted  men.  Con- 
scious that  they  had  no  power  to  save  life,  yet  sure  that  if 
either  of  their  attached  young  disciples  should  die,  the 
commands  of  the  chief  would  be  executed  on  them,  they 
gave  themselves  to  prayer.  Their  prayer  was  heard — faith 
and  patience  were  granted  to  them  during  the  days  of  un- 
certainty, and  in  mercy  the  health  of  the  two  young  chief- 
tains was  restored,  and  the  wicked  purposes  of  the  father 
frustrated.  Jeiue  would  much  rather  that  the  death  of  one 
of  his  sons  had  given  him  a pretext  for  murdering  the 
teachers,  than  that  the  teachers  should  have  lived,  and  the 
gospel  live  with  them  in  his  land. 

After  these  trials,  a season  of  comparative  uninterrupted 
labour  was  granted  to  the  Christian  party,  and  so  great  was 
the  success  gained,  that  before  the  events  recorded  in  the 
following  chapter  took  place,  the  majority  of  the  people  of 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


29 


four  villages,  in  Jeiue’s  district  of  country,  had  placed  them- 
selves under  daily  instruction. 

We  have  now  to  detail  the  illness  and  death  of  the  half- 
enlightened,  yet  heart  hardened,  wicked  Jeiue.  The  time 
is  now  come,  when  this  old  heatheu  must  mourn  the  want 
of  that  grace  which  he  so  long  and  so  obstiuately  re- 
jected. 

At  the  latter  end  of  1848,  Jeiue  was  taken  ill,  and  soon 
after  the  attack  severe  symptoms  of  dropsy  were  developed. 
Day  by  day  he  grew  worse,  and  as  is  usual,  alike  in  uncivi- 
lized and  in  civilized  lands,  the  serious  illness  of  a chief  is  a 
season  of  public  anxiety  and  alarm ; so  it  was  now  with  the 
people  of  Marb.  Every  available  means  for  Jeiue’s  recovery 
was  resorted  to — offerings  of  food,  and  charms,  and  prayers; 
everything,  except  human  sacrifices,  was  religiously  attended 
to  by  the  heathen  priests;  but  they  were  of  no  avail,  the  old 
man  continued  to  grow  worse.  The  Christian  teachers  too 
did  all  they  could  to  relieve  his  sufferings  and  to  instruct 
his  mind.  In  one  of  their  letters,  written  at  this  time,  they 
say — “ Alas  ! alas  ! for  the  parent  chief  Jeiue  ; our  com- 
passion toward  him  is  very  great.  We  see  him  every  day; 
we  talk  with  him  about  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  ; we  give 
him  what  foreign  medicines  we  have,  but  he  gets  no  better  : 
Jeiue  must  die!’' 

During  this  sickness,  the  disconsolate  sufferer  manifested 
more  mental  distress  than  is  usually  seen  in  a heathen.  He 
often  expressed  a wish  that  “ he  had  died  ten  years  be- 
fore.” And  why  ? Alas  ! the  light  of  life  and  love  had 
been  shining  around  him,  but  he  had  opposed  its  entrance 
into  his  heart,  and  its  power  over  his  people.  He  had  loved 
darkness,  and  now  in  darkness  of  soul,  stung  by  an  upbraid- 
ing conscience,  he  must  die  ! 

As  his  end  drew  near,  the  faithful  anxious  Christian  in- 
structors never  left  him;  to  them  the  self-condemned  man 
3* 


30 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


unveiled  the  bitterness  of  his  soul,  in  review  of  his  idolatry, 
his  heathen  practices,  and  his  cannibalism. 

In  a moment  of  comparative  repose,  he  said  to  his  sons, 
“I  have  been  wrong  in  my  opposition  to  the  word  of  Jeho- 
vah— attend  you  to  my  advice,  and  continue  as  you  have 
begun ; let  the  heathenism  of  our  family  die  with  me ; 
be  kind  to  the  teachers,  and  never  again  let  cannibalism 
be  practised  in  this  land.” 

To  questions  proposed  to  him,  it  was  pleasing  to  find 
that,  even  at  the  eleventh  hour,  the  dying  sinner  acknow- 
ledged that  “Jesus  was  the  only  Saviour:”  to  every  an- 
nouncement made  to  him  of.  the  love  of  God,  and  of  his 
willingness  and  power  to  save  unto  the  uttermost,  he  bowed 
an  emphatic  assent,  and  his  last  words  were,  “ Jesus  is  the 
only  Saviour.”  Thus  died  Jeiue.  His  sons  determined  to 
bury  him  with  a Christian  burial,  and  selected  a natural 
cave,  in  a rock,  facing  the  sea,  as  the  place  of  interment  j 
where  the  coffin  was  fastened  to  the  ground  by  many 
lengths  of  cable  chain  belonging  to  one  of  the  ships,  which 
had  been  cut  off  by  the  old  man’s  commands,  a few  years 
before. 

Many  points  of  character  in  this  heathen  chief  might 
be  commented  on  with  advantage  to  the  missionary  enter- 
prise, but  we  must  proceed  in  narrating  the  progress  of  the 
word  of  God  among  the  people  of  Marb. 

Soon  after  the  death  of  Jeiue,  his  eldest  son,  liberated 
from  the  restraint  his  father  had  imposed,  gathered  together 
the  principal  people  of  his  district.  Representatives  both 
of  the  Christian  and  heathen  parties  were  there,  and  a long 
discussion  took  place  respecting  the  past  history  of  heathen- 
ism, and  the  present  position  of  Christianity.  At  the  close 
of  this  meeting  the  young  chief  Nasilini  made  known  his 
determination,  that  heathenism  and  idolatry  should  no  longer 
reign  in  his  districts  of  country,  that  he  and  his  brother  had 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


31 


NASILINI 


32 


OEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


given  themselves  to  Jehovah,  the  true  God,  and  that  they 
intended  to  use  their  influence  to  establish  his  worship 
throughout  the  whole  laud. 

Such  was  the  pleasing  condition  of  the  principal  settle- 
ment in  Marii  about  the  middle  of  1849.  There  was 
still,  however,  on  the  other  side  of  the  islaud,  a numerous 
tribe  over  whom  all  the  practices  of  heathenism  continued 
dominant.  To  this  tribe  the  teachers  looked  with  much 
anxiety,  and  used  every  practical  means  to  induce  them  to 
receive  instruction.  Its  chief  and  its  “sacred  men”  had 
done  much  to  annoy  the  Christian  party,  and  soon  after  the 
death  of  old  Jeiue  they  made  another  bold  attempt  to  in- 
volve them  iu  war. 

The  scheme  devised  was  as  follows  : — A man  and  woman 
of  this  tribe  were  found  dead,  near  the  district  belonging 
to  the  Christians.  Reports  were  widely  circulated  that 
these  bodies  had  been  murdered  by  the  Christian  party. 
The  plot  succeeded  in  exasperating  the  warriors  of  the  hea- 
then party,  who  assembled  in  large  numbers,  on  the  “ war 
ground  ” between  the  two  districts,  and  proclaimed  a war  of 
revenge  on  the  Christian  settlement. 

Day  after  day  messengers  were  sent,  urging  the  Christians 
to  come  out  and  fight — to  let  the  gods  decide  their  guilt  or 
innocence,  respecting  the  charge  of  murder,  by  their  defeat 
or  victory  in  the  attack.  Every  morning  and  evening,  mes- 
sengers were  sent  from  the  Christians,  to  their  enemies, 
stating  that  they  knew  nothing  of  the  murdered  bodies 
found — that  they  believed  the  whole  thing  had  been  done 
by  some  designing  persons  in  order  to  involve  them  in  diffi- 
culties, and  that  whatever  might  be  the  issue,  they  had  re- 
solved to  have  no  more  war. 

Finding,  however,  that  the  warriors  did  not  leave  the 
“ war  ground,”  Nasilini,  in  company  with  a few  of  his  head 
men,  went  unarmed  to  them,  and  finally  announced,  that 


ISLAND  OF  MARE 


33 


they  would  not  fight — that  they  now  feared  Jehovah — they 
were  learning  his  word,  and  intended  to  abide  by  its  in- 
structions. After  this  the  heathen  party  returned  to  their 
own  district;  their  diabolical  scheme  was  frustrated,  and 
since  then  there  has  beeu  no  more  war  on  the  island  of  Mare. 

“ Thus,  you  see,”  write  the  teachers,  “ the  word  of 
Jehovah  is  fulfilled  to  us  which  is  written  by  Moses,  saying, 
‘ Fear  not,  I am  with  thee;  I am  thy  shield  and  thy  reward/ 
The  work  of  God  is  growing  in  the  hearts  of  many  of  the 
people  here,  and  they  are  coming  every  day  to  us,  to  inquire 
respecting  heathen  practices  that  must  be  given  up  on 
making  a profession  of  having  become  a believer.” 

One  of  the  last  difficulties  these  anxious  inquirers  had  to 
overcome,  was  the  giving  up  of  their  plurality  of  wives.  Not 
' because  they  were  not  now  convinced  that  one  wife  in  the 
domestic  circle  is  better  than  many,  but  because  this  cus- 
tom had  been  a part  of  their  system  from  time  immemorial, 
and  because  so  much  labour  was  done  by  the  women.  They 
said,  “ Alas ! our  wives  are  our  hands,  and  if  we  cut  them 
off,  who  will  plant  our  food  and  do  our  work  ?” 

Honourable  mention  is  made,  however,  of  a few  who  at 
this  time,  for  the  gospel’s  sake,  gave  up  their  many  wives, 
each  only  retaining  one.  These  examples,  by  their  consist- 
ency of  conduct,  united  industry,  domestic  peace,  and  daily 
family  prayer,  did  much  good,  by  exhibiting  the  relative 
duties  of  Christians,  and  setting  before  the  heathen  party  a 
practical  exposition  of  the  doctrines  preached  by  the  teachers. 

Before,  however,  closing  this  chapter  and  witnessing  the 
further  triumph  of  the  gospel,  we  have  to  record  the  painful 
circumstances  of  another,  and  happily,  the  last  massacre  of 
Englishmen  on  this  island,  done  by  the  heathen  tribe  some 
little  time  before  their  war  scheme,  which  has  been  referred 
to.  An  English  ship  called  off  their  station,  the  captain  of 
which  wished  to  purchase  fire- wood  and  yams.  Vexations 


34 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


occurred  in  this  barter,  which  led  to  a quarrel,  three  of  the 
natives  were  killed  on  board  the  ship,  and  many  others 
severely  ill-used  and  sent  on  shore. 

The  whole  of  the  exasperated  tribe  vowed  revenge  on 
the  next  white  man’s  ship  that  should  come  within  their 
power. 

Unfortunately,  about  the  end  of  the  same  year,  a small 
cutter,  from  Sydney,  put  in  for  supplies  to  this  station.  By 
a well-organized  plan,  under  the  mask  of  friendly  trade, 
some  of  the  most  daring  of  the  savages  went  on  board  the 
little  vessel — the  innocent  and  unsuspecting  captain  and 
crew  suffered  the  fury  of  heathen  revenge — the  ship  was 
set  on  fire,  and  the  whole  of  its  company,  seven  in  number, 
were  murdered,  whose  bodies  were  taken  on  shore,  divided 
among  the  tribe  and  eaten. 

The  tidings  of  this  deed  of  bloodshed  much  distressed 
the  Christian  party.  They  now  felt  that  the  injury  done  to 
man  was  also  a sin  against  Jehovah.  They  had  reason  also 
to  fear  that  this  new  act  of  barbarity  towards  Englishmen 
would  bring  an  English  ship  of  war,  of  which  they  had  heard 
the  teachers  speak,  and  that  their  whole  land  would  be  in- 
volved in  trouble,  and  the  progress  of  the  good  work,  now 
going  on  so  well  among  themselves,  would  be  much  retarded. 

In  relating  the  new  experiences  of  their  souls,  under  these 
circumstances,  they  said,  “ Alas  for  us  ! we  never  felt  before 
as  we  now  feel.  When  in  heathen  darkness  we  knew 
nothing  of  this  kind  of  heart  distress,  on  account  of  the 
evils  done  in  our  laud.  Surely  this  change  has  been 
brought  about  by  the  word  of  Jehovah.  It  is  a bright 
light  shining  into  our  hearts.  We  now  see  the  greatness 
of  our  sin.  Alas  for  us  ! What  shall  we  do?  What  will 
be  the  end  of  these  things  ?” 


CHAPTER  V. 

First  visit  of  Bishop  of  New  Zealand  to  Mari — Havana  ship  of 
war — Captain  Ersltine’s  visit  to  the  island- — The  people  fear  the  con- 
sequences of  the  former  treatment  of  English  vessels — Public  con- 
sultation of  the  natives  — Proposed  substitution  for  the  life  of  the 
chief — Captain  Erskine’s  interview  with  the  people  on  shore — Arti- 
cles restored  to  Captain  Erskine. 

In  the  preceding  chapter  we  have  seen  the  struggle  be- 
tween light  and  darkness — life  and  death — as  sustained  by 
the  few  and  infant  disciples  of  Christ  against  the  powerful 
and  experienced  emissaries  of  Satan ; we  have  now  to  wit- 
ness the  advance  of  the  struggle,  and  to  rejoice  in  the 
steady  conquest  over  every  foe,  by  the  power  and  the  love 
of  Christ,  who  has  “ spoiled  principalities  and  powers,  and 
has  made  a show  of  them  opeuly,  triumphing  over  them  by 
his  cross.” 

Towards  the  latter  end  of  1849  we  are  told  by  Maka,  the 
Rarotongau  teacher,  that  “a  missionary  ship  from  New  Zea- 
land touched  at  Marh,  having  on  board  a missionary  called 
a hisopi  (bishop),  Dr.  Selwyn,  Bishop  of  New  Zealand. 
“ This  missionary  ship  was  accompanied  by  an  English  ship 
of  war  from  Sydney.  The  ship  of  war  came  on  account  of 
the  number  of  Englishmen  killed  by  this  people.” 

(35) 


30 


OEMS  PROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


As  might  be  expected,  the  appearance  of  these  vessels 
excited  the  worst  fears  of  Nasilini  and  his  brother.  Their 
own  participation  in  the  deeds  of  bloodshed  done  in  former 
years  pressed  heavily  on  their  minds.  In  their  distress 
they  asked  counsel  of  the  teachers,  who  told  them  to  con- 
fess all  that  they  knew  of  vessels  that  had  been  cut  off  by 
the  people.  They  were  assured  that  the  “ great  English 
captain  ” would  not  come  on  shore,  and  hastily  kill  them,  or 
destroy  their  village  for  deeds  done  in  heathenism  ; but  that 
he  would  demand  a consultation  with  the  chiefs  and  the 
people,  and  calmly  inquire  into  the  whole  truth.  To  this 
inquiry  they  were  advised  to  submit  with  confidence  and 
fidelity. 

A meeting  of  the  people  was  at  once  convened  by  Nasilini, 
the  chief,  who  stated  to  them  that  as  the  captain  was  coming 
on  shore  to-morrow,  to  inquire  respecting  the  murders 
which  had  been  committed  by  themselves  and  their  fathers, 
he  was  anxious  to  make  arrangements  for  his  reception,  and 
also  wished  to  know  their  opinion  as  to  what  satisfaction 
they  could  offer,  so  as  to  prevent  the  consequences  they 
dreaded. 

At  this  meeting  most  of  the  under  chiefs  of  the  tribe  ad- 
dressed the  assembly,  one  of  whom  made  the  following  ap- 
peal : — “ You  see  the  white  man’s  fighting  ship  has  come  to 
us ; the  great  captain  will  be  on  shore  to-morrow ; he  is  come 
to  be  revenged  on  us  for  the  murders  we  have  committed  on 
his  people.  We  all  know  that  we  have  done  wrong,  but  what 
can  we  now  do  to  deliver  ourselves?  We  have  no  property 
that  the  captain  will  value.  It  may  be  that  our  chief  will 
have  to  suffer.  Now  this  is  my  inquiry  to  you  all : who  is 
there  amongst  us  that  will  compassionate  our  chief  and  our 
land,  and  of  his  own  accord  will  come  forward  and  give  him- 
self up  to  the  English  captain,  either  to  be  put  to  death  or  to 
be  put  in  confinement  on  board  ship,  as  may  be  decided  on  ? 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


37 


O people,  think  of  this ; it  may  be  by  this  means  the 
foreigners  will  forgive  our  past  crimes,  and  save  our  land 
from  destruction.” 

This  appeal  deeply  affected  the  half-civilized  affrighted 
natives,  who  were  but  just  entering  into  the  light  and  liberty 
of  Christian  truth,  and  four  brave  men  came  forward  from 
amongst  the  multitude,  and  willingly  gave  themselves  up  to 
imprisonment  or  to  death,  as  Captain  Erskine  might  decide, 
if  by  so  doing  they  could  deliver  their  people  from  death. 

Captain  Erskine,  of  whose  kind  services  to  our  native 
teachers  we  cannot  speak  in  too  high  praise,  landed  on 
Mare  the  morning  after  the  above  meeting  was  held,  and  we 
cannot  do  better  than  record  the  interview  he  had  with  the 
people,  as  given  by  himself,  in  his  journal  of  a cruise 
amongst  the  islands. 

Captain  Erskine  says,  “ On  entering  the  little  boat  har- 
bour, the  first  object  which  struck  our  attention  was  part  of 
a canoe  inserted  at  a considerable  distance  above  the  sea  in 
a cave,  to  which  it  was  fastened  by  several  turns  of  an  iron 
chain.  This  was  the  coffin  and  burial-place  of  the  old  chief 
Jeiue,  and  the  securing  chain  was  a part  of  a cable  belonging 
to  an  English  ship  destroyed  by  this  tribe. 

“ It  being  high  water  we  landed  easily  on  the  beautiful 
sandy  beach,  in  a little  cove.  The  whole  population  was 
gathered  together  in  solemn  silence,  and  the  two  young 
chiefs  were  seated  in  the  centre.  In  no  instance  had  we 
yet  met  with  so  formal  a reception  ; and  it  was  evident  from 
the  anxiety  depicted  on  the  countenances  of  all,  that  they 
considered  the  great  question  of  forgiveness  or  punishment 
for  past  offences  was  now  to  be  settled. 

“We  took  our  seats  between  the  two  chiefs,  and  after  a 
short  pause  the  business  of  the  day  was  opened.  After  re- 
counting the  deeds  of  bloodshed  they  had  committed  in  the 
seizure  of  ships  and  the  massacre  of  white  men,  I alluded  to 
4 


38 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


the  report  I had  just  received  from  the  Christian  teachers 
respecting  their  improved  disposition,  the  abandonment 
of  savage  customs,  and  their  desire  for  instruction,  and 
concluded  by  saying  that  in  consequence  of  their  altered 
habits  and  the  contrition  they  had  expressed  for  their  former 
misdeeds,  I was  willing  to  forgive  the  past,  and  would  in- 
flict no  punishment.” 

As  a proof,  however,  of  their  sincerity,  Captain  Erskine 
demanded  that  they  should  surrender  to  him  all  articles 
still  in  their  possession,  belonging  to  the  unfortunate  vessels 
they  had  cut  off". 

This  communication  relieved  the  apprehensions  of  the 
people,  and  scarcely  had  the  demand  been  made  before 
several  men  came  dragging  many  lengths  of  chain  cable  of 
the  cutter  Sisters,  with  iron  mast  hoops  and  many  other 
articles,  which  were  given  over  to  Captain  Erskine. 

In  a speech  made  by  the  young  chief  Nasilini,  he  ex- 
pressed his  sorrow  for  their  former  wicked  practices,  and 
said  that  it  was  not  then  their  good  fortune  to  have  mis- 
sionary teaching,  and  that  now  he  hoped  nothing  of  the 
kind  would  ever  occur  again.  In  conclusion,  he  said  every 
article  in  their  possession  taken  from  ships  had  now  been 
given  up,  with  the  exception  of  the  chain  attached  to  Jeiue’s 
coffin,  but  it  also  should  be  sent  for  if  required. 

Captain  Erskine  disclaimed  any  intention  of  disturbing 
the  dead,  and  with  much  tact  requested  that  the  chain  in- 
terred with  the  old  chief  should  remain  in  the  grave  to  sig- 
nify that  all  their  animosities  should  be  for  ever  buried. 
This  figure  was  well  understood  by  the  natives,  and  much 
applauded.  Thus  favourably  ended  Captain  Erskine’s  in- 
terview with  the  people  of  Marb. 

The  Bishop  of  New  Zealand,  who  accompanied  Captain 
Erskine  on  shore,  and  who  has  often  expressed  himself  highly 
gratified  with  what  he  saw  of  the  people’s  advanced  position 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


39 


at  this  time,  gave  them  a short  exhortation  to  continue  to 
attend  to  Christian  instruction. 

Captain  Erskine  says  “ that  the  men  who  came  to  the 
conference  had  no  wrappers,  and  some  of  them  had  painted 
their  faces  in  white  lines  as  a sign  of  mourning.  Their  eyes 
were  remarkably  fine,  and  their  foreheads  high  and  well- 
formed.” 

As  a result  of  Christian  teaching,  Captain  Erskine  found 
the  people  very  eager  to  barter  the  produce  of  their  land  for 
shirts,  calico,  and  other  articles  of  English  manufacture.  This 
desire,  it  is  hoped,  will  be  encouraged  by  merchants  visiting 
the  island,  which,  if  met  with  justice  and  equity,  will  aid  them 
to  acquire  the  means  necessary  to  advance  their  civilization. 

And  now  after  a long,  dreary,  dangerous,  and  laborious 
night  of  years  of  toil,  the  devoted  Christian  teachers  were 
permitted  to  witness  the  beaming  forth  of  the  bright  rays 
of  morning  which  continue  to  increase  and  promise  a joyous 
day  of  enlarged  prosperity. 

Up  to  this  time  Sabbath-day  services  had  been  held  iu 
small  and  scattered  congregations ; it  was  now  proposed 
that  the  natives  who  lived  sufficiently  near  should  form 
themselves  into  a convenient  settlement.  This  being  done, 
the  people  united  their  energies  and  built  the  first  large 
commodious  chapel  erected  on  Marti.  Under  the  superin- 
tendence and  assistance  of  the  teachers,  this  house  of  prayer, 
a wattled  and  plastered  building,  was  speedily  finished.  It 
was  130  feet  long,  36  feet  wide,  and  42  feet  high  in  the 
roof. 

It  would  have  been  an  interesting  sight  to  have  seen  this 
half  enlightened,  half-subdued  barbarous  people,  busying 
themselves,  heart  and  hand  in  this  new  work  IIow  great 
the  change  manifested  then,  even  iu  their  transition  state,  as 
reviewed  iu  contrast  with  the  entirely  wild  condition,  iu 
which  they  were  found  but  a few  years  before  ! 


CHAPTER  VI. 

Opening  services  in  new  chapel — Another  morning  cloud — Its  disappear- 
ance— The  first  Christian  baptism  — Another  villago  occupied — An- 
other chapel  built — Book  in  language  of  Mare — Arrival  of  mission 
ship,  1852 — A joyous  day  on  shore — Native  desire  for  European 
missionaries. 

The  house  of  prayer  commenced  in  a spirit  and  under 
circumstances  of  so  much  interest,  as  those  referred  to  in 
the  last  chapter,  was  finished  early  in  1851,  and  the  people 
waited  three  months  after  its  completion,  hoping  the  Mission 
Ship  would  come  with  the  missionary  to  take  part  in  the 
opening  services.  At  length,  weary  of  delay,  they  resolved  to 
open  it  themselves,  a day  was  fixed  and  an  invitation  was 
sent  to  the  tribes  of  the  districts  near,  urging  them  to 
attend;  this  invitation  was  very  generally  accepted,  and 
great  numbers  came  together  on  the  auspicious  occasion. 

Referring  to  this  cheering  event,  the  teachers  say,  “ This 
was  a day  of  much  joy,  our  hearts  were  made  glad.  Early 
in  the  morning  messengers  were  sent  from  clan  to  clan  to  pro- 
claim the  joyful  occasion  each  one  calling  out  as  he  went,  ‘Bre- 
thren ! come,  come  to  the  opening  of  the  house  of  Jehovah ; 
come,  the  house  is  finished,  the  feast  is  ready,  come.’  ” 

Truly  might  it  have  been  said  that  day,  “ ITow  beautiful 
upon  the  mountains  are  the  feet  of  him  who  bringeth  good 
tidings,  good  tidings  of  peace.”  Obeying  the  joyful  summons, 
tribe  after  tribe  came  to  the  new  settlement,  and  with 
(40) 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


41 


v 


emotions  as  new  and  as  peculiar  as  the  circumstances, 
attended  the  opening  services  of  this  house  of  prayer. 

At  an  early  hour,  hundreds  of  visitors  had  arrived,  of 
whom,  with  the  people  of  the  districts,  more  than  a thousand 
entered  the  building. 

The  honoured  teachers  were  there.  Many  had  been  the 
years  of  toil  through  which  they  had  passed,  and  who  of  us 
can  realize  the  amount  of  trial  and  privation  which  they  had 
endured ; and  who  of  us  can  know  the  joy  they  now  felt 
while  they  stood  in  the  midst  of  the  large  assembly,  in  this 
house  of  God,  raised  by  their  own  industry,  and  aided  by  a 
people  who  a few  years  before  were  savage  cannibal  heathens  1 

While  we  may  in  some  degree  picture  to  our  minds  the 
pleasing  external  circumstances  of  their  new  position,  it  is 
impossible  to  describe  the  experiences  of  such  men,  as  they 
reviewed  the  past,  and  offered  praise  from  an  overflowing 
heart  to  the  living  God  who  had  been  their  help  and  confi- 
dence, and  who  was  now  become  their  salvation  and  their 

joy- 

It  would  have  been  a season  of  gladness  to  the  mission- 
aries, the  spiritual  fathers  of  the  teachers,  could  they  have 
witnessed  the  scenes  of  that  day;  and  what  a reward  and 
an  encouragement  would  have  been  realized  by  the  friends 
of  missions  at  home,  could  they  have  been  in  the  midst  of 
this  people  on  that  hallowed  occasion.  But  although  neither 
missionaries  nor  the  friends  of  missions  were  there, 
God  was  in  the  midst  of  them,  the  place  of  his  feet  was 
made  glorious.  Jesus  was  there : he  saw  the  travail  of  his 
soul,  and  rejoiced  in  the  triumphs  of  his  cross;  and  the 
angels  of  the  Most  High  were  there  to  renew  the  song  of 
Glory  to  God,  praise  to  the  Saviour,  and  peace  and  good- 
will amongst  men. 

After  a short  prayer,  a hymn  of  praise  was  sung,  translated 
into  the  language  of  Mare  from  the  Rarotonga  hymn  book. 

4* 


42 


OEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Only  having  a manuscript  copy,  the  teacher  read  line  by 
line,  and  while,  doubtless,  there  were  many  discordant 
voices,  yet  it  must  have  been  a thrilling  scene.  Portions  of 
the  holy  scriptures  were  then  read,  and  the  whole  assembly 
bowed  in  solemn  prayer.  Another  hymn  was  sung,  and  a 
sermon  preached  by  one  of  the  honoured  native  teachers, 
from  the  appropriate  words  in  the  Prophet  Isaiah,  chap,  lxi., 
1st  verse.  Words  of  mercy  indeed ! “ Good  tidings  unto 
the  meek,  healing  to  the  broken  in  heart,  liberty  to  the 
captive,  and  the  opening  of  the  prison  house  to  them  that 
were  bound.’'  This  scripture  was  fulfilled  that  day  in  the 
people  of  Marb.  Those  who  had  made  a profession  of  faith 
in  the  gospel  were  confirmed  in  their  profession  by  the  hal- 
lowed services  of  the  occasion,  and  many  who  had  come  from 
a distance  heard  for  the  first  time  the  plan  of  God’s  salva- 
tion plainly  unfolded,  were  led  to  see  the  folly  of  heathenism, 
and  gave  themselves  to  sincere  inquiry  after  the  truth. 

An  interesting  and  somewhat  remarkable  circumstance 
took  place  at  the  close  of  the  morning  service  in  the  dedica- 
tion to  God,  by  the  ordinance  of  baptism  which  was  adminis- 
tered to  five  adults  and  two  children.  This  was  the  first 
instance  of  the  kind  in  the  history  of  our  native  teachers’ 
pioneering  labours  in  the  islands  of  the  South  seas.  The 
missionaries  advise  the  teachers,  that  in  their  early  attempts 
to  instruct  a heathen  people,  they  should  leave  the  adminis- 
tering of  the  ordinances  of  the  gospel  until  those  instructed 
are  well  advanced  in  Christian  knowledge  and  experience. 

The  circumstances  of  this  deviation  from  the  general  rule 
were  peculiar,  and  justifying — there  was  no  doubt  respecting 
the  conversion  of  the  individuals  baptized;  the  teachers  and 
the  taught  had  evidence  that  the  Spirit  of  God  was  with 
them,  and  who  could  refuse  water  that  they  should  not 
baptize  ? 

After  the  morning  service  above  described,  most  of  the 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


43 


people  sat  down  under  the  shade  of  trees,  and  partook  of  a 
feast  which  had  been  prepared  by  the  inhabitants  of  the 
village. 

In  the  afternoon  the  company  re-assembled  in  the  chapel 
and  held  a kind  of  public  meeting.  One  of  the  teachers 
presided  and  many  of  the  people  gave  short  addresses. 
They  spoke  of  the  change  which  had  come  over  them  and 
their  land,  in  contrast  with  former  days;  they  expressed 
their  joy  at  their  present  altered  and  happy  condition;  and 
they  proclaimed  their  intention  to  adhere  with  constancy  to 
the  instructions  they  were  receiving  from  the  word  of  God. 

Thus  closed  a day  of  glorious  triumph  : the  elevating, 
sanctifying  power  of  the  gospel  was  seen  in  the  mental, 
social,  moral,  and  spiritual  improvement  of  these  people, 
who  had  been  dug  up  from  the  lowest  depths  of  human 
depravity,  and  were  destined  to  become  bright  gems  of  re- 
splendent glory  in  the  crown  of  Jesus,  to  whom  be  all  the 
praise ! 

Some  time  before  these  pleasing  circumstances  took  place, 
the  four  teachers  had  separated,  in  order  to  occupy  another 
district  of  the  country,  where  the  people  had  become  desirous 
for  Christian  instruction.  At  this  new  station,  the  people 
resolved  to  follow  the  example  of  their  neighbours  in  build- 
ing a chapel. 

Lime  was  burnt,  posts  and  rafters  were  prepared,  planks 
were  sawn  and  planed ; and  in  three  months  from  its  com- 
mencement the  building  was  finished, — seventy-two  feet 
long,  thirty-four  feet  wide,  walls  sixteen  feet  high  : all 
done,  under  the  guidance  of  the  teachers,  by  people  who,  a 
little  time  before,  did  not  know  the  Dame  of  chisel,  saw,  or 
plane,  much  less  their  use.  The  opening  services  of  this 
house  of  prayer  were  similar  to  those  of  the  first  station, 
and  equally  interesting,  and  five  adults  also  were  then 
baptized. 


44 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


At  these  stations  daily  schools  are  now  established,  and 
are  numerously  attended,  and  a goodly  number  of  boys  and 
girls  can  read  well. 

In  1848,  we  printed  at  the  Mission  Press,  Rarotonga,  a 
number  of  school  books,  and  Scripture-extract  books,  com- 
piled in  the  language  of  Mare,  by  one  of  the  teachers. 
These  had  been  invaluable  during  the  past  years  of  pioneer- 
ing work,  and  in  writing  to  us,  the  teachers  urgently 
request  another  and  a more  varied  supply.  They  say  iu  one 
of  their  last  letters, — “ Our  want  of  books  is  very  great. 
The  people  much  desire  to  learn.  Alas  ! how  long  a time 
we  have  to  wait  before  we  shall  get  any.  Oh  that  we  had  a 
press  near,  to  print  off  speedily  the  books  we  need,  in  the 
language  of  this  people  l” 

One  moonlight  night,  June  1852,  after  an  absence  of 
nearly  two  years,  “ The  Children  of  England’s  Missionary 
Ship"  again  visited  Mark.  It  cast  anchor  in  a fine  bay,  on 
the  south  east  side  of  the  island,  near  the  station  where 
the  second  chapel  was  built.  A great  and  glorious  change 
had  taken  place  on  the  island  since  the  last  visit  of  the  ship 
— a change  for  which  the  missionaries  had  often  prayed, 
but  which  they  were  not  now  prepared  to  witness.' 

About  seven  o’clock  in  the  morning,  as  the  missionaries 
looked  on  shore  from  the  vessel,  they  saw  crowds  of  natives 
travelling  along  the  beach  towards  the  chapel ; it  was  Sab- 
bath day,  and  they  were  going  to  the  early  morning  prayer 
meeting.  The  building,  the  people,  and  everything  seen 
from  on  board  the  vessel,  were  involved  in  mystery,  until  the 
excellent,  long-tried,  faithful  teachers  came  off,  and  related, 
as  well  as  their  excited  feelings  would  allow,  the  experiences 
through  which  they  had  passed  since  the  departure  of  the 
missionary  ship. 

The  Rev.  Messrs.  Murray  and  Sunderland,  of  the  Samoa 
Mission,  accompanied  by  Captain  Morgan,  went  on  shore  to 


ISLAND  OP  MARE. 


45 


attend  the  forenoon  service.  The  missionaries  preached, 
through  the  aid  of  the  native  teachers,  who  acted  as  inter- 
preters. 

Owing  to  the  former  desperate  character  of  these  people, 
but  few  captains  of  merchant  ships  had  yet  visited  their 
shores.  Hence  but  few  of  this  deeply  interesting  congrega- 
tion were  clothed;  some  of  them  had  a single  garment  over 
their  shoulders,  others  had  on  native  cloth  which  had  been 
sent  to  them  by  the  churches  in  Samoa  and  Rarotonga,  but 
the  large  majority  had  nothing  but  plaited  leaves  or  bark  of 
plants  to  cover  themselves.  After  the  service,  the  brethren 
visited  the  schools ; two  hundred  children  were  present, 
being  taught  in  classes  by  the  more  advanced  young  men 
and  women. 

Remaining  two  or  three  days  at  this  station,  the  mission- 
aries then  went  to  the  settlement  where  the  first  chapel  was 
built ; here  the  change  seen  in  the  character  and  habits  of 
the  people  was  still  greater  than  that  seen  at  the  place 
above  mentioned.  The  brethren,  iu  their  report,  exclaim, 
“ What  hath  God  wrought ! How  changed  is  the  condition 
of  this  people  ! A few  years  ago  they  were  a wild  cannibal 
race,  living  in  continual  war  amongst  themselves,  and  aim- 
ing to  murder  every  white  man  who  approached  their  shore. 
Now  they  are  repentant,  docile,  humble,  and  anxious  to  be 
instructed.  Here  is  a good  chapel  120  feet  long,  neatly 
seated  with  good  benches,  in  which  we  met  more  than  a 
thousand  natives  for  the  worship  of  God.  The  service  was 
conducted  with  the  greatest  order  and  attention.  Sabbath- 
day  services  are  constantly  and  well  attended — daily  schools 
are  full  of  children — thirty-one  individuals  have  been  bap- 
tized— and  many  others  are  consistent  candidates.  Instead 
of  the  thorn  there  is  come  up  the  fir  tree,  and  instead  of 
the  briar  there  is  come  up  the  myrtle  tree,  and  we  have  in 
them  a name,  and  a sign  unto  the  Lord,  which  shall  never 
be  cut  off.” 


46 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Continuing  the  “report”  of  this  island,  in  1854,  when  it 
was  again  visited  by  the  mission  ship,  the  missionaries,  in 
forming  the  most  dispassionate  judgment  on  the  present 
state  of  things,  say,  “ that  education,  civilization,  and  Chris- 
tianity are  steadily  progressing,  and  that  the  altered  condi- 
tion of  the  people  is  such  as  has  never  been  before  witnessed 
in  so  short  a time,  under  similar  circumstances,  either  in 
Eastern  or  Western  Polynesia.” 

The  people  had  built  a large  commodious  dwelling-house, 
hoping  soon  to  welcome  a missionary  from  England,  who 
should  take  up  his  permanent  residence  amongst  them. 
This  house  was  fifty-four  feet  long,  thirty  feet  wide  ; walls 
fourteen  feet  high ; has  a spacious  veranda,  Venetian  blinds, 
and  six  convenient  rooms  ; the  entire  workmanship  of  the 
natives  themselves,  and  built  expressly  by  them  for  an  Eng- 
lish missionary  residence. 

This  interesting  and  significant  fact  powerfully  appeals  to 
Christians  in  this  country  to  give  ear  to  their  call. 

A complete  revolution  has  taken  place  in  the  entire  frame- 
work of  society.  Hundreds  of  the  people  can  read  the  word 
of  God ; hundreds  more  are  learning,  a great  number  of 
whom  are  anxiously  seeking  the  salvation  of  their  souls. 
According  to  the  word  of  Jehovah  so  it  is  come  to  pass, — 
“ Behold,  I make  all  things  new,”  and  “ the  islands  shall 
wait  for  my  law.” 

“ All  things  are  ready.”  Instead  of  our  having  to  go  to 
them  to  compel  them  to  come  in,  they  now  entreat  us  to  go 
to  them  and  instruct  them  more  fully  in  the  way  of  salvation. 

Let  it,  however,  be  remembered,  that  the  instrumentality 
employed  in  effecting  this  great  change  has  been  native  in- 
strumentality, men  whose  fathers,  in  the  Samoa  and  Raro- 
tonga groups,  but  a few  years  ago  were  heathen  idolaters. 

The  agents  have  been  men,  the  power  has  been  from  God  ; 
to  him  be  all  the  praise. 


ISLAND  OF  MARE. 


47 


May  this  narrative  of  missionary  enterprise  on  the  Island 
of  Marii  stimulate  the  churches  iu  this  country  to  sustain 
and  increase  the  funds  of  our  various  Missionary  Societies 
that  they  may  continue  to  send  out  many  labourers  to  this 
aud  other  parts  of  the  mission  field,  where  untold  multitudes 
are  with  anxious  desire  crying, — “ Come  over  and  help  us.” 

After  the  foregoing  was  written,  the  Missionary  ship 
John  Williams  reached  England  from  the  islands,  and. 
brought  encouraging  information  respecting  the  island  of 
Mare  down  to  the  time  of  her  leaving. 

Through  the  liberality  of  Christian  friends  in  Sydney,  the 
Directors  of  the  London  Missionary  Society  were  enabled 
to  send  out  two  missionaries,  in  the  autumn  of  1853,  to 
be  located  either  on  islands  of  the  New  Hebrides,  or  the 
Loyalty  group,  as  Providence  might  indicate.  These  bre- 
thren, Rev.  Messrs.  Creagh  aud  Jones,  with  their  devoted 
wives,  reached  Samoa  last  summer,  and  in  September  were 
taken  on  in  the  mission  ship,  by  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Hardie 
and  Sunderland  to  the  island  of  Mare. 

On  their  lauding,  they  were  welcomed  by  a great  con- 
course of  natives,  who,  with  few  exceptions,  were  all  clothed, 
either  in  native  or  foreign  garments.  After  expressing  their 
joy  that  English  missionaries  had  come  to  reside  with  them, 
they  offered  three  of  their  most  convenient  neatly -plastered 
houses  for  the  use  of  the  missionaries.  The  brethren  took 
up  their  residence  on  this  most  interesting  island,  which 
had  been  so  successfully  opened  up,  by  the  blessing  of  God 
on  the  labours  of  our  native  teachers. 

At  one  station,  since  the  last  visit  of  the  mission  ship, 
twelve  good  lime-plastered  houses  had  been  built;  a strong 
stone  chapel  had  been  erected,  eighty  feet  long  by  sixty  feet 
wide,  which  is  filled  to  overflowing  every  Lord’s-day.  The 
whole  population,  except  the  very  aged  aud  the  very  young, 


48 


GEMS  FROM  TITE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


can  read;  and  about  one  hundred  persons  are  candidates  for 
Christian  communion. 

At  another  settlement,  the  same  progress  obtained. — 
Heathenism  and  polygamy  are  abandoned, — many  good 
houses  and  a new  chapel  have  been  erected,  as  a fruit  and 
evidence  of  the  people’s  advance  in  civilization.  More  than 
two  hundred  persons  had  learned  to  read  well,  and  more 
than  fourscore  of  that  number  were  giving  evidence  of  a 
true  conversion  to  God,  and  were  waiting  to  be  united 
together  in  communion  with  the  Church  of  Christ. 

Seldom  or  ever  has  it  been  the  lot  of  missionaries  to 
commence  their  labours  under  circumstances  so  favourable, 
amongst  a people  so  prepared  to  receive,  and  to  be  blessed, 
by  their  instruction. 

More  than  one-half  of  the  entire  population  of  Marfe  have 
abandoned  heathenism,  and  are  thirsting  after  knowledge. 
Those  who  have  not  yet  publicly  renounced  their  old  prac- 
tices, give  a kind  welcome,  and  an  attentive  hearing,  to  the 
Christian  teacher;  and  there  is  every  reason  to  hope  that, 
ere  long,  the  whole  land  will  be  subdued  by  the  power,  and 
radiant  with  the  glory  of  the  gospel  of  Jesus,  to  whom  be 
all  the  glory ; and  let  the  whole  church  say, — Amen. 


“NATION  SHALL  NOT  LIFT  UP  SWOltD  AGAINST  NATION,  NEITHER.  SHALL 
THEY  LEARN  WAR  ANY  MORE.” 


ISLAND  OF  WARE. 


49 


HYMN  2 8 3. 

Translated,  into  the  Native  language. 

“WHEN  I SURVEY  THE  WONDROUS  CROSS,”  &c. 

Kia  nana  au  i te  Satauro, 

I mate  ei  a Jesu  Christ ; 

Taku  i kite  teianei  ao, 

E mea  viivii  anake  rai. 

Kia  maara  au  ’te  matenga, 

O Jesu  te  Ariki  mou  ; 

Taku  i rekareka,  na, 

Kua  akakoreia  e au. 

Te  rima  e te  upoko  nei, 

Te  vaevae  e te  kaokao  rai, 

Na  reira  mai  i tae  mai  ei 
Te  ora  e te  aroa  rai. 

Eaa  te  tau  kia  apai  au, 

Ki  toku  Pu,  kia  Jesu  rai ; 

Eaa,  ko  toku  nei  ngakau, 

Ei  apinga  nona  uaorai. 


5 


50 


GF.MS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


NATIVES  OF  FATE. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

Flight  of  a party  of  Samoan  warriors  from  Samoa,  in  heathenism, — Their 
landing  on  Fate, — Character  and  influence  of  Sualo,  their  leader — 
His  first  hearing  of  missionaries  being  on  Samoa — His  desire  that 
they  should  come  to  Fath — The  first  visit  of  the  John  Williams — 
Description  of  the  people — A Sydney  trading  vessel  cut  off  by  the 
people— Favourable  reception  given  to  Christian  teachers  in  1845. 

The  first  missionary  visit  to  the  island  of  Fat'e  is  con- 
nected with  an  incident  of  native  immigration,  which  can- 
not fail  to  interest  and  instruct,  and,  it  may  be,  give  some 
idea  respecting  the  peopling  of  many  of  the  isolated  and  far 
separated  lands  of  the  Pacific. 

During  one  of  those  sanguinary  wars  which  were  fre- 
quently occurring  between  the  tribes  of  the  Samoan  islands 
in  Central  Polynesia,  before  the  introduction  of  Chris- 
tianity, a vanquished  party  of  heathen  warriors,  numbering 
upwards  of  fivescore,  left  their  Samoan  island  home  in  double 
canoes,  intending  to  steer  their  course  to  Tongatabu,  an 
island  of  the  Friendly  group,  some  400  miles  south-west  of 
Samoa. 


(51) 


52 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Under  ordinary  circumstances  of  fine  weather  and  fair 
winds,  they  would,  in  all  probability,  have  reached  Tonga- 
tabu  in  safety,  but  they  were  overtaken  with  foul  weather, 
got  into  contrary  winds  and  currents ; lost  their  course  ; 
many  of  the  party  died  at  sea  j and,  after  some  weeks’  dis- 
tress and  danger,  a mere  remnant  of  them  reached  Fate, 
one  of  the  largest  lands  of  the  New  Hebrides  group,  and 
about  1,300  miles  in  a contrary  direction  to  that  they  had 
desired  to  take. 

Fato  was  at  this  time  thickly  populated  by  a savage 
heathen  people,  whose  different  tribes  were  continually  at 
war.  Sualo,  a leading  spirit  of  the  immigrant  party,  and 
who  had  been  a great  fighting  man  in  Samoa,  joined  himself 
to  one  of  the  Fatfe  tribes ; was  very  successful  in  his  aggres- 
sions on  the  mountain  tribes ; soon  became  a man  of 
renown,  and  gained  much  influence  over  the  chief  and  peo- 
ple of  the  district  where  he  resided. 

In  the  year  1845,  the  missionary  ship  John  Williams 
made  her  first  voyage  round  the  westward  islands,  having 
on  board  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Murray  and  Turner,  as  visiting 
deputation.  While  lying  off  Eromanga,  endeavouring  to 
land  teachers  on  that  dark,  yet  interesting  island,  a merchant 
vessel  hove  in  sight,  and,  on  nearing  the  missionary  ship, 
the  captain  came  on  board.  He  said,  that  he  had  just  come 
from  the  island  of  Fath,  a day’s  sail  to  the  north-west  of 
Eromanga,  and  that  there  he  had  found,  to  his  great  sur- 
prise, a Samoan  family.  To  this  family  the  captain  ex- 
plained, through  a New  Zealand  interpreter,  how  that  the 
worship  of  idol-gods  in  Samoa  had  been  entirely  abolished, 
that  a new  religion — the  worship  of  Jehovah — had  been 
adopted,  and  that  a new  state  of  things,  nationally  and  so- 
cially, had  come  over  the  whole  of  the  people  there. 

Sualo  became  deeply  interested  in  these  wonderful 
facts,  and  inquired  by  what  agency  this  change  had  been 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


53 


effected.  He  was  told,  that  the  au,  tuvini  o Jehova 
(the  servants  of  Jehovah)  had  come  from  Beritani,  (Eng- 
land,) and  had  taught  them  his  word,  and  that  this 
word  had  been  the  means  of  the  wonderful  change  brought 
about  in  Samoa. 

Here  we  see  God  in  providence.  Sualo,  while  listen- 
ing to  the  above  statements,  became  impatient  with  desire, 
and  gained  from  the  captain  a promise,  that  he  would  visit 
the  servants  of  Jehovah,  in  Samoa,  as  soon  as  possible, 
and  urge  them  to  come  without  delay  to  Fate,  to  explain 
more  fully  to  him  the  things  about  the  new  religion,  and 
that  he,  now  knowing  the  language  of  Fat6,  would  assist 
them  in  doing  for  its  people  what  had  been  done  for  the 
Samoans. 

Thus  commissioned,  the  captain  of  the  merchant  vessel 
was  glad  to  meet  the  mission  ship  off  Eromanga,  and  the 
missionaries  were  no  less  rejoiced  to  receive  the  information, 
and  to  obey  the  request  he  had  communicated.  Having 
on  board  several  Samoan  Christian  teachers,  who  were  will- 
ing to  risk  their  lives  in  introducing  the  gospel  to  heathen 
lands,  the  voyage  to  Fatb  was  undertaken,  with  a confidence 
that  God  was  leading  the  way. 

Early  in  the  morning  of  the  1st  of  May,  18#5,  the  John 
Williams  came  to  an  anchor  off  the  island  of  Fate  in  a 
bay  of  immense  extent.  Everything  on  shore,  as  viewed 
from  on  board  ship,  looked  lovely  and  fertile  in  the  extreme, 
as  compared  with  the  barren  beach  of  Eromanga.  A belt  of 
luxuriant  vegetation  extended  some  half  a mile  or  more, 
inland  towards  the  first  range  of  hills,  which  were  covered 
with  rich  pasture,  and  were  more  or  less  under  cultivation. 

Little  groups  of  wild,  naked  natives  were  seen  on  the 
beach  and  under  the  shade  of  trees,  but  there  was  an  evident 
disinclination  on  their  part  to  come  off  to  the  vessel,  until 
repeated  signs  had  been  given  that  the  visit  was  of  a peaceful 
5 * 


54 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


nature.  Thus  encouraged,  they  began  to  come,  in  small  par- 
ties, in  their  cauoes,  until  a sufficient  number  of  them,  to  be 
safe  or  pleasant,  were  on  board ; and  now  for  the  first  time 
the  people  of  Fate  were  brought  in  contact  with  Christian 
teachers,  the  history  of  whose  subsequent  labours,  we  are 
about  to  narrate  in  the  following  pages. 

In  order,  however,  to  give  the  reader  a view  of  the  Fatb 
people  as  they  were  first  found,  I cannot  do  better  than  give 

an  extract,  from  the  descriptive  pen  of  Captain  E , of 

H.M.S.  Havana,  who  afew  yearsago  visited  this  land. 

“ The  people,  although  differing  much  among  themselves, 
have  but  few  points  of  resemblance  to  the  inhabitants  of 
islands  in  the  same  group.  They  are  of  large  stature  and 
regular  features,  some  having  straight  or  almost  aquiline 
noses,  good  foreheads,  and  beards  of  moderate  size.  Their 
dress  consisted  of  a broad  matting- work,  seven  or  eight 
inches  wide,  wrought  in  diamond  patterns  of  red,  white,  and 
black  colours.  Many  of  them  were  tattooed  with  various 
designs,  the  cartilage  of  the  nose  was,  in  many  instances, 
pierced,  and  the  orifice  filled  with  a circular  piece  of  stone, 
and  the  lobe  of  each  ear  was  also  pierced,  and  hung  with 
ornaments  of  sea  or  tortoise-shell. 

“ Ingeniously-wrought  bracelets,  or  small  rings  of  ground 
cocoa-nut  and  shells,  resembling  chain  armour,  were  worn 
round  their  arms  and  ankles ; garters,  of  green  leaves,  were 
tied  round  the  leg,  under  the  knee ; and  their  long  crisp 
hair  was  gathered  into  a large  top-knot,  coloured  yellow  by 
lime,  having  a plume  of  cock’s  feathers  attached  to  a 
scratching-pin,  inserted  in  it,  at  one  side  of  the  head." 

These  were  the  kind  of  men,  in  whose  characters  and  cir- 
cumstances there  was  much  to  interest  and  to  pity,  with 
whom  our  teachers  were  brought  in  contact  on  the 
island  of  Fatb,  each  one  having  his  weapons  of  war,  the 
principal  of  which  were  spears  of  most  beautiful  design, 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


55 


having  carved  barbs  resembling  the  finest  Gothic  work,  kept 
in  poisoned  shields  of  banana  bark.  These  weapous  were 
very  numerous,  and  on  them  they  set  a high  value. 

The  shyness  manifested  by  the  natives  in  coming  to  the 
mission  ship,  and  the  evident  anxiety  felt  by  them  while  on 
board  during  the  first  day,  was  accounted  for  by  the  fact, 
that  only  a short  time  before  this  visit,  they  had  destroyed  a 
Sydney  trading  ship,  and  murdered  the  captain  and  most 
of  the  crew. 

As  the  whole  blame  of  this  affair  has  been  attributed  to 
the  natives,  we  will  give  the  particulars  of  its  occurrence, 
and  its  issue,  as  they  have  come  to  our  knowledge. 

The  vessel  in  question  came  to  an  anchor  in  the  spacious 
and  beautiful  harbour  at  the  south-east  of  the  island. 
Crowds  of  natives  came  off  to  her,  evidently  in  a friendly 
manner,  from  the  fact  of  having  a number  of  females  in  their 
canoes.  This  fact,  however,  seems  to  have  been  the  cause 
of  the  disturbance  which  ended  so  fatally. 

Amongst  the  crew  there  were  eight  or  ten  natives  of  New 
Zealand.  To  these,  the  Fate  females  showed  more  favour 
than  to  the  white  men.  A quarrel  ensued,  in  which  the 
captain  interfered,  and  the  enraged  natives  of  the  crew  ab- 
sconded to  the  shore. 

Expecting  that  the  captain  would  seek  after  and  punish 
them,  they  advised  the  people  of  Fat£  to  murder  him  and 
the  white  crew,  to  secure  to  themselves  as  much  of  the  pro- 
perty on  board  as  possible,  and  then  to  sink  the  vessel. 

To  this  proposition  the  heathen  natives  of  Fate  demurred, 
saying  that  the  white  man  was  wiser  and  stronger  than  they, 
and  that  they  feared  the  consequences. 

The  day  after  the  above  consultation,  the  captain  went  on 
shore  in  search  of  the  New  Zealanders,  who  being  deter- 
mined on  revenge,  made  the  first  attack  on  his  life,  and  being 
assisted  by  some  of  the  Fate  warriors,  they  succeeded  in 


56 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


murdering  both  him,  and  the  whole  of  the  boat’s  crew,  who 
went  with  him  on  shore. 

Infuriated  with  the  flush  of  their  diabolical  success,  the 
designing  New  Zealanders  got  their  hands  bound  together, 
as  though  done  by  the  captain,  and  were  rowed  in  the  boat 
to  the  ship  by  some  of  the  Fate  natives.  Getting  on  board, 
where  only  the  mate  of  the  vessel,  and  two  or  three  men 
were  remaining,  they  told  a humiliating  tale  about  tbeir  cap- 
ture by  the  captain,  who,  they  said,  had  thus  sent  them  off, 
and  who  himself  would  come  to  the  ship  so  soon  as  the  boat 
returned. 

The  novel  appearance  of  these  men,  with  their  hands 
bound  together,  with  the  apparent  truthfulness  of  their 
report,  put  the  crew  off  their  guard,  and  at  a given  moment, 
a preconcerted  signal  was  made,  the  whole  of  the  bound 
New  Zealanders  burst  the  bonds,  which  had  been  but  slight- 
ly tied,  and,  assisted  by  the  Fate  savages,  they  succeeded 
in  murdering  the  whole  of  the  remaining  ship’s  company. 
Other  natives  speedily  came  to  the  vessel,  her  stores 
were  ransacked,  a few  guns  and  articles  of  clothing,  with 
other  things,  were  taken  away,  the  vessel  was  set  on  fire, 
and  sunk. 

Eight  of  the  vile  men,  who  were  really  the  cause  of  this 
massacre,  died  of  virulent  disease  on  the  island,  and  the 
others  left  in  sandal-wood  ships,  giving  out  a report  that  the 
natives  of  the  island  had  been  the  sole  perpetrators  of  the 
deed. 

The  missionary  ship,  on  her  first  visit  to  this  island,  re- 
ferred to  in  the  preceding  pages,  cast  anchor  on  the  very 
spot  where  the  remains  of  the  unfortunate  Sydney  vessel  lay, 
and  hence  the  apprehensive  shyness  of  the  natives.  Not 
one  came  off  to  her  the  first  day;  early  on  the  morning  of 
the  second  day,  some  few  men  came  in  their  canoes ; they  were 
induced  to  come  on  board ; kindness  gained  their  confidence, 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


57 


and  before  evening,  hundreds  of  these  wild  people  were 
seen  going  to  and  fro  in  the  greatest  state  of  heathen  ex- 
citement and  confusion. 

As  soon  as  possible  the  missionaries  made  inquiries  after 
Sualo,  the  Samoan  heathen  warrior,  who  had  sent  the  mes- 
sage which  led  them,  at  this  time,  to  visit  the  island. 

After  considerable  difficulty  and  delay,  Sualo  came  on 
board  accompanied  by  a large  retinue  of  savage  attendants. 
Since  his  landing  on  Fatb,  he  had  married  the  daughter  of 
the  principal  chief  of  the  district, — he  had  distinguished 
himself  by  deeds  of  heathen  valour;  his  name  spread  terror 
far  and  wide  over  the  land,  and  fortunate  did  the  tribes 
consider  themselves  who  had  him  for  an  ally.  Physically, 
he  had  the  appearance  of  a fearless  daring  fellow,  and  now, 
as  he  appeared  on  board  the  ship,  in  Fate  dress,  with  his 
murderous  spear  in  his  hand,  it  was  evident  that  he  was, 
even  in  the  midst  of  the  heathen  Fate  people,  pre-eminently 
a man  of  violence  and  blood. 

How  strange  that  from  such  a man  should  have  emanated 
a desire  for  Christian  teachers  ! But  such  was  the  case,  and 
both  he  and  his  party  hailed,  with  no  ordinary  delight,  their 
countrymen  from  Samoa,  whom  they  now  saw  subdued, 
intelligent,  instructed  Christians. 

Much  of  the  first  day’s  intercourse  with  the  people  was 
taken  up  in  explaining  to  Sualo,  and  through  him  to  the 
natives  of  Fate,  the  difference  between  the  missionary  ship 
and  merchant  ships,  and  simply  expounding  to  them  the 
leading  doctrines  of  the  gospel. 

To  these  statements  the  people  listened  with  great 
interest.  Four  Samoan  native  teachers  willingly  gave  them- 
selves to  the  pioneering  work.  Two  were  located  at  a dis- 
trict called  Pango,  and  two  at  the  settlement  where  Sualo 
and  his  tribe  resided. 

In  their  report  of  this  first  visit  to  Fate,  the  thankful  and 


58 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


delighted  missionaries  say,  “ Oh  that  we  had  had  forty 
teachers  instead  of  four  to  have  left  with  the  people  of  Fate  ! 
We  could  have  located  them  all  with  encouraging  prospect 
of  success.” 

Such  was  the  auspicious  commencement  of  Christian  in- 
struction on  this  island,  one  of  the  largest  and  most  lovely 
of  Western  Polynesia. 

A great  advantage  would  have  been  gained  could  it 
have  been  visited  again  three  or  six  months  after  this  intro- 
duction of  teachers;  but  its  far  west  position,  and  the  many 
groups  of  islands  at  which  the  mission  ship  had  to  call, 
rendered  this  impracticable,  and  eighteen  months  of  toil  and 
danger  elapsed,  before  the  missionary  could  again  visit  the 
devoted  teachers  left  on  the  island  of  Fate. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

Second  visit  of  mission  ship — -Joyful  meeting  with  the  teachers — Confer- 
ence held  with  the  teachers,  who  give  in  their  report — Notices  of  re- 
ligious faith  and  practices  of  the  heathen  people — Population,  nu- 
merous and  much  scattered — A visit  to  the  interior — Report  of 
teachers’  first  successes— A meeting  with  the  heathen  natives  of 
Fatb  on  board  the  mission  ship — Their  desire  for  more  teachers — 
Application  from  Ngos,  a heathen  chief — A Christian  volunteer — 
The  vessel’s  departure. 

It  was  in  October,  1846,  that  the  second  missionary  visit 
was  made  to  Fath.  The  day  before  reaching  the  island,  we 
had  passed  the  forbidding  land  of  Eromanga,  where  thick 
clouds  were  resting  on  its  barren  mountains,  and  thicker 
clouds  of  heathen  delusion  and  degradation  enveloped  its 
savage  population ; but  as  we  drew  near  Fatk,  however,  we 
felt  that  we  had  in  view  a land  of  hope — and  all  nature 
around  seemed  designed  to  animate  and  encourage  us.  It 
was  one  of  those  lovely  South  Sea  mornings,  of  which  peo- 
ple who  only  live  in  northern  climes  can  have  no  conception 
— the  sea  was  smooth,  the  sky  was  clear,  and  a fine  fair 
moderate  trade-wind  bore  us  nearer  and  nearer  to  its  extend- 
ing and  richly  fertile  shores. 

Thus  circumstanced,  we  were  indeed  happy  in  the  hope 
of  soon  becoming  the  instruments  of  cheering  the  hearts, 

(59) 


60 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


and  relieving  the  wants  of  our  devoted  native  brethren,  who 
had  been  left  so  long  a time  without  visitation.  Our  joy, 
however,  received  a check  from  the  length  of  time  which 
elapsed  before  we  saw  any  movement  made  by  the  natives 
to  come  off  to  the  ship.  Crowds  of  natives  were  seen  on  shore, 
as  we  lay  off  and  on  many  hours  j and  at  noon,  the  ship  hav- 
ing drifted  some  distance  seaward,  we  resolved  to  tack  in 
but  once  more,  and  if  no  canoe  came  to  us,  to  sail  round  to 
the  other  side  of  the  land. 

On  nearing  the  shore  this  time,  we  were  cheered  by  seeing 
the  two  teachers  coming  off.  They  were  soon  alongside  the 
ship,  and  were  taken  on  board. 

The  unbounded  joy  of  these  faithful  men,  at  again  seeing 
the  ship,  after  eighteen  months’  residence  amongst  such 
savage  cannibals  as  the  people  of  Fate,  and  in  much  suspense 
as  to  the  vessel’s  return,  can  better  be  imagined  than  written. 
In  the  embrace  of  their  native  Christian  brethren,  they  fell 
prostrate  on  the  deck — sobs  and  cries,  for  some  time,  gave 
relief  to  the  joy  of  their  overflowing  hearts,  and  as  soon  as 
they  could  speak,  words  of  praise  were  the  first  sounds  we 
heard.  Faafetai  i le  Atua  ! Faafetai  i le  Atua  i tona  al- 
ofa  tele  ! Praise  be  to  God — Praise  be  to  God  for  his  great 
love  ! 

Many  of  the  incredulous  heathen  on  shore,  especially  the 
warriors  and  priests,  had  been  long  since  taunting  the  teach- 
ers, and  the  little  party  attached  to  them,  saying,  that  their 
religion  ship  would  not  return,  and  that  they  had  been  de- 
ceived by  the  foreigners,  who  only  wished  to  gain  a footing 
on  the  land.  It  was,  however,  gratifying  to  find,  that,  al- 
though it  was  not  deemed  safe  for  us  to  go  on  shore,  yet 
there  was  no  danger  apprehended  by  our  coming  to  an  anchor 
in  the  harbour. 

This  we  did  towards  the  evening  of  the  day,  and  the  ship 
was  soon  surrounded  by  more  than  a hundred  canoes,  each 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


61 


carrying  from  four  to  ten  natives,  of  whom  many,  with  ne- 
cessary caution,  were  admitted  on  board.  As  might  be  im- 
agined there  was  much  wildness,  disorder,  and  confusion  in 
the  conduct  of  these  visitors,  but  we  were  desirous  to  recip- 
rocate the  friendly  disposition  they  seemed  willing  to  manifest,  " 
and  this  being  done,  at  sunset  we  gave  them  to  understand 
that  we  would  like  them  all  to  leave  the  ship  until  morning. 
This  intimation  was  given  through  one  or  two  of  the  leading 
men,  aud  in  an  instant,  scores  of  these  wild  unseemly-look- 
ing savages  were  seen  scrambling  down  over  the  sides  of  the 
ship,  in  what  to  us  was  confusion  confounded,  by  their  hid- 
eous yells  and  shouts — each,  however,  understood  what  he 
was  about,  and  getting  into  his  own  canoe,  paddled  off  to  the 
shore. 

Left  alone  with  the  teachers  on  board,  we  spent  most  of 
the  night  in  listening  to  a report  of  the  various  incidents 
that  had  occurred  to  them  during  the  protracted  absence  of 
the  ship,  and  in  gaining  from  them  an  account  of  the  habits 
and  customs  of  the  people. 

It  was  found  that  these  ignorant  and  degraded  people 
needed  not  a divine  revelation  to  teach  them  the  existence  of 
a God.  In  common  with  all  the  Polynesian  tribes,  yet  visi- 
ted, they  believe  in  the  existence  and  dominion  of  a God, 
which  they  called  Maui-tikitiki.  They  were  found  to  have  no 
carved  idols  or  images,  but  had  many  objects  and  places  con- 
nected with  events,  and  persons,  which  they  held  sacred. 
They  also  rendered  worship  to  their  departed  chiefs  and  re- 
nowned warriors.  They  believed  in  a state  of  future  exis- 
tence, and  this  had  a practical  influence  in  leading  them  to 
make  preparation  to  enter  it  happily,  by  attending  to  certain 
rites  and  ceremonies.  When  asked,  where  the  happy  place 
is,  whither  they  desire  to  go  at  death,  they  invariably  point 
towards  the  west,  and  call  it  Lakinatoto. 

The  population  is  scattered  over  the  country,  and  is 

6 


G2 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


divided  into  tribes,  numbering  from  one  to  three  hundred 
each — the  largest  tribes  inhabiting  the  bays  and  mountain 
districts,  and  some  forming  extensive  mountain  villages. 
Each  tribe  is  governed  by  its  own  chief,  and  hence  constant 
jealousies  occur,  which  frequently  lead  to  war,  in  the  horrors 
of  which  the  male  population  delight  to  revel.  Canuibalism, 
polygamy,  infanticide,  and  immolation,  were  found  to  prevail 
beyond  all  restraint,  in  their  most  barbarous  and  revolting 
forms,  among  the  people  of  Fate. 

Subsequent  to  our  visit,  the  worthy  captain  of  the  ship 
Havana  found  the  people  still  averse  to  strangers  penetra- 
ting into  their  country.  One  day,  however,  as  a great  fa- 
vour, gained  through  the  kindness  of  the  Bishop  of  New 
Zealand,  who  was  on  a visit  to  the  island  at  the  same  time, 
a party  from  on  board  that  vessel  were  permitted  to  visit 
the  spot,  where  the  teachers  had  erected  a house ; they 
were  not,  however,  allowed  to  go  along  the  shore,  but  were 
conducted  some  distance  round  by  an  inland  route.  The 
native  houses  were  found  to  be  of  tolerable  dimensions,  of 
oblong  form,  with  curved  roof,  closed  at  the  sides,  but  open 
at  the  end.  The  first  of  these  seen  was  taken  for  a temple, 
and  from  all  the  rafters  were  suspended  quantities  of  bones, 
supposed  to  be  offerings  to  the  gods.  On  reaching  the 
village,  they  were  ushered  into  a large  building,  one  hundred 
feet  long  by  twenty-five  feet  wide,  having  the  whole  of  one 
side  open,  and  the  interior  of  the  roof  entirely  concealed  by 
bundles  of  bones  which  were  hung  from  the  rafters;  vertebrae 
of  piirs,  joints  of  their  tails,  merrythoughts  of  fowls,  and 
every  conceivable  bone  of  birds  and  fish,  mingled  with 
lobster  shells  and. sharks’  fins,  were  suspended  from  the  roof. 
These,  we  have  found,  were  more  or  less  connected  with 
their  religious  ceremonies,  and  could  they  have  been  exam- 
ined, and  their  history  told,  would  have  revealed,  most  fear- 
fully, the  inveterate  cannibal  habits  of  the  people. 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


63 


On  this  second  visit  of  the  mission  ship,  we  were  gratified, 
by  the  testimony  of  the  teachers,  to  find  that  Sualo,  the 
celebrated  Samoan  heathen  chieftain,  who  had  been  instru- 
mental in  introducing  the  Christian  teachers  to  Fate,  con- 
tinued steady  and  firm  in  his  attachment  to  them ; but  as 
yet  there  was  no  evidence  of  his  having  received  the  gospel 
of  Jesus,  in  power , into  his  heart.  We  found  him  still  a 
heathen,  yet  desirous  to  lend  his  influence  in  aiding  the 
establishment  of  Christian  instruction  throughout  the  island. 
Each  teacher  had  been  permitted  to  build  himself  a house, 
a part  of  which  was  appropriated  as  a place  of  assembly,  to 
give  instruction  to  the  people.  The  first  day  of  the  week 
had  beguu  to  be  observed,  by  many,  as  a day  of  rest — schools, 
adult  and  juvenile,  had  been  established,  and  were  daily 
attended  ; and  more  than  a hundred  persons  at  each  of 
the  stations,  where  the  teachers  resided,  had  nominally  re- 
nounced the  belief  and  the  practices  of  heathenism. 

This  success,  however,  created  a struggle  in  which  the 
powers  of  darkness,  embodied  in  war,  and  other  deeds  of 
heathen  cruelty,  were  aroused  to  more  than  usual  activity 
and  strength.  One  deadly  conflict  had  been  engaged  in  by 
tribes,  amongst  whom  Christian  truth  and  light  had  become 
an  antagonistic  power.  The  conflict  continued  many  weeks, 
and  many  were  the  slain  of  both  parties,  whose  bodies  were 
brought  to  the  stations,  and  ou  which  the  chiefs  and  war- 
riors feasted  with  hellish  delight. 

Determined  on  every  possible  occasion  to  denounce  this 
horrid  practice,  and  anxious  to  bring  it  to  an  end,  the 
teachers  frequently  went  out  and  met  the  warriors,  as  they 
returned  in  triumph  with  their  victims,  and  in  some  in- 
stances dissuaded  them  from  their  cannibal  purposes,  and 
succeeded  in  getting  the  bodies  decently  buried. 

The  cruel  practice  of  burying  alive,  old  and  infirm  people, 
and  new-born  infants,  especially  females,  was  found  to  exist 


64 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


to  a fearful  extent,  against  which  the  beuign  influence  of 
Christianity,  through  the  instrumentality  of  the  teachers, 
had  exerted  its  power,  in  some  instances  successfully. 

Having  gained  thus  much  of  report  from  the  teachers,  we 
resolved  to  have  a public  service  with  the  people,  on  board 
ship,  the  following  day.  Early  in  the  morning  messengers 
were  sent  on  shore  to  announce  our  wishes  ; and  in  a very 
short  time  the  entire  deck  of  the  missionary  vessel  was  com- 
pletely crowded,  with  a novel  company  of  tall,  black,  naked, 
wild,  yet  attentive  savage  people.  Taking  our  seats  in  the 
middle  of  the  “ quarter  deck,”  and  having  near  us  the 
teachers  and  principal  chiefs  of  the  districts,  we  expounded 
to  them,  through  our  interpreters,  the  doctrines  of  the 
gospel,  concerning  God  and  Christ ; sin  and  death  ; resur- 
rection, and  heaven  and  hell.  We  were  solemnly  in- 
terested, and  deeply  affected,  with  the  sight  before  us;  and 
the  people  evidently  understood  much  of  our  address,  to 
which  they  listened  with  profound  attention;  rays  of  divine 
light  penetrated,  for  the  first  time,  into  the  inner  soul  of 
many  in  that  assembly,  where  the  densest  darkness  had  before 
held  absolute  dominion  ; convictions  and  emotions  had  been 
created  by  the  word,  through  the  Spirit  of  God,  which 
commenced  a new  history,  a new  life,  in  many  an  immortal 
being,  to  be  developed  either  in  happiness  or  misery  through- 
out eternity. 

On  board  our  mission  ship,  in  the  midst  of  the  vast  sea, 
surrounded  by  such  a congregation,  we  felt  that  we  were 
fishers  of  men,  letting  down  the  gospel-net  into  the  abyss 
of  deepest  moral  ruin  and  degradation,  and  bringing  up  to 
heaven’s  light,  many  thickly-encrusted  pearls  of  inestimable 
worth,  who  were,  when  polished,  to  be  bright  gems  of  eter- 
nal splendour  in  the  crown  of  Jesus,  the  Saviour  of  men. 

At  the  close  of  this  address,  the  people  desired  that  we 
would  not  only  leave  amongst  them  the  former  teachers,  but 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


65 


that  we  would  add  to  their  number.  Consequently,  four  tried 
and  devoted  young  men  were  set  apart  to  reinforce  this  mis- 
sion. They  were  instructed  to  use  every  prudent  means  to 
make  a tour  of  the  whole  land,  and  to  locate  themselves  at 
different  stations,  as  soon  as  opportunity  should  occur 


Amongst  the  company  in  the  assembly  above  alluded  to, 
there  was  an  old  and  influential  chief,  called  Ngos,  who, 
with  his  tribe,  inhabited  a small,  but  pleasant  island,  situated 
6 * 


i 


66 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


in  the  bay  where  our  ship  was  lying  at  anchor;  and,  after 
having  made  arrangements  to  locate  four  teachers  on  the 
main  land,  Ngos  requested,  with  great  importunity,  that  we 
would  allow  one  to  take  up  his  residence  with  him.  We 
were  much  pleased  with  this  request,  but  how  to  comply 
with  it  was  our  difficulty.  Already,  we  had  drawn  too  largely 
from  our  limited  supply  of  teachers,  and,  having  yet  to  visit 
many  other  islands  in  the  group,  we  felt  that  we  could  not, 
from  those  who  remained,  select  one  for  Ngos. 

While,  however,  consulting  with  my  colleague,  the  Rev. 
H.  Nisbet,  as  to  what  we  should  do,  a young  man,  who  had 
been  for  some  time  a tried,  consistent  junior  deacon,  in  one 
of  the  RarotoDga  churches,  and  who,  with  his  excellent  wife, 
had  accompanied  us  this  voyage,  as  a friend  and  assistant, 
came,  and  said,  that  he  had  been  spending  the  previous  night 
in  prayer  to  God,  that  he  would  open  a door  for  himself  and 
wife  to  enter  on  missionary  labour,  amongst  this  people  ; 
and,  that  now  they  were  not  only  willing,  but  anxious  to  be 
allowed  to  go  with  Ngos,  and  to  become  missionary  pioneers 
amongst  the  savage  tribe  over  whom  he  reigned  as  chief. 
This  offer  was  thankfully  accepted  by  us ; and  Tairi,  for  that 
was  the  young  man’s  name,  was  landed  on  the  island  of 
Mele  under  circumstances  of  peculiar  interest. 

A short  narrative  of  Tairi’s  early  life,  together  with  his 
early  and  painful  close  of  missionary  career,  we  will  give  in 
the  following  chapter. 

Having  thus  accomplished  as  much  as  could  be  expected 
on  this  visit  to  the  island  of  Fate,  we  commended  our  bre- 
thren to  the  protection  and  blessing  of  God,  and  set  sail.  5 

Much  had  been  gained,  but  we  were  sad,  as  we  sailed  away 
from  this  large  island,  remembering  that  every  district  was 
thickly  peopled  with  tribes  yet  unknown  to  us,  and  whose 
jealousies  made  it  dangerous  for  our  teachers  to  visit  them. 
We  deeply  felt  the  greatness  of  the  work  to  be  done,  the 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


67 


fewness  and  feebleness  of  our  means  at  command  ; and  we 
were  in  sadness  at  the  thought,  that  two  long  years  would, 
in  all  probability,  pass  away,  before  Fate  could  again  be 
visited  by  the  missionary  ship. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

Tairi’s  parentage  and  early  life — His  education — His  decision  for  Christ 
— His  labours  in  the  Hervey  Group — His  voyage  to  Fat& — Circum- 
stances of  his  landing — Protracted  absence  of  mission  ship — Two 
teachers  die  — Tairi’s  illness  and  death — Circumstances  of  Tairi’s 
wife’s  death — An  infant  rescued  from  the  grave  who  had  been  bur- 
ied alive — A young  man’s  escape  from  the  grave. 

Tairi,  the  Christian  teacher  left  with  Ngos,  as  men- 
tioned in  the  last  chapter,  was  born  in  Rarotonga,  just 
about  the  time  the  gospel  was  introduced  to  that  island. 
His  father  was  a great  mataiopo,  or  independent  land-holder, 
in  one  of  the  largest  districts,  and  was  the  son  of  one  of  the 
most  savage  cannibal  warriors,  who  had  gained  a high  pre- 
eminence in  deeds  of  cruelty  and  bloodshed,  in  times  when 
idolatry  and  war  were  rampant  there. 

Tairi’s  father,  however,  was  one  of  the  first  of  his  tribe 
who  gave  attention  to  Christian  instruction,  and  who,  pub- 
licly, made  profession  of  his  having  received  the  word  of 
Jehovah  as  his  guide  and  portion.  Tairi,  himself,  was 
among  the  group  of  heathen  lads  who  first  attended  the 
schools,  established  at  Arorangi,  Rarotonga,  by  the  native 
teacher  Papehia,  and  there,  in  1832,  he  received  from  the 
hands  of  Mr.  Williams,  the  first  printed  elementary  book 
(68) 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


G9 


which  he  could  call  his  own.  He  gave  great  heed  to  instruc- 
tion, made  steady  progress  in  reading,  writing,  arithmetic, 
and  geography,  and  was  soon  distinguished  in  the  midst  of  lire 
companions  as  a thoughtful,  prayerful,  pious  youth.  At  the 
age  of  eighteen,  he  made  a public  profession  of  his  attach- 
ment to  Jesus,  by  uniting  himself  to  the  Christian  church, 
and  henceforth  gave  his  time,  and  talents,  and  influence, 
with  constancy,  humility,  and  zeal,  to  the  work  of  instruct- 
ing his  fellow-countrymen.  Three  years  after  joining  the 
church  he  was  set  apart  as  an  assistant  teacher,  to  Maretu, 
an  excellent  native  pastor,  who  had  the  entire  charge  of 
Mangaia,  then  an  out-station  to  the  Rarotonga  mission,  and 
for  two  years,  Tairi  filled  this  office  with  ability,  consistency, 
and  success. 

On  the  appointment  of  an  English  missionary  to  Mangaia, 
Tairi  returned  to  Rarotonga;  was  elected  assistant  deacon 
to  the  church  at  Arorangi ; and,  surrendering  his  claim  to  a 
large  inheritance  of  landed  property  in  favour  of  his  younger 
brother,  he  gave  himself  to  daily  theological  and  general 
studies,  with  a view  to  the  office  of  the  ministry. 

Such  was  Tairi’s  character  and  position,  in  1846,  on  the 
island  of  Rarotonga.  He  was  truly  one  of  the  numerous 
gems,  gained  from  Polynesian  tribes,  through  a preached  gos- 
pel, alike  the  fruit  and  the  glory  of  our  missionary  enterprise. 
His  Christian  excellency  shone  with  a steadily-increasing 
strength.  In  the  church,  in  the  settlement,  and  in  the 
schools  he  was  loved ; and  in  the  light  of  his  instruction,  and 
example,  both  the  aged  and  the  young  delighted  to  follow 
in  the  paths,  in  which  he  led  the  way.  We  had  hoped,  his 
life  would  be  spared,  and  that  in  future  years,  he  would  be 
an  efficient  pastor,  over  one  of  the  Polynesian  churches. 

On  the  arrival  of  the  mission  ship,  in  which  we  were  to 
visit  the  heathen  tribes  of  the  New  Hebrides,  and  Loyalty 
groups,  Tairi,  and  his  excellent  wife,  expressed  their  great 


70 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


desire  to  accompany  us,  but  did  not  disclose  their  intention, 
in  reference  to  missionary  work,  until  we  were  off  Fate, 
when  Ngos,  the  chief  of  Mele,  requested  that  we  would 
leave  a teacher  for  his  tribe.  It  was  then  that  Tain  came, 
and  told  us  that  he,  and  his  wife,  had  been  praying  to 
God,  to  open  to  them  some  field  of  labour  in  a heathen 
land,  and  that  they  had  both  made  arrangements  not  to 
return  to  Rarotonga;  in  proof  of  which  he  showed  us  a 
basket  full  of  mallets,  and  other  tools,  for  making  native 
bark  cloth,  which  he  said,  his  wife  had  brought  with  her, 
in  order  to  teach  the  native  heatheus  how  to  make  cloth, 
and  thus  to  aid  him  in  his  labours  to  elevate  and  civilize  the 
people. 

Finding  that  we  hesitated  to  accede  to  his  desire,  on  his 
parent’s  account,  he  said,  “ My  father  understands  and 
approves  of  our  intentions.  On  bidding  him  farewell,  I 
said,  ‘ Father,  do  not  again  think  of  me  in  reference  to  our 
land,  give  me  up  to  do  the  work  of  Jesus  amongst  the 
heathen.’  My  father  said,  ‘Well,  my  son,  if  it  so  be  the 
will  of  God,  I do  give  you  up.  I,  and  your  fathers  before 
me,  have  done  much  service  for  Satan,  during  his  reign  over 
our  country— Go,  my  son,  I give  you  up— go,  and  may  you 
be  a good  warrior  in  the  service  of  Jesus.’  ” 

Under  such  circumstances,  we  were  glad  of  such  a volun- 
teer, and  to  the  apparent  high  gratification  of  old  Ngos, 
the  heathen  chief,  Tairi  and  his  wife  were  put  on  shore. 
While  bidding  us  farewell,  on  landing,  they  were  much 
affected ; a native  savage  young  man,  a son  of  Ngos,  about 
twenty-five  years  old,  seeing  their  tears,  took  one  hand  of 
each  into  his  hands,  and  mimicking  the  act  of  eating  human 
bodies,  looked  up,  as  mildly  as  a savage  could  look,  aud 
shaking  his  head,  tried  to  subdue  in  them,  what  he  thought, 
was  an  expression  of  tear,  by  saying,  “No  tear  no  cry 
me  no  eat  you  !” 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


71 


Such  were  the  interesting  and  affecting  circumstances 
under  which  Tairi,  and  his  companion  teachers,  were  left 
with  the  people  of  Fatb,  and  twenty-three  months  passed 
away  before  they  were  again  visited  ! 

The  John  Williams  was  bound  to  England.  No  other 
vessel  was  available,  and  had  there  been,  the  responsibility, 
and  expense,  of  engaging  it,  would  have  devolved  on  the 
missionaries;  but  during  the  absence  of  the  mission  ship, 
both  we  on  the  Hervey  islands,  and  our  brethren  on  Samoa, 
were  few  in  number,  and  so  fully  engaged  with  the  immedi- 
ate duties  of  those  groups,  that  a voyage  to  the  western 
stations  was  rendered  impracticable. 

Just  one  year  and  eleven  months  of  toil,  trial,  and  joy, 
mingled  with  no  small  degree  of  sorrow,  had  been  endured 
by  our  native  brethren,  when  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Turner  and 
Nisbet,  of  Samoa,  conducted  the  third  missionary  voyage  to 
the  island  of  Fate  in  1848. 

This  lengthened  absence  of  the  vessel  was  most  disastrous 
to  the  best  interests  of  the  mission.  Some  of  the  teachers 
were  found  alive  but  in  ill  health  ; others  had  been  removed, 
by  the  hand  of  death,  from  their  trials  and  labours,  to  rest 
and  reward.  After  about  ten  months’  successful  progress  in 
their  work,  one  of  the  teachers  was  taken  ill,  and  in  a few 
days  died.  His  companion’s  health  at  the  same  station  soon 
began  to  fail,  he  lingered  some  little  time,  and  as  the  disease 
advanced,  became  delirious.  This  circumstance  was  unfor- 
tunate, as  it  was  the  practice  of  the  Fateans  on  the  first 
symptoms  of  delirium,  to  put  an  end  to  the  existence  of  the 
person  so  affected.  As  the  report  got  about,  that  the  Sa- 
moan stranger  was  in  this  case,  a number  of  the  heathen 
people  came  to  his  house,  with  murderous  weapons  in  their 
hands,  and  demanded  admission.  The  poor  fellow,  con- 
scious of  their  design,  resisted  them  for  some  time,  by 
putting  his  boxes,  and  other  available  articles,  against  the 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


door — but  he  was  feeble,  and  alone ; — they  forced  an  en- 
trance, struck  him  to  the  ground,  and  he  died. 

At  Mele,  where  the  devoted  Tairi  and  his  wife  had  been 
placed  with  the  tribe  of  old  Ngos,  we  were  called  to  mourn 
over  disappointed  hopes,  blighted  under  circumstances 
deeply  affecting,  and  which,  for  the  time  being,  involved  the 
abandonment  of  that  station. 

Tairi,  on  his  landing,  had  visited  the  tribes  near  his  resi- 
dence, had  explained  to  them  the  object  he,  and  his  bre- 
thren, had  in  view  in  coming  among  them,  had  got  a few 
both  of  adults,  and  children,  to  attend  to  daily  instruction, 
and  had  succeeded  in  getting  together  a congregation  every 
Sabbath-day,  to  listen  to  the  exposition  of  God’s  word.  But 
before  these  new  influences  had  gained  sufficient  power,  so 
as  to  subdue  the  old  habits  of  the  people,  Tairi  was  taken 
ill  of  fever  and  ague,  his  strength  failed,  he  gradually  grew 
worse ; there  were  no  remedial  agencies  at  hand,  and  sub- 
mitting to  the  command  of  his  Master’s  message,  he  fell, 
saying,  “Not  my  will,  but  thine  be  done.”  His  end  was 
peace,  and  we  have  a well-grounded  hope  of  his  glorious  im- 
mortality. 

His  attached  and  faithful  wife  was  spared  the  pains  of 
disease,  to  fall  under  circumstances  still  more  distressing. 
She  was  in  health  at  the  time  of  her  husband’s  death,  and 
soon  expecting  to  give  birth  to  her  first-born  child.  The 
other  teachers  were  at  their  distant  stations,  but  arrange- 
ments had  been  made  to  remove  her  to  one  of  their  stations, 
as  soon  as  possible.  Some  time,  however,  elapsed  before 
this  could  be  accomplished,  and  she  was  left  alone  in  the 
midst  of  a cruel  heathen  population.  Taking  advantage  of 
her  desolate,  and  unprotected  condition,  these  degraded  peo- 
ple proposed,  that  she  should  be  given  to  one  of  the  chiefs, 
who  already  had  many  wives,  and  with  whom  it  was  pro- 
posed she  should  live. 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


73 


This  proposition  she,  day  by  day,  determinately  opposed 
for  some  time,  until  one  night,  a party  of  savage  men  came 
to  her  house,  and  said,  that  they  were  now  resolved  to  accom- 
p ish  their  object,  by  carrying  her  off  to  the  chief’s  house ; 
she  succeeded  in  resisting  them  until  morning,  and  then 
ran  into  a narrow  part  of  the  sea,  which  divides  Mele  from 
the  main  land  of  Fatk,  hoping  thereby  to  escape  to  the  other 
teachers ; she  was  pursued  by  the  infuriated  heathen,  and 
getting  out  of  her  depth,  she  sank,  and  was  drowned  ) thus 
preferring  death  to  degradation  ! We  do  homage  to  the 
noble  spirit  of  this  Christian  woman,  and  to  the  principles 
of  God’s  grace,  which  made  her  what  she  was ; and  while 
we  deprecate  the  awful  wickedness  of  the  degraded  men 
who  caused  her  death,  let  us  redouble  our  efforts,  to  bring 
them  under  the  full  influence  of  the  benign  gospel  of  Jesus, 
which  will  lead  them  to  a just  estimate,  and  to  a proper 
discharge  of  relative  duties  in  this  life,  as  well  as  prepare 
them  for  glory,  honour,  and  immortality,  in  the  life  that  is 
to  come. 

Amidst  the  many  sad  events  revealed  by  the  visit  of 
1848  to  the  island  of  Fath,  there  were  circumstances  which 
indicated  an  aggression  on  the  heathen  habits,  customs,  and 
principles  of  the  people.  The  teachers,  whose  lives  had  been 
spared,  had  made  good  progress  in  the  language,  had  visited 
many  of  the  distant  inland  tribes,  by  whom  they  had  been 
well  received,  and  not  a few  of  the  aged  and  the  young  were 
receiving  the  first  principles  of  the  gospel — the  power  of 
God  to  salvation,  to  every  one  who  believeth. 

Just  before  the  arrival  of  the  mission  ship,  a little  child 
had  been  born  in  a family  near  which  the  teachers  resided. 
Because  this  new-born  infant  was  a girl,  the  parents  wished 
her  to  be  put  to  death,  and  the  relatives,  in  order  to  hasten 
the  deed,  had  with  all  possible  speed  dug  a grave,  brought  the 
poor  child,  and  actually  buried  it  alive  ! The  teachers,  who 
7 


74 


OEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


had  been  apprized  of  the  fact,  went  to  the  grave,  removed 
the  earth,  found  the  babe  still  living,  and  rescued  it  from 
early  death. 

Not  only  were  the  majority  of  female  infants  doomed  to 
an  untimely  end,  but  all  the  sick  and  infirm  were  buried 
alive.  The  grave  having  been  prepared,  the  victim  was 
bound  with  tough  green  thongs,  and  lowered  into  it,  his 
cries  and  groans  being  drowned  in  the  frantic  yells  of  the 
assembled  multitude.  A deeply  affecting  instance  of  this 
kind  had  just  occurred.  A young  man,  in  the  prime  of 
life,  had  been,  on  account  of  his  illness,  buried  alive,  in  the 
manner  above  alluded  to,  but  he  had  burst  his  bonds  and  es- 
caped. He  was  again  taken  and  buried, — a second  time  he 
struggled  to  the  surface,  and  was  about  to  flee  to  the  moun- 
tains, when  he  was  again  secured — was  taken  by  his  friends  ! 
to  a valley,  where  his  body  was  firmly  fastened  to  a tree,  and 
compelled  to  die  of  starvation. 

Alas  ! how  truly  are  the  dark  places  of  the  earth  full  of 
the  habitations  of  cruelty ! 0 arm  of  the  Lord,  awake ; 
awake  ! Arouse  thy  church  to  prayer  and  effort,  in  some  de- 
gree commensurate  with  the  wants  and  claims  of  the  hea- 
then world.  Give  love,  and  zeal,  to  thy  people,  to  obey 
thy  command,  and  send  out  thy  word  to  all  the  nations,  and 
give  strong  faith,  and  enduring  patience,  to  thy  servants, 
who  live  in  the  midst  of  the  heathen,  that  they  faint  not  in 
the  great  work  committed  to  their  hands. 


CHAPTER  X. 

A whaling  ship  wrecked  on  Fate — Crew  murdered — One  man  saved  by 
the  teachers — His  note  of  testimony — A scheme  devised  by  the  na- 
tives to  take  the  mission  ship— The  vessel’s  esoape  to  another 
station — Difficulties  arising  out  of  the  great  wickedness  and  ignor- 
anoe  of  the  people — Two  attempts  by  the  natives  to  murder  the 
teachers — Horrid  deeds  of  barbarity  by  white  men — The  mission- 
ary’s lament — An  appeal. 

Just  before  the  events  recorded  in  the  last  chapter  took 
place,  circumstances  of  a most  disastrous  nature  interrupted 
the  labours  of  two  teachers  who  were  located  on  the  last 
voyage  of  the  mission  ship,  at  Olatapu,  a large  station  on 
the  east  coast.  A Sydney  whaling-ship  had  been  wrecked 
ofl'  this  place. 

The  day  after  the  wreck,  two  of  the  sailors,  starving  for 
want  of  food,  were  discovered  by  the  savages  of  the  Olatapu 
tribe,  who  immediately  determined  to  kill  them.  The 
teachers  interposed,  and  succeeded  in  saving  their  lives  that 
day,  but  on  the  following  morning,  the  bloodthirsty  natives, 
watching  their  opportunity,  slew  one  of  the  uufortunate 
shipwrecked  men,  and  before  the  feet  of  mercy  could  reach 
the  spot,  his  body  was  being  prepared  for  a cannibal  feast. 
The  other  man  took  up  his  permanent  residence  with  the 
teacher  and  was  saved. 


(75) 


76 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


A few  days  after,  on  a Sabbath  morning,  the  captain  of 
the  wreck,  and  some  twenty  men  belonging  to  the  crew, 
reached  Olatapu,  en  route  to  a large  harbour  on  the  south- 
west side  of  the  island.  At  first  they  were  treated  kindly, 
and  supplied  with  sugar-cane  and  cocoa-nuts ; and  it  was 
hoped  by  the  teachers,  that  they  would  be  allowed  to  pass 
on  uninjured. 

Suspicious  preparations,  however,  were  seen,  and  in  reply 
to  questions,  they  said,  they  were  going  to  fight  with  a 
neighbouring  tribe.  But  it  was  too  evident  that  they  were 
intending  to  make  a wholesale  onslaught  on  the  company 
of  white  men.  At  length,  having  assembled  together  in 
great  numbers,  arrangements  were  made,  as  was  said,  to 
conduct  them  on  their  journey;  the  whole  party  proceeded 
to  walk,  single  file,  along  the  road,  a native  between  every 
white  man,  and  other  natives,  as  guards,  on  either  side. 
Thus  they  marched  some  little  distance,  when  the  daring 
leader  wheeled  round,  gave  the  signal,  and  the  whole  party 
of  strangers  were  struck  dead  to  the  ground.  Ten  of  the 
bodies  were  cooked  on  the  spot ! and  others  were  distributed 
amongst  the  friendly  tribes ! Alas,  the  awful  barbarity  of 
such  incarnate  demon  spirits ! The  wonder  is  that  they 
spared  the  teachers’  lives ; hut  the  God  in  whom  they  trusted 
was  their  confidence  and  strength,  and  we  shall  see,  in  this 
narrative,  how,  rather  than  give  up  their  work,  by  fleeing 
the  island,  these  heroic  Christian  men  themselves  fell  victims 
to  the  cruelty  of  those  tribes.  The  Christian  teacher, 
both  native  as  well  as  foreign,  has  been  too  often  calum- 
niated by  our  own  countrymen,  whose  wicked  deeds  he  has 
opposed  ; but  iu  such  cases  as  the  above,  even  our  enemies 
have  been  constrained  to  do  honour  to  the  gospel,  by  wish- 
ing that  all  the  savage  tribes  were  brought  under  its  subdu- 
ing power. 

The  following  is  a note  left  on  Fate  by  the  white  man, 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


77 


■who  was  rescued  by  the  teacher  from  the  hands  of  the 
natives : — 

“ * * * This  is  to  certify  that  1 Mose  ’ (the  teacher) 

and  his  partner  left  Olatapu  on  the  16th  of  May 3 we  had 
to  run  for  our  lives  to  get  clear  of  them.  J.  Jones  was  the 
only  one  saved  out  of  the  crew  3 they  killed  them  all.  Mose, 
and  I were  saved,  and  I beg  you  to  give  him  something. 
He  is  a good  man.  He  ventured  more  than  any  man  would 
think,  and  after  all  had  to  run.  I hope  the  Lord  will  pay 
him  for  his  trouble  with  me.  John  Jones.” 

On  the  arrival  of  the  mission  ship  at  this  island  in  1849; 
the  Rev.  Messrs.  Hardie  and  Murray  were  the  visiting  de- 
putation. The  vessel  cast  anchor  in  the  beautiful  bay  of 
the  settlement  of  Pango  j but  it  was  soon  found  expedient 
to  quit  her  moorings,  for  a strong  heathen  party  had  planned 
an  attack  on  her. 

The  tribe  inhabiting  Pango  was  at  war  with  an  inland 
tribe,  and  they  had  resolved  to  bring  off  to  the  vessel  a large 
quantity  of  yams,  pigs,  and  other  articles,  as  a present  to 
the  captain,  and  to  demand  thereupon  that  the  ship’s  crew 
and  guns  should  come  to  their  service,  in  fighting  their 
enemies.  If  this  was  refused,  it  was  arranged  that  they 
Would  show  no  signs  of  displeasure,  but  go  on  shore,  and 
collect  large  quantities  of  provision  for  barter,  and  bring  it 
off  to  the  ship,  in  an  apparently  friendly  way,  and  so  locate 
themselves  about  the  deck,  as  to  engage  the  attention  of 
every  person  on  board,  and,  on  a given  signal,  make  one 
simultaneous  attack,  murder  every  individual,  and  secure 
the  vessel  as  a prize. 

This  daring  scheme  became  known  to  a native  attached 
to  the  teachers,  through  whom  it  was  made  known,  during  the 
night,  to  the  missionaries  on  board  3 and  before  morning 
dawn,  without  being  placed  in  the  awkward  position  of 


78 


GEMS  FROM  TI1E  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


either  receiving  or  rejecting  the  present,  the  anchor  was 
raised,  and  the  ship  put  out  to  sea;  and  was  thus,  in  the 
good  providence  of  God,  preserved  from  what  might  have 
proved  a fatal  attack. 

Sailing  round  to  another  part  of  this  large  island,  the  mis- 
sion ship  was  brought  to  an  anchor  off  another  station,  where 
teachers  were  also  residing.  Here  the  people  were  found 
more  mild,  and  disposed  to  give  attention  to  instruction, 
but  the  great  masses  of  them  were  still  in  their  heathen 
ignorance,  wildness,  and  degradation.  They  had  demanded 
that  the  teachers  should  join  them  in  their  wars,  and  because 
they  would  not,  but  rather  did  all  in  their  power  to  prevent 
war,  they  were  often  in  danger  of  being  murdered.  If  sick- 
ness prevailed  among  the  people,  they  were  blamed  for  it ; 
and,  if  they  fell  sick  themselves,  it  was  urged  as  a weakness 
on  the  part  of  their  God,  who  did  not  preserve  them  from 
its  influence.  They  thought  Jehovah  was  just  such  a God 
as  their  own  false  gods;  and  so  deluded  were  they,  that  one 
day,  a pig  near  death  was  brought  to  the  teacher,  accompa- 
nied with  a large  oblation  of  native  food,  as  a sacrifice  to  Je- 
hovah, requesting  the  teacher  to  pray  for  its  life  ! It  is 
impossible  to  convey,  without  these  details,  any  idea  of  the 
gross  darkness  into  which  the  mind  of  man  is  sunk,  as  found 
in  these  islanders.  The  native  Christians  themselves  are 
equally  astonished  and  disgusted  at  the  conceptions  and  the 
practices  of  their  heathen  brethren,  and  feel,  that  nothing 
but  the  patient,  faithful,  and  constant  teaching  of  the  word 
of  God  can  enlighten  and  subdue.  In  endeavouring  to  ac- 
complish this,  they  have  to  endure  dangers  and  privations 
which  baffle  all  description,  and  which  never  could  be  sus- 
tained, were  not  the  living  principles  of  gospel  love  and 
power  strongly  operative  in  their  hearts.  Their  faith  is  sim- 
ple and  strong,  and  they  are  doubtless  favoured  with  special 
communications  of  consolation,  and  special  interpositions  in 
time  of  danger. 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


79 


An  instance  of  this  occurred  to  the  teachers,  at  this  stage 
of  the  mission  on  Fate,  that  we  must  not  omit  to  record. 

Determined  to  prevent  the  further  spread  of  the  “ new 
religion,”  thirty  armed  savage  warriors  came  from  a distant 
settlement,  in  the  bay,  to  the  place  where  the  teachers  re- 
sided, and,  in  company  with  a few  of  the  most  daring  there, 
determined  to  put  an  end  to  their  lives; — they  were  as 
lambs  among  wolves,  but  an  invisible  hand  was  their  defence, 
and  not  a hair  of  their  head  was  then  injured.  For  many 
days,  the  warriors  continued  their  schemes  and  experiments 
to  strike  the  fatal  blow,  but  all  without  success;  and  they 
returned  home,  declaring  it  a wonderful  thing,  and  as  an 
evidence  of  a power  that  they  could  not  understand,  that 
the  teachers,  without  weapons,  should  escape  from  their 
hands.  Again,  and  again,  these  wicked  men  came  in  con- 
tact with  the  teachers — more  than  once  they  actually  raised 
their  hatchets;  but  their  arms  were  restrained,  they  trem- 
bled, and  could  not  strike. 

Some  time  after,  another  party  from  another  district  set 
out  on  the  same  bloody  errand,  and  determined  that  they 
would  not  suffer  a defeat,  as  their  neighbours  had  done. 
Many  canoes  were  fitted  out,  in  which  not  less  than  sixty  of 
the  most  savage  of  heathen  warriors  set  off  on  their  murder- 
ous expedition.  Could  we  have  seen  them,  skirting  the 
shores  of  the  land,  passing  quickly  along  to  the  spot  of  their 
expected  conquest,  we  should  have  heard  their  profane  war- 
song,  already  chorused  with  shouts  of  victory;  we  should 
have  seen  them  whirling  their  paddles  and  their  spears  in 
the  air,  dancing  about  as  the  limits  of  the  canoe  admitted, 
with  diabolical  frenzy,  as  their  bloodthirsty  desires  seemed 
even  already  gratified,  in  anticipation,  on  the  bodies  of  the 
devoted  teachers,  whose  errand  of  mercy  had  induced  them 
to  leave  all  the  pleasures  of  their  own  happy,  peaceful 
island  home,  to  live  on  Fatb,  amid  such  scenes  as  we  are 


80 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


now  describing.  But  God  was  near  to  save.  The  above 
party  had  not  proceeded  more  than  two-thirds  of  their  jour- 
ney, before  they  were  overtaken  by  a storm, — their  canoes 
were  dashed  in  pieces,  and  the  whole  company  returned  to 
their  homes,  more  unsuccessful  and  more  humbled  than 
those  who  had  gone  before. 

While,  however,  thus  speaking  of  the  horrid  deeds  of 
barbarity  practised  by  these  degraded  tribes,  our  sympathy 
is  excited,  and  our  blame  much  modified,  upon  the  remem- 
brance that  ships  had  visited  the  shores  of  Fat£,  before  the 
missionary  ship,  commanded  and  worked  by  men  of  our  own 
colour,  born  in  Christian  Britain,  and  cradled  in  the  Chris- 
tian religion,  but  who  had  committed  deeds  of  outrage  on 
the  persons  and  the  property  of  the  natives,  which  for  ever 
shame  and  degrade  the  white  man’s  name. 

Many  a heathen  young  man,  on  the  island  of  Fate,  has 
this  day,  fresh  in  his  remembrance,  a smart  fleet  of  three 
English  sandal-wood  vessels,  which  cast  anchor  in  one  of 
their  finest  bays,  some  little  time  before  the  first  visit  of  the 
mission  ship.  The  crews  of  these  vessels  were  landed,  and 
because  the  natives  stood  in  the  way  of  their  gaining  the 
sandal-wood,  without  proper  remuneration,  a quarrel  ensued, 
in  which  nearly  one  hundred  of  the  defenceless,  unsuspect- 
ing islanders  were  killed  on  the  spot.  Alarmed  at  this 
slaughter,  about  thirty  others,  of  the  aged,  and  women,  and 
children,  fled  to  a cave,  there  hoping  to  find  refuge  from  the 
fiend-like  fury  of  the  white  foreigners;  but  the  white  men 
pursued  them,  filled  up  the  mouth  of  the  cave  with  dry 
brushwood,  a fire  was  kindled,  and  kept  burning  until  the 
groans  and  shrieks  of  the  whole  company  of  guiltless  natives 
were  silenced  in  death  ! * * * This  being  done,  the 

foreigners  were  left  masters  of  the  district ; they  cut  down 
sufficient  wood  to  fill  their  ships,  and,  stealing  a good  supply 
of  pigs  aud  yams,  they  sailed  away  glorying  in  their  shame  ! 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


81 


Oh  that  Christian  enterprise,  in  the  form  of  Christian 
missions,  had  reached  Fatb  before  such  men  as  those  of  the 
above  expedition  had  reached  its  shores  ! Then,  how  much 
our  views  respecting  their  cruelty  would  have  been  modified, 
and  tlieir  first  experiences  of  the  white  man’s  character 
would  not  have  been  connected  with  barbarity  and  crime. 

Mournful,  indeed,  is  the  lament  sent  forth  to  the  world, 
some  time  ago,  in  the  following  language,  by  brethren  who 
had  visited  Fatfe.  Truthfully  they  say  : — 

“ The  evils  committed  by  the  white  man  on  these  shores 
who  can  estimate?  As  we  approach,  we  find  them  red  with 
blood,  spilt  through  the  cupidity  and  avarice  of  the  foreign- 
ers. The  natives,  after  the  first  visit  of  the  white  man, 
know  him  only  as  a savage,  and,  standing  at  a distance,  ter- 
rified at  our  approach,  bid  us  begone  from  their  shores;  or, 
bent  upon  revenge,  they  allure  us  to  come  nigh,  and  devise 
a thousand  schemes  to  ensnare  us  as  their  victims.  Alas ! 
what  can  be  done?” 

The  churches  of  Christ  are  now  replying  to  that  question. 
The  mission  ship  and  the  missionary  are  now  becoming 
known  to  the  natives  as  their  best  friends,  and,  although  we 
have  yet  to  narrate  events  on  Fatb,  which  cause  us  to  mourn 
that  our  mission  there  was  commenced  so  late,  yet,  there  is 
more  than  sufficient  in  past  delay,  and  present  encourage- 
ments, to  urge  on  the  church  of  Christ  to  sustain  and  to 
extend  its  mission  of  mercy,  even  to  the  most  degraded 
tribes  of  the  earth. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

Havana  harbour — Fatfe  chief  desires  to  visit  Samoa — His  engagements 
while  there — The  mission  ship  returns  to  England— Trial  of  teachers’ 
faith  and  patience — Burying  alive  of  a widow  and  her  daughter 
prevented — Further  reinforcement  of  the  mission — Very  general 
sickness  of  the  people — Heathen  party  exasperated — They  murder 
two-and-twenty  natives — Hopeful  progress  at  some  of  the  stations. 

On  the  south-west  side  of  Fatb,  there  is  a splendid  bay, 
known  as  Havana  harbour;  it  is  unequalled  in  either  East- 
ern or  Western  Polynesia,  being  some  nine  miles  deep,  by 
three  miles  broad,  and  completely  land-locked.  In  this 
lovely  bay,  the  mission  ship  had  been  lying  at  anchor  during 
the  day  of  the  visit  to  Fate,  mentioned  in  the  last  chapter. 
Serna  is  the  name  of  a district  of  land  which  surrounds  this 
beautiful  bay,  and  considering  the  many  disastrous  circum- 
stances which  had  so  recently  occurred,  retarding  the  pro- 
gress, and  counteracting  the  influence  of  Christian  instruc- 
tion, it  was  peculiarly  gratifying  to  witness  the  confidence 
of  the  Serna  people  towards  the  missionaries,  who  desired 
that  their  young  chief,  and  his  brother,  should  go  in  the  ship 
to  Samoa. 

They  had  now  seen  educated  Christian  men  of  their  own 
colour  from  Samoa  and  Rarotonga,  who,  they  were  assured, 
but  a few  years  ago,  were  in  a state  of  idolatry  and  hcatheu- 
(82) 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


83 


ism.  They  had  also  heard  of  the  great  change  that  had 
been  effected  by  the  preaching  of  the  gospel  in  those 
eastern  lands,  and  how  that,  in  schools  and  institutions 
there,  promising  young  men  were  educated  for  future  useful- 
ness; and  they  wished  some  of  their  own  countrymen  to  go, 
and  to  see  if  these  things  were  so,  and  to  remain  under  in- 
struction by  the  missionaries,  so  as  to  return  home  on  the 
next  visit  of  the  ship. 

Tongalulu  the  chief,  and  his  companion,  were  proposed, 
and  the  request  was  gladly  acceded  to  by  the  missionaries; 
they  were  brought  to  Samoa,  and  took  up  their  residence  in 
the  institution  for  the  education  of  native  teachers.  Here 
they  remained  more  than  two  years;  they  learned  to  read 
the  word  of  God,  and  were  brought  under  influences  which 
wrought  favourably  on  their  minds  and  their  habits. 

The  only  thing  regretted  was,  that  during  the  residence 
of  these  semi-heathens  in  Samoa,  some  of  the  Samoan  clans 
themselves  were  unhappily  engaged  in  war,  and  they  con- 
sequently saw  and  heard  much  evil,  fitted  only  to  their  own 
dark  land;  yet,  even  uuder  these  circumstances,  the  char- 
acter and  effects  of  the  word  of  Jehovah  were  strikiugly  seen 
in  the  educated  minds  and  consistent  Christian  lives  of 
thousands  of  the  Samoan  population;  and  it  was  hoped  they 
would  gain  much  that  should  prepare  them,  on  their  return 
to  Fate,  to  render  good  service  to  the  mission  there. 

At  this  point  of  our  missionary  efforts  for  the  island  of 
Fate,  we  have  again  to  mourn  over  the  unavoidable  length 
of  time  which  passed  away  before  the  John  Williams  again 
visited  its  shores.  It  was  her  return  voyage  to  England. 
Here  she  was  detained  for  repairs,  and  nine  or  ten  mouths 
elapsed  before  she  set  sail  again  for  the  islands.  On  her 
voyage  westward,  she  called  at  Rarotonga,  where  several  na- 
tive teachers  were  ready  to  go  on  in  her,  and  calling  at  Sa- 
moa, several  others  were  added  to  the  number,  and  the  visit- 


84 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


ing  of  the  stations  was  undertaken  by  the  Rev.  Messrs. 
Murray  and  Sunderland. 

But,  alas ! more  than  thirty  moons,  according  to  native 
calculation,  had  passed  away  since  the  departure  of  the  ves- 
sel from  the  island  of  Fatfe.  The  windmakers,  and  priests, 
and  warriors,  among  the  people,  were  now  quite  sure  the 
“ religion  ship  of  the  foreigners”  would  no  more  return. 
The  teachers,  too,  whose  faith  was  usually  strong,  began  to 
doubt,  and  their  patience  oftentimes  was  well  nigh  exhausted. 
Day  by  day,  for  some  months,  they  had  frequently  gone  to 
the  furthest  point  of  land,  and  ascending  the  highest  elevation, 
looked  seaward,  with  anxious  hope,  for  the  vessel’s  return. 

The  friends  and  relatives  also  of  Tongalulu,  the  young 
chief,  were  filled  with  much  anxiety  respecting  his  safe- 
ty, and  had  frequently  visited  the  stations  where  the  teachers 
resided,  to  inquire  whether  they  knew  anything  of  the  cause 
of  the  vessel’s  delay;  and  getting  no  satisfactory  intelli- 
gence, they  at  length  returned  home,  and  with  the  people 
of  their  district,  made  general  lamentation,  and  attended  to 
various  heathen  funeral  rites  and  ceremonies,  mourning  over 
their  absent  relatives,  whom  they  now  believed  to  be  dead  ! 

Under  these  circumstances,  both  the  teachers  and  people 
were  much  rejoiced  at  again  seeing  the  John  Williams  at 
anchor  off  their  island,  after  an  absence  of  two  years  and  a 
half.  A number  of  canoes  soon  surrounded  the  ship,  and 
as  early  as  possible  a meeting  was  held  with  the  teachers. 

It  was  gratifying  to  find,  that  encouraging  progress  had 
been  made  among  many  of  the  clans  ; — not  a few  of  the 
heathen  party  had  ceased  to  unite  with  other  stations  in 
war;  had  discontinued  many  of  their  superstitious  customs, 
and  had  given  up  their  former  inveterate  cannibalism.  Un- 
der the  superintendence  of  the  teachers,  they  had  also  built 
the  first  chapel,  exclusively  set  apart  for  the  worship  of  God 
— in  which  regular  services  were  conducted,  and  were  well 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


85 


attended ; several  families  had  established  morning  and  eve- 
ning prayer  at  their  own  homes,  and  a few  persons  gave 
hopeful  evidences  of  their  true  conversion  to  God. 

The  teachers  had  been  able  to  itinerate  among  other  tribes 
of  distant  stations,  where  they  had  been  for  the  most  part 
well  received,  and  their  message  listened  to  with  encour- 
aging attention. 

The  horrid  custom  of  burying  alive  the  old  and  infirm 
people,  and  children,  had  been  broken  in  upon  by  Christian 
instruction,  and  among  the  instances  of  prevention,  was  one 
which  occurred  at  a neighbouring  village,  a short  time  be- 
fore the  return  of  the  ship. 

An  influential  young  man  had  died,  and  his  relations  de- 
termined that  his  wife  and  little  daughter  should  be  buried 
alive  with  him.  But  the  chief  of  the  station,  who  had  for 
some  time  been  attending  to  Christian  instruction,  deter- 
mined, if  possible,  to  prevent  this  purpose  ; he  visited  the 
family,  reasoned  the  matter  with  them,  and  explained,  as 
far  as  he  knew,  the  better  principles  under  which  he  had 
been  brought  by  the  word  of  God. 

He  happily  succeeded  in  his  mission,  and  had  the  pleas- 
ure of  seeing  the  body  of  the  young  man  buried  alone,  and 
was  the  means  of  saving  the  lives  of  the  wife  and  the  daugh- 
ter from  a premature  grave. 

Thankful  and  encouraged  for  the  position  gained  at  this 
station,  a Rarotongan  teacher  and  his  wife  were  located 
there  to  assist  in  the  work  thus  begun,  and  the  ship  sailed 
round  to  Havana  harbour,  whence,  it  will  be  remembered, 
the  chief  Tongalulu  embarked  for  Samoa. 

His  return  was  hailed  with  frantic  joy;  hundreds  of  wild 
savage  warriors,  accompanied  with  as  many  women  and 
children,  gathered  together  on  the  beach  to  welcome  him, 
who  had  been  so  far  from  home,  and  for  whom  they  had 
mourned  as  for  one  dead. 


86 


OEMS  FROM  TITE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


It  must  be  remembered,  that  at  this  period  of  our  mis- 
sionary efforts  in  Fate,  we  had  six  stations,  more  or  less 
under  the  influences  of  regular  Christian  instruction. 

At  three  of  these,  a desperate  struggle  between  heathen- 
ism and  Christianity  was  now  going  on,  and  was  marked  by 
signs  which  indicated  that  a still  greater  conflict  would 
have  to  be  endured  before  the  old  system  of  things  was 
broken  down. 

At  one  village,  where  a chapel  had  been  built,  and  things 
had  been  going  on  favourably,  a fatal  epidemic  had  prevailed, 
of  which  many  of  the  tribe  had  died.  The  inveterate 
heathen  party  availed  themselves  of  this  visitation,  and  de- 
termined that  Christian  instruction  should  cease.  The 
teachers,  however,  continued  their  services,  until  the  more 
daring  of  the  tribe  set  tire  to  the  chapel,  burnt  it  to  the 
ground,  persecuted  the  little  Christian  band,  and  effectually 
resisted  all  further  aggression. 

About  this  time,  a party  of  nine-and-twenty  natives  came 
from  Havana  harbour  to  this  station  for  purposes  of  barter. 
Just  now  the  people  of  Pango  were  urged  to  heathen  cruelty, 
by  influences  more  strong  and  active  than  usual,  and  they 
resolved  to  murder  the  whole  of  the  visitors. 

To  accomplish  their  purpose,  they  gave  out  a report  that 
a ship  was  imsight — this  brought  the  unsuspecting  victims 
to  the  spot  selected  for  the  tragical  deed,  and  two-and -twenty 
of  them  were  killed,  whose  bodies,  with  one  exception,  were 
distributed  to  the  cannibal  warriors  of  the  neighbouring 
tribes. 

At  Erakor,  one  of  the  most  promising  villages,  sufficient 
progress  had  been  made  in  1853,  to  induce  the  hope  that 
the  time  was  not  far  distant,  when  all  its  people  would  be 
brought  under  the  power  of  the  Gospel.  The  missionaries 
visiting  that  year,  spent  a Sabbath-day  at  this  place,  and 
were  much  pleased  with  what  they  saw.  Two  hundred  and 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


87 


fifty  persons  came  together  for  worship,  who  evinced  much 
desire  to  advance  in  knowledge  and  civilization. 

At  Sema  two  hundred  of  the  natives  were  constant  in 
attendance  ou  religious  instruction  every  Sabbath-day,  and 
more  than  fifty  children  were  in  the  schools. 

Lolopa,  in  Havana  harbour,  was  also  taken  up  as  a new 
station.  Two  teachers  landed  there  under  circumstances  most 
favourable,  and  the  brethren  were  again  permitted  to  leave 
the  island,  mourning  indeed  over  much  evil,  and  many  hin- 
derances,  which  yet  existed,  but  rejoicing  that  so  much  of 
this  unpromising  soil  had  been  broken  up.  In  many  places 
the  seed  of  the  kingdom  had  been  sown ; and  although  har- 
vest time  had  not  come,  yet  there  were  sufficient  encourage- 
ments to  invite  the  Christian  husbandman  to  continue  in 
his  toils — believing,  that  “ he  who  goeth  forth  and  weepeth, 
bearing  precious  seed,  shall  doubtless,  in  due  time,  come 
again  with  rejoicing,  bringing  his  sheaves  with  him.”  But 
the  harvest  home  is  not  yet  on  Fath. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

Last  visit  to  the  island  in  1854 — A meditated  attack  on  the  mission  ship 
by  a heathen  party — Many  teachers  had  died  since  the  last  visit — 
Circumstances  of  their  illnes6  and  death — A native  letter — Two 
teachers  barbarously  murdered — Present  consequent  painful  position 
of  Fate  mission — Our  hope  still  in  the  power  and  the  grace  of  God. 

In  bringing  this  narrative  of  Missionary  efforts  on  Fatb 
to  a close,  we  are  not  permitted  to  record  details  of  triumph, 
like  those  gained  on  Mare,  and  other  islands  of  this  group. 
The  enemy  has  marshalled  his  forces  agaiust  us,  and  we  are 
at  present  suffering  a retreat;  a record  of  which,  however, 
will  show  the  friends  of  Missions,  the  difficulties  we  have 
to  contend  with  in  introducing  the  gospel  to  those  heathen 
people,  and  we  trust  lead  them  to  deeper  sympathy,  and 
more  dependent,  constant  prayer  to  Almighty  God,  that  he 
would  give  his  servants  continual  supplies  of  sustaining 
grace,  by  which  they  may  endure  to  the  end,  and  ultimately 
triumph  over  every  foe. 

The  Rev.  Charles  Hardie,  who  in  company  with  the  Rev. 
F.  Sunderland,  last  visited  Fate,  in  October,  1854,  gives  a 
deeply  affecting  report  of  troubles  which  now  prevail  there, 
of  which  the  following  is  a brief  account : — 

As  we  approached  the  district  of  Olotapu,  we  were  at 

(88) 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


89 


first  cheered  by  seeing  natives  coming  off  in  canoes,  but 
much  to  our  surprise  and  annoyance,  as  they  came  near  the 
ship,  they  paddled  off  to  the  other  side  of  the  island.  Not 
long  after,  however,  another  canoe  came  off,  having  on  board 
a man  who  had  formerly  been  at  Samoa,  and  from  him  we 
learnt  that  some  of  the  teachers  had  died  of  disease,  since 
we  last  left  the  island,  that  others  had  been  murdered  by 
the  heathen  tribes,  and  that  only  one  remained  on  shore 
to  give  us  a full  detail  of  the  mournful  facts.  Deeply 
affected  by  these  sad  tidings,  and  anxious  to  gain  further 
information,  we  shortened  sail,  and  lay  “ off  and  on,”  some 
time,  until  a great  number  of  canoes,  filled  with  warriors, 
all  heavily  armed,  were  seen  making  for  the  anchorage. 
From  their  hostile  appearance,  an  attack  on  the  vessel  was 
feared,  and  the  captain  determined  not  to  come  to  an  anchor. 
After  some  delay  we  succeeded  in  getting  off  Setephano, 
the  native  teacher,  and  Pornarb,  the  chief  of  Erakor. 

Poor  Setephano  ! on  coming  on  board,  he  was  deeply 
affected, — sobs  and  cries  for  some  time  prevented  his  utter- 
ing a word.  At  length  he  told  us  that  he  was  the  only 
teacher  spared  amidst  the  afflictive  events  of  the  past  year. 

Yaaru,  a devoted  intelligent  man,  left  at  Erakor,  died 
of  fever  after  eight  days’  illness.  Tauri,  another  Raro- 
tongan  teacher,  stationed  at  this  place,  under  date  of  Febru- 
ary, 1854,  writes  encouragingly,  saying  : — “lam  glad  to  tell 
you  that  I and  my  wife,  the  last  three  months,  are  getting 
on  in  the  language.  The  heathen  party,  inland  of  my  sta- 
tion, are  very  numerous,  but  I am  permitted  to  go  among 
them,  and  many  of  them  are  coming  to  our  Sabbath-day 
services.  Oh,  what  a sweet  thing  is  prayer  to  God  ! It 
may  be  this  whole  land  will  soon  be  filled  with  praise  to 
Jesus,  for  the  power  of  his  word. 

“ I and  Tauri  Vaine,  my  wife,  have  two  classes  of  young 
people,  whom  we  are  instructing,  every  morning  and  even- 
8* 


90 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


ing.  These  young  people  are  much  pleased  in  learning,  they 
are  diligent,  and  we  hope  they  will  soon  help  us  in  teaching 
the  old  people.”  . . . But  in  the  midst  of  Tauri’s  commen- 
cing prosperity,  his  hopes  are  blighted — his  wife  was  taken 
ill  and  died.  Thus  bereaved,  the  young  man,  while  his 
heart  is  full  of  sorrow,  on  account  of  his  loss,  writes, — 
“ Death  has  separated  us — has  released  us  from  the  law 
which  united  us  in  the  flesh,  but  it  was  well  with  her  in 
death.  Alas  ! for  the  heathen,  they  were  just  beginning  to 
understand,  and  to  rejoice  in  her  instruction.”  Before, 
however,  the  father’s  wounds,  on  account  of  the  loss  of  his 
companion  brother,  and  his  wife,  were  healed,  his  only  child 
was  taken  ill,  and  in  one  month  after  the  death  of  the  mother, 
the  child  also  was  carried  to  the  grave.  The  distressed  father 
again  writes  : — “ This  is  a severe  blow — my  heart  is  full  of 
sorrow  : Rautoa,  my  son,  is  dead — I am  weeping — but  I lean 
my  trouble  upon  Jesus.”  In  concluding  this  letter  Tauri 
says, — “ What  I have  written  will  show  you  the  nature  of 
our  work  among  this  heathen  people ; but  now  our  greatest 
anxiety  is  for  those  who  have  to  come  to  us  for  instruction  ; 
they  are  constantly  tried  and  tempted  to  turn  aside.” 

Not  many  months  after  the  date  of  the  above  letter, 
Tauri’s  own  health  gave  way,  there  was  no  hand  nigh  to 
administer  to  his  wants, — he  lingered  some  time,  and  died 
also ! 

At  another  station,  the  prevalence  of  disease  led  the  dis- 
affected party  to  determine  on  the  death  of  the  teachers,  but 
nothing  daunted,  at  this  time,  the  faithful,  ever-constant 
Christian  men  went  to  preach  to  an  inland  tribe,  and  were 
accompanied  by  some  of  the  kind  people  of  Erakor.  On  their 
return  home,  they  were  attacked  by  a party  of  the  savages ; 
one  of  them  was  severely  beaten — another  was  only  saved 
from  a spear  wound,  by  his  garment  receiving  the  weapon  ; 
four  of  their  native  friends  were  murdered,  and  the  teachers 


ISLAND  OF  FATE. 


91 


■wore  only  spared,  by  paying  a ransom  of  two  large  pigs  each, 
and  six  native  mats  ! 

But  the  most  distressing  event  to  our  Mission  on  the 
island  of  Fat&,  took  place  on  the  20th  of  November,  1854. 
Two  Karotongan  teachers,  Pikikaa  and  Kaveriri,  with  their 
wives,  were  all  barbarously  murdered,  at  Lolopa,  a station 
in  Havana  harbour.  The  horrid  deed  was  made  known  to 
the  people  of  Erakor,  two  days  after  it  had  been  perpetrated, 
by  a man  to  whom  part  of  one  of  the  bodies  had  been  sent; 
and  who,  with  his  degraded  companions,  rejoiced  in  the  tri- 
umph thus  gained  to  their  cause. 

A little  boy,  a son  of  one  of  the  teachers,  was  at  first 
spared,  by  order  of  one  of  the  chiefs,  who  afterwards  com- 
manded that  he  should  be  taken  out  to  sea,  and  cast  away. 
This  was  done,  but  the  poor  little  fellow,  escaping  from  the 
deep,  had  his  hands  cut  off,  and  after  being  otherwise  tor- 
tured, was  killed;  and  a party  of  the  most  savage  spirits  in 
human  form  revelled  with  delight  on  his  body,  in  a cannibal 
feast. 

But  now  the  question  arises  in  the  reader’s  heart,  Are 
these  beings  men?  and  can  such  beings  ever  be  educated  and 
blessed  by  Missionary  teaching  ? Yes,  they  are  indeed  men 
— our  fellow  men;  and  thanks  be  unto  God,  who  for  our  en- 
couragement, has,  by  his  grace,  through  a preached  gospel, 
subdued  and  sanctified  “an  exceeding  great  number”  of 
such  men  as  they.  Among  the  “spirits  made  perfect,” 
around  the  throne  of  God,  and  of  the  Lamb,  they  shine  as 
holy  and  as  happy  as  any  of  the  jewels  saved  by  grace  ; and, 
in  our  infant  churches,  in  heathen  lands,  there  are  hundreds, 
concerning  whom,  it  can  be  truthfully  said,  such  were  they 
— but  they  have  been  sought  out  and  polished,  by  the  Spi- 
ritual Refiner  of  men,  and  now,  reflecting  his  image,  they 
shine  as  lights  in  the  world,  exhibiting  as  great  and  as  glo- 
rious a contrast  as  can  be  exhibited  on  earth  between  the 
heathen  savage  and  the  truly  Christian  life. 


92 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Fatb  is  at  present  under  a cloud — this  is  the  hour  of 
the  powers  of  darkness  there — but  there  is  a light  still  shin- 
ing at  the  station  of  Erakor.  A considerable  number  of  its 
people,  with  its  chief,  have  abandoned  heathen  customs,  are 
delighting  in  the  word  of  God,  constantly  observe  family, 
and  public  worship,  and  otherwise  give  evidence  of  having 
experienced  a saving  change  of  heart. 

It  has  been  thought  well  that  Sualo,  the  Samoan  warrior, 
who  first  led  our  Mission  to  Fate,  and  Setephano,  the  sur- 
viving teacher,  should  retire  awhile  to  Samoa,  where  they 
now  are,  with  the  churches  there,  praying  God  to  inter- 
pose, by  his  providence;  and,  on  the  return  of  the  John 
Williams  from  England,  to  cause  the  people  of  Fate  again 
to  see  their  teachers,  and  to  rejoice  in  their  return. 

Brethren,  re-peruse  this  missionary  narrative  respecting 
Fate,  until  your  tenderest  sympathies  are  awakened  on  its 
behalf ; and  by  believing,  expecting,  constant  prayer,  accom- 
panied with  generous  practical  assistance,  doubt  not  the 
issue.  On  Fate,  as  well  as  on  other  fields,  where  the  enemy 
has  already  fallen,  we  shall  yet  spoil  the  opposing  powers 
and  the  principalities  of  darkness,  make  a show  of  them 
openly,  and  triumph  over  them,  through  the  Gospel  of 
Jesus,  our  Saviour,  and  our  King. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  EDO MANGA. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

Notices  respecting  sandal-wood — Its  growth,  purchase,  and  sale — Deeds 
of  injustice  and  atrocity  by  traders  in  sandal-wood — Captain  Cook’s 
discovery  of  Eromanga — His  intercourse  with  the  people — His 
landing  among  them — Subsequent  difficulties — Captain  Cook’s  firo 
upon  the  natives — Unfavourable  impressions  of  the  white  man’s 
character  on  the  minds  of  the  natives. 

As  the  history  of  the  New  Hebrides  group  of  islands, 
especially  that  of  Eromanga,  is  in  its  details  so  intimately 
connected  with  the  sandal-wood  trade,  a short  notice  re- 
specting its  growth,  and  the  manner  in  which  it  is  obtained 
from  the  islauders.  its  sale,  and  its  uses,  will  not  be  consid- 
ered out  of  place,  as  an  introduction  to  the  missionary 
history  of  this  island. 

The  sandal-wood  yet  discovered  in  those  islands  is  that 
well  known  in  commerce,  which  is  of  a light  yellow  colour, 
and  of  exceedingly  fragrant  odour.  It  is  a tree  of  small  size, 
having  numerous  branches  of  irregular  form,  which,  with 
the  trunk,  are  covered  with  a thick,  red-brown  bark.  The 
leaves  are  of  a very  dark  green  colour,  are  set  in  pairs,  and 

(93) 


94 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


disposed  to  turn  inwards.  The  flowers  grow  in  small 
clusters,  and  are  white,  not  unfrequeutly  having  a red 
exterior. 

This  wood,  although  rarely  found  in  large  trees,  of  mature 
growth,  in  the  islands  of  the  Pacific,  yet  is  comparatively 
abundant  on  the  Sandwich,  Marquesan,  Fejee,  and  New 
Hebrides  groups.  It  has  been  long  well  known  and  highly 
valued  by  the  Chinese,  by  whom  it  is  variously  and  beauti- 
fully wrought,  in  the  manufacture  of  fancy  tables,  boxes, 
fans,  and  other  articles;  they  also  burn  it  as  incense  in  their 
private  houses  and  temples,  and  use  long  thin  slips  of  the 
wood,  iuserted  iu  a mixture  of  rice  paste  aud  its  sawdust,  as 
candles,  which  emit  a most  pleasant  fragrance,  and  are  con- 
sidered a luxury. 

It  is  to  be  regretted  that  a production  so  extensive  in 
those  islands,  and  which,  if  bartered  for  from  the  natives 
upon  just  principles  of  commerce,  might  be  the  means  of 
much  good  to  those  barbarous  tribes,  has,  in  reality,  almost 
without  exception,  so  excited  the  avarice  and  cupidity  of  the 
white  man,  as  to  make  the  means  by  which  it  is  obtained, 
“ little  better  than  plundering  expeditions  carried  on  with 
extreme  distrust  on  both  sides,  accompanied  by  no  incon- 
siderable loss  of  life,”  and  either  preventing  altogether,  or 
much  retarding,  the  success  of  benevolent  efforts  made  by 
the  Christian  church,  to  subdue  and  to  regenerate  the  hea- 
then tribes  of  these  lands. 

The  avidity  with  which  the  sandal-wood  is  sought  after  is 
much  regulated  by  its  demand  in  the  Chinese  market, 
where  it  brings  a return  varying  from  $75  to  $175  per  ton. 

There  have  been  about  ten  to  fourteen  vessels  generally 
engaged  in  this  trade,  among  the  islands  of  Western  Poly- 
nesia ; and  it  is  calculated  that  each  full  cargo,  after  all  ex- 
penses of  an  eight  months’  cruise  are  paid,  leaves  to  the 
owner  a net  profit  of  more  than  Jive  thousand  dollars. 


ISLAND  OF  F.ROMANGA. 


95 


It  is  now  about  five-and-twenty  years  ago  since  Eroinanga 
first  began  to  be  visited  by  sandal-wood  traders.  During 
the  whole  of  this  period,  down  to  the  last  two  or  three  years, 
the  most  revolting  deeds  have  been  perpetrated  with  mourn- 
ful frequency, — foreigners  murdering  the  Eromangans,  and 
the  Eromangans  murdering  foreigners;  so  that  wood  brought 
from  the  island  has  been  frequently  seen  literally  besmeared 
with  human  blood,  as  the  barbarous  price  by  which  it  has 
been  secured. 

We  have  already  .seen  in  the  narrative  of  Mare  and  Fate, 
that  the  natives  have  committed  deeds  of  most  appalling 
cruelty  and  barbarity  on  foreigners,  when  first  visited  by 
them.  This  was,  however,  to  be  expected,  for  they  were 
found  a savage,  heathen,  cannibal  people ; but  we  say  not 
too  much  when  we  affirm,  that  not  one-tenth  of  those  deeds 
would  have  been  done  by  them , bad  not  the  vile  conduct  of 
the  white  man  too  often  aroused  them  to  revenge  and  re- 
taliation. 

From  facts  that  have  come  to  light  in  connection  with  the 
way  in  which  sandal-wood  has  been  obtained  from  the 
natives,  we  have  wondered  that  any  white  man,  once  in 
their  power,  has  ever  escaped  with  his  life. 

We  have  heard  of  traders  who,  when  they  get  a chief  on 
board,  keep  him  prisoner,  without  any  offence,  until  the 
people  bring  boat-loads  of  wood  off,  as  the  price  of  his 
release.  The  remuneration  demanded  by  the  natives  in 
their  heathen  state,  in  exchange  for  the  wood,  is  always 
small;  and  yet,  in  untold  instances,  this  has  been  either 
given  with  an  unjust  hand,  or  refused  altogether.  Pigs, 
teeth,  cats,  goats,  small  white  shells, — these  were  the 
articles  demanded  by  the  Eromangans,  and  one  of  which 
was  frequently  sufficient  to  purchase  a ton  of  sandal-wood. 
Yet  for  many  years,  on  every  visit  of  our  mission  ship  to 
the  island,  we  learnt  that  fresh  acts  of  fraud  and  cruelty 


96 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


had  been  committed  on  the  persons  of  the  natives.  In 
1852,  four  natives  were  murdered  by  a party  who  went  to 
the  island  in  a collecting  schooner;  and  at  a still  later 
period  another  was  shot  dead,  because  of  a dispute  which 
occurred  by  his  demanding  a shell  in  exchange  for  his  wood, 
while  the  purchaser  would  give  nothing  but  tobacco,  which 
the  native  refused. 

Happily  there  have  been  traders  in  this  article  who  are 
honourable  exceptions  in  their  dealings  with  the  natives  to 
the  examples  given  above — a tenth  of  whose  inhuman  deeds 
can  never  be  told.  The  exceptions  have  dealt  honestly  with 
the  people,  and  have  obtained  the  wood  by  fair  means  or  not 
at  all;  but  the  majority  have  been  determined  to  have  it 
at  any  price,  even  the  price  of  blood.  The  following  well- 
known  fact  will  awfully  illustrate  a case  : — 

A captain  on  a sandal-wood  cruise  put  his  ship  into  a 
settlement  on  an  island  not  far  from  Eromanga,  when  the 
tribe  residing  there  was  found  to  be  at  war  with  another 
tribe  not  far  round  the  coast.  In  his  desire  to  fill  his  ves- 
sel with  wood,  the  captain  presented  many  inducements 
to  the  people  if  they  would  aid  him  in  getting  a good  sup- 
ply down  to  the  beach.  This  they  said  they  could  not  do 
during  the  war.  Away  from  the  restraints  of  law  and  order 
and  the  influences  of  civilized  society,  the  so-called  Christian 
man  thought  that  he  could  act  towards  the  natives  with 
impunity,  and  proposed  that,  if  they  would  assist  in  getting 
down  the  wood,  he,  in  return,  would  go  and  fight  their 
enemies  after  the  white  man’s  style.  The  agreement  was 
made  ; he  sailed  his  vessel  round  to  the  station  where  the 
opposing  tribe  lived,  and,  with  feigned  blandness  of  conduct, 
had  a lengthened  interview  with  them.  They  had  no  sus- 
picions respecting  his  object,  and  confided  in  the  friend- 
liness they  saw. 

Having  thus  far  gained  his  point,  he  invited  the  people 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


97 


to  come  off  in  great  numbers  to  his  ship.  The  invitation 
was  accepted  ; a multitude  of  them  came  on  board,  and  the 
cruel,  civilized  (!)  white  man  made  an  attack  on  them  while 
in  their  unprepared,  and  defenceless  state.  Poor  creatures! 
they  were  thrown  into  the  utmost  consternation,  aud  those 
who  escaped  did  so  by  jumping  overboard  into  the  sea,  and 
swimmiug  on  shore.  One  dead  body  was  secured,  who  with  a 
living  captive,  was  kept  on  board.  Having  thus  succeeded, 
the  captain  weighed  anchor,  and  sailed  round  to  the  tribe 
with  whom  he  had  entered  into  the  infernal  compact;  and, 
horrid  to  relate,  he  not  only  delivered  up  the  body  of  the 
mnrdered  Dative,  but  also  gave  up  the  unfortunate  victim, 
taken  prisoner,  to  his  enemies,  who  took  him  on  shore,  and 
revelled  on  his  body  in  a cannibal  feast ! The  wicked  man 
who  committed  this  outrage,  got  his  vessel  filled  with  wood, 
bought  with  the  blood  of  his  fellow-men ; but  woe  to  his 
guilty  spirit,  if  its  sin  be  not  forgiven,  and  its  guilt  be  not 
cleansed  ! Por,  although  man  thinketh  not  so,  yet  verily 
there  is  a God  who  judgeth  in  the  earth. 

Eromanga  is  an  island  not  much  less  than  a hundred 
miles  in  circumference.  It  is  of  triangular  form.  Its  coast 
is  for  the  most  part  rugged  and  barren;  its  mountains  are 
of  moderate  height,  and  its  valleys,  even  in  heathenism, 
were  in  a state  of  comparative  cultivation. 

The  first  acquaintance  of  the  English  with  the  inhabitants 
of  this  land  was  made  in  1774,  by  the  great  navigator  Cap- 
tain Cook.  On  nearing  the  shore  the  first  day,  his  ship 
ranged  the  west  coast,  keeping  about  a mile  distant.  Nu- 
merous inhabitants  were  seen,  who  by  signs  invited  the 
strangers  to  land.  Detained  by  baffling  winds  and  currents, 
the  vessel  did  not  get  in  with  the  land  until  the  fourth  day 
after  its  discovery.  Two  boats  were  lowered,  and  Captain 
Cook,  commanding  one  of  them,  began  to  examine  the 
coast,  and  to  seek  a proper  place  for  lauding,  in  order  to 
9 


CAPTAIN  COwK  LANDING  ON  EttOMANGA. 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANOA. 


m 


obtain  firewood  and  water.  Not  findiug  a suitable  place  to 
go  on  shore,  owing  to  the  rocks  which  everywhere  lined  the 
coast,  the  captain  merely  put  the  boat’s  bow  to  the  shore, 
and  distributed  various  presents  to  the  natives,  who  became 
so  desirous  that  he  and  his  party  should  land  among  them, 
that  they  offered  to  haul  the  boat  over  the  breakers. 

Finding,  however,  that  their  offer  was  not  acceded  to, 
the  excited  people  directed  the  papalcingi,  or  “ heavenly  for- 
eigners,” to  row  further  down  the  bay,  while  they  ran  along 
the  shore  abreast  of  them. 

At  length  coming  to  a suitable  spot,  the  captain  landed 
on  a fine  sandy  beach,  in  the  midst  of  a vast  concourse  of 
natives,  having  nothing  in  his  hand  but  a green  branch  of 
a tree,  which  he  had  obtained  from  the  people,  and  by  which 
he  signified  his  friendly  intentions. 

In  all  probability,  our  enterprising  navigator  was  the  first 
white  man  who  had  come  in  actual  contact  with  the  Ero- 
mangans  by  landing  on  their  shores.  What  they  thought 
of  him  we  know  not ; but  he  was  evidently  much  charmed 
with  their  behaviour.  He  says  they  received  him  with 
“great  courtesy  and  politeness;” — they  brought  him  cocoa- 
nuts,  and  yams,  and  water,  for  refreshment,  and  an  influential 
man,  who  was  taken  to  be  a chief,  successfully  exerted  him- 
self to  keep  the  crowd  in  order,  making  them  form  a semi- 
circle around  the  bow  of  the  boat.  Nothing,  it  appears, 
in  their  manners  on  this  occasion  gave  indication  of  un- 
friendly feelings;  only  that  they  appeared,  what  they  were 
in  reality,  a heathen  people,  in  a degraded  condition,  and 
armed  with  clubs,  spears,  and  bows  and  arrows. 

How  much  is  it  to  be  regretted,  that  on  this  first  inter- 
course of  English  people  with  these  heathen  tribes,  our 
fathers  did  not  make  provision  to  give  them  a knowledge  of 
Jehovah  as  the  only  living  and  true  God,  and  that  they  did 
not  make  immediate  efforts  to  bring  them  under  the  in- 


100 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


fluences  of  our  pure  Christianity  ! But,  alas  ! we  have  found 
by  subsequent  visits  to  these  lauds  that  our  early  Protestant 
navigators  not  only  did  not  give  any  information  to  the  na- 
tives respecting  a true  God,  and  a true  religion,  but,  in  many 
instances,  confirmed  them  in  their  idolatry,  and  sunk  them 
deeper  in  evil  than  they  were  before. 

In  reference  to  Eromanga,  after  remaining  some  time  on 
shore,  Captain  Cook  thought  he  saw  signs  of  intended  mis- 
chief, and  returned  to  his  boat.  On  embarking,  the  natives 
took  up  a board,  which  had  been  used  as  a “ gang-board/' 
with  evident  design  of  stealing  it,  taking  away  at  the  same 
time  two  oars  from  the  hands  of  the  crew.  On  the  cap- 
tain's presenting  a musket,  the  board  was  returned ; but  the 
natives  appeared  now  determined  to  detain  the  boat,  and 
made  an  attempt  to  haul  it  on  shore.  At  this  critical  mo- 
ment, the  captain  resolved  that  the  leader  among  them  should 
fall.  lie  pointed  his  gun,  but  it  missed  fire  ; and  instantly 
the  natives  threw  stones  and  darts,  and  seemed  prepared  to 
make  an  attack  on  the  crew.  A general  discharge  was  then 
ordered  from  the  boat’s  guns.  The  first  fire  put  the  natives 
in  confusion,  and  the  second  was  sufficient  to  drive  them 
' from  the  beach.  Four  natives  were  seen  lying  on  shore,  to 
all  appearance  dead ; and  although  two  of  them  afterwards 
crawled  to  the  bush,  yet  it  is  to  be  feared  that  more  fell  in 
the  skirmish. 

Returning  on  board,  the  captain  weighed  anchor;  but 
while  doing  so,  several  of  the  natives  were  seen  on  a low 
rocky  point  of  land,  exhibiting  the  two  oars  that  had  been 
taken  from  the  boat’s  crew.  It  was  thought  this  looked 
well ; nevertheless,  says  the  captain,  “ I was  prevailed  on  to 
fire  a four-pound  shot  at  them,  to  let  them  see  the  effect  of  our 
great  guns!”  This  fire  seems  to  have  so  frightened  the 
natives,  that  they  went  away  and  were  seen  no  more;  but 
the  two  oars  were  left  standing  against  the  bushes. 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


101 


Thus  terminated,  unhappily,  the  first  visit  of  the  white 
man  to  the  people  of  Eroinanga,  and  we  can  easily  imagine 
what  impressions  they  would  have  respecting  him  as  he  re- 
tired from  their  shores.  Blood  had  been  spilt  by  him,  life 
had  been  sacrificed ; and  for  this  the  natives,  in  their  heathen 
state,  knew  of  no  other  principles  than  those  of  revenge  and 
retaliation. 

These  principles  were  for  many  years  much  strengthened 
by  the  unwise,  and  in  some  cases  barbarous,  conduct  of  sub- 
sequent visitors;  and  while  doubtless  the  islanders  have 
more  than  repaid  themselves  by  their  untold  deeds  of  cruelty 
and  bloodshed  on  the  white  man,  yet  we  have  seen  that  we 
cannot  lay  the  entire  guilt  of  these  crimes  at  their  door. 

If  we  inquire  what  led  to  the  melancholy  catastrophe, 
the  murder  of  our  enterprising  missionary  Williams,  recorded 
in  the  following  chapter;  or  what,  since  that  sad  event, 
has,  until  within  the  last  three  years,  effectually  closed  Ero- 
manga  to  the  Christian  teacher,  we  can  only  give  a truth- 
ful reply  by  stating,  that  its  inhabitants  had  learned  by  the 
white  man’s  deeds,  to  regard  him  as  their  most  deadly  foe ; 
that  it  was  this,  and  this  alone,  which  led  them  to  form  the 
desperate  resolution  to  murder  every  white  man  that  should 
land  on  their  shores. 

Thanks  be  to  God,  that  resolution  has  now  been  overcome, 
and  we  have  a glorious  triumph  to  record  over  the  evils 
which  so  long  prevailed  there ; but  before  we  do  so,  we  have 
yet  to  mourn  over  crimes  committed  in  heathen  ignorance 
and  retaliation,  upon  the  Christian  teacher,  in  incidents 
more  immediately  connected  with  the  missionary  history  of 
the  island  of  Eromanga. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

First  efforts  to  introduce  the  gospel  to  Eromanga — Missionary  brig  Cam- 
den off  the  island,  1839 — The  Rev.  J.  Williams’s  and  Mr.  Harris’s 
landing  on  the  island — Their  death  by  the  hand  of  the  natives — - 
Unsuccessful  attempt  toobtain  their  bodies — The  service  of  H.  M.  S. 
Favourite  granted  by  Sir  G.  Gipps — Relics  of  Williams  and 
Harris  obtained — Their  interment  in  Samoa. 


The  first  efforts  made  to  introduce  the  gospel  to  the  is- 
land of  Eromanga,  issued  in  the  tragical  murder,  by  the 
natives,  of  two  missionaries,  Williams  and  Harris,  which 
about  fifteen  years  ago  filled  the  Christian  public  of  this 
country  with  so  much  lamentation  and  concern. 

The  details  of  that  dire  event  are  yet  fresh  in  the  memo- 
ries of  most  of  our  adult  readers ; but  the  completeness  of 
this  missionary  narrative  of  the  island  of  Eromanga  demands 
that  these  details  be  here  recorded,  which  we  will  do,  as 
briefly  as  possible,  hoping  thereby  to  give  information  to 
juvenile  readers,  which  will  excite  their  sympathies  towards 
a heathen  world,  and  lead  them  to  take  an  active  part  in 
those  labours,  begun  by  their  fathers,  which  have  been,  and 
continue  to  be,  blessed  for  its  education  and  regeneration. 

Amongst  the  numerous  advantages  secured  to  the  South 
Sea  mission  by  the  advocacy  of  the  Rev.  J.  Williams,  during 
(102) 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


103 


his  visit  in  England  eighteen  years  ago,  none  was  more  grati- 
fying to  his  own  heart,  or  more  important  to  the  islands, 
than  the  purchase  of  the  brig  Camden,  to  be  employed  as 
a missionary  ship. 

In  this  vessel  he  sailed  from  England  in  the  year  1838, 
and  after  visiting  most  of  the  stations  in  Eastern  and  Central 
Polynesia,  already  under  Christian  instruction,  as  a fruit 
of  his  former  labours,  Mr.  Williams  contemplated,  with  eager 
desire,  a voyage  of  missionary  enterprise  to  the  yet  heathen 
islands  of  the  New  Hebrides,  and  the  Loyalty  groups. 

Before,  however,  arrangements  were  completed  for  this 
contemplated  voyage,  the  missionary  apostle  was  joined  by 
an  intelligent,  large-hearted,  enterprising  missionary  dis- 
ciple, in  the  person  of  Mr.  Harris,  who  had  just  arrived 
from  Ireland,  and  who  wished  to  be  united  with  him  in  the 
voyage,  with  a view,  ultimately,  to  give  himself  to  the  work 
of  a Christian  teacher  on  one  of  the  islands.  Qn  his  way  to 
Samoa,  this  young  Christian  missionary  called  at  Rarotonga, 
and  it  was  cheering  to  see  his  delight  in  the  manifest  change 
which  had  come  over  the  Rarotongans,  and  to  hear  him  ex- 
press his  soul’s  desire  that  he  might  be  used  by  God  as  an 
honoured  instrument,  to  bring  about  a similar  change  in  the 
character  and  habits  of  the  people  of  Eromanga,  and  those 
of  the  adjacent  islands. 

Deeply  impressed  with  the  importance  of  this  new  mis- 
sion, and  at  the  same  time  encouraged  by  the  stimulus  of 
a sanguine  heart,  Mr.  Williams  left  Samoa  for  the  New 
Hebrides  islands  in  October,  1839. 

On  his  way  he  called  at  the  island  of  Rotuma,  more 
than  600  miles  from  Samoa,  where  it  was  reported  a native 
from  Eromanga  was  residing.  Delighted  with  the  prospect 
of  getting  the  services  of  a native  pioneer,  every  effort  was 
made  to  see  him,  but  as  soon  as  the  people  of  Rotuma  knew 
his  intention,  they  devised  means  to  frustrate  his  object. 


104 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


“This,”  writes  Mr.  Williams,  “ was  a great  disappointment; 
but,  having  made  the  effort,  we  have  done  what  we  could ;” 
and  leaving  the  island,  the  vessel  sailed  for  the  New  He- 
brides group. 

The  evening  before  reaching  these  islands,  a special  prayer 
meeting  was  held  on  board  the  ship,  and  with  a mind  as 
sensible  to  the  danger  as  his  heart  was  devoted  to  the  la- 
bours before  him,  Mr.  Williams  exclaimed,  “ Oh  ! how  much 
depends  on  to-morrow.  Will  the  savages  receive  us  or  not  ? 
I am  all  anxiety,  but  desire  to  be  prudent  and  faithful  in 
the  management  of  the  attempt.” 

The  first  island  of  the  group  sighted  was  Fotuna,  and 
after  having  a short  and  somewhat  favourable  interview 
with  some  of  its  people,  the  ship  passed  on  to  the  island  of 
Taua.  Here  Mr.  Williams  went  on  shore,  and  was  much 
pleased  with  the  frieudliness  and  peaceful  disposition  of  the 
people  ; and  much  to  his  joy  he  was  permitted  to  land  three 
excellent  Samoan  Christian  men,  as  the  first  preachers  of  the 
gospel  on  fhose  distant  heathen  shores, — an  object  for  which 
he  had  planned,  and  prayed,  and  pleaded  so  long. 

As  the  boat  was  leaving  the  island,  the  natives  followed 
it  as  far  as  possible — expressing  their  desire  that  the  mis- 
sionary would  return  to  them  within  two  or  three  months’ 
time. 

“ Thus  terminated,”  says  Mr.  Williams,  “one  of  the  most 
interesting  visits  we  have  ever  yet  been  privileged  to  have 
with  the  heathen  in  their  barbarous,  savage  state.” 

On  the  eveuing  of  that  day  the  missionary  ship  was  off 
the  island  of  Eromanga,  and  as  it  was  gliding  along  its 
shores,  Williams  might  have  been  seen,  leaning  over  its 
side,  conversing  in  glowing  terms  with  a friend,  on  the  suc- 
cessful events  of  the  past  few  days,  and  looking  forward 
with  hope  to  days  yet  to  come. 

It  was  on  the  following  morning,  the  20th  of  November, 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


105 


1839,  that  the  island  of  Eromanga  was  full  in  view;  and  as 
the  ship  sailed  in  towards  Dillon’s  Bay,  three  natives  were 
seen  in  a canoe  near  the  beach ; the  ship’s  boat  was  imme- 
diately lowered,  and  Messrs.  Williams  and  Harris,  accom- 
panied by  a passenger,  Mr.  Cunningham,  and  the  captain, 
were  rowed  towards  them.  On  the  boat’s  reaching  near  the 
natives,  the  missionaries  addressed  them  in  the  dialect  of 
the  eastern  groups,  but  could  not  make  them  understand  a 
word  ; a few  presents  were  made  to  them,  but  they  assumed 
a very  wild  appearance,  and  were  extremely  shy. 

Proceeding  further  up  the  bay,  to  a landing-place,  where 
a crowd  of  natives  were  seen  standing,  the  missionary  party 
made  signs  to  them  to  come  off  to  the  boat;  but  they  in 
return  signified  their  hostility,  and  gave  the  strangers  to 
understand  that  they  wished  them  to  depart  from  their 
land. 

Anxious,  however,  to  secure  intercourse  with  the  people, 
and  with  a view  to  gain  their  confidence,  a present  of  beads 
was  thrown  on  shore;  these  the  natives  picked  up  with 
much  eagerness,  and  came  nearer  to  the  boat,  when  other 
presents  of  beads,  and  fish-hooks,  and  a looking-glass,  were 
given  to  them. 

As  the  visitors  lay  off  in  their  boat,  they  had  a view  of  a 
beautiful  valley,  down  which  ran  a stream  of  water.  A 
boat’s  bucket  was  handed  to  one  of  the  natives  with  a re- 
quest that  he  would  get  some  water.  This  was  done  : Mr. 
Williams  drank  of  the  water,  and  having  gained  confidence 
in  the  people,  said  that  he  would  have  no  fear  in  landing, 
continuing,  as  he  looked  to  the  captain,  “ You  know  we 
like  to  take  possession  of  land,  and  if  we  only  leave  a 
a good  impression,  we  can  return,  and  locate  teachers  : we 
must  be  content  to  do  a little.  Babel  was  not  built  in  a 
day.” 

About  this  time  Mr.  Harris  jumped  on  shore,  at  which 


106 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


the  natives  immediately  retired  from  him  ; but  on  his  sitting 
down  they  returned,  bringing  him  cocoa-nuts. 


DISTANT  VIEW  OF  DILLON’S  BAT. 


Mr.  Williams  and  Mr.  Cunningham  then  landed ; the  na- 
tives, however,  refusing  to  shake  hands  with  Mr.  W.,  he 
sat  down,  and  distributed  cloth  among  them,  hoping  in  this 
way  to  gain  their  confidence.  It  was  well  known  that  they 
had  been  often  ill-treated  by  foreigners,  and  their  shyness 
and  distrust  were  attributed  to  that  cause. 

The  party  then  walked  about  a hundred  yards  inland, 
Mr.  Harris  keeping  some  distance  ahead  of  them.  While 
pursuing  their  course  by  the  side  of  the  brook,  Mr.  Wil- 
liams got  into  conversation  with  a number  of  native  lads, 
whom  he  was  teaching  to  repeat  the  names  of  the  Samoan 
numerals. 

At  this  moment  a yell  was  heard,  and  Mr.  Harris  was  seen 
to  run  out  from  between  some  bushes,  followed  by  a num- 
ber of  natives,  who  murdered  him  as  he  fell  into  the  stream 
of  water.  Mr.  Cunningham  and  Captain  Morgan  gained  the 
boat  in  safety,  but  Mr.  Williams  stumbled,  and  was  struck 
with  a club.  Rising  from  this  fall,  it  appears  he  ran  into 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


107 


the  shallow  water  on  the  beach,  hoping  to  gain  the  boat;  but 
he  was  overtaken  by  a native,  who  struck  the  fatal  blow, 
which  was  soon  after  followed  by  a shower  of  spears  and  ar- 
rows. Thus  died  the  devoted  and  enterprising  missionary 
Williams,  by  the  hands  of  the  Eromangans,  whom  he  loved 
and  sought  to  bless.  He  and  Harris,  his  youthful  compan- 
ion, fell  victims  to  their  cruelty  aud  ignorance;  and  in  their 
attempt  to  introduce  the  gospel,  were  made  to  suffer  revenge 
for  deeds  of  bloodshed  done  by  the  white  man,  who  had  pre- 
viously visited  their  shores. 

The  distressed  and  broken  hearted  Captain  Morgan,  in 
company  with  Mr.  Cunningham,  returned  to  the  ship  ; as 
the  boat  came  alongside,  orders  for  “ all  hands  to  stand  by, 
and  make  sail,.”  produced  a thrilling  sensation  in  the  hearts 
of  all  on  board  ; and  when  it  was  announced  that  Williams 
and  Harris  were  dead,  language  cannot  describe  the  intense 
grief  which  prevailed. 

Beating  up  in  the  ship  to  the  fatal  spot,  with  an  intention, 
if  by  any  possibility,  to  secure  the  bodies  from  the  cannibal 
savages,  the  body  of  Williams  was  seen  lying  on  the  beach ; 
it  had  been  dragged  up  to  the  water’s  edge,  where  a crowd 
of  heathen  boys  had  so  cruelly  beaten  it  with  stones,  that 
both  the  stream  and  the  shore  were  red  with  blood  ! 

Alas!  it  was  a distressing  moment;  many  efforts  were 
made  to  get  the  natives  to  leave  the  beach,  but  they  were 
fruitless,  for  they  came  in  larger  numbers,  and  removed  the 
body  some  distance  further  inland. 

The  missionary  vessel  immediately  proceeded  to  Sydney, 
and  Sir  George  Gipps,  having  satisfied  himself  respecting 
the  particulars  of  the  calamity,  readily  granted  the  service 
of  H.  M.  S.  Favourite,  Captain  Crocker,  to  proceed  to  Ero- 
manga,  with  a view  to  obtain  the  remains  of  the  brethren. 
On  reaching  the  island,  Captain  Crocker,  the  second  lieut- 
enant, and  Mr.  Cunningham,  put  off  from  the  ship,  in 


108 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


a boat ; but  as  they  approached  the  blood  stained-shore,  they 
heard  the  sounds  of  the  war  couch,  and  saw  the  savages 
flying  in  all  directions.  After  some  delay  and  trouble, 
communications  were  opened  with  the  people,  who  confessed 
that  they  had  devoured  the  bodies,  and  that  nothing  re- 
mained but  a few  bones.  These  were  secured,  and  brought 
to  the  island  of  Upolu,  in  the  Samoan  group,  where  they 
were  interred,  under  the  shade  of  the  mission  chapel,  amidst 
the  sorrows  and  lamentations  of  a deeply-affected  people, 
who  had  but  recently  been  blessed  with  Christian  instruc- 
tion through  the  instrumentality  of  him  who  had  fallen, 
while  attempting  to  introduce  the  same  blessing  to  the  hea- 
then land  of  Eromanga. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

Christian  forbearance  and  compassion  manifested  by  the  native  converts 
— Their  mourning  on  account  of  Williams's  death — A public  service 
held — A native  convert’s  speech  on  the  occasion — His  sympathy  and 
proposition — Second  visit  of  mission  ship  to  Eromanga,  1840 — Two 
Christian  teachers  landed  on  the  island  —Painful  incidents  of  their 
twelve  months’  residence  among  the  people — Their  providential  pre- 
servation by  the  kindness  of  a native. 

It  is  deeply  interesting  to  witness  the  first  development 
of  Christian  character,  in  the  exercise  of  sympathy,  forbear- 
ance and  love,  by  a heathen  people  recently  brought  under 
the  influences  of  the  gospel.  Such  fruits  were  seen  in  the 
conduct  of  the  natives  of  Samoa  and  Rarotonga,  while 
they  mourned  the  death  of  Williams,  and  desired  still  to 
bless  his  murderers.  In  hearts  where,  but  a few  years  be- 
fore, revenge  would  have  been  the  dominant  thought,  we 
see  Christian  compassion  reigning : “ Old  things  are  passed 
away,  behold  all  things  are  become  new.”  “ He  that 
brought  us  the  word  of  salvation  is  gone,”  said  the  converts 
in  Samoa.  “ 0 cruel  heathen ; how  great  a man  have  they 
destroyed!  but  they  knew  not  what  they  did:”  and  not  a 
few  of  them  desired  to  be  taken  to  Eromanga,  and  were  will- 
ing, at  the  risk  of  their  lives,  to  land  in  the  midst  of  its  sav- 
age inhabitants,  to  explain  to  them  the  word  of  salvation  : 
10  ( 109  ) 


no 


GEMS  FROM  TTI E CORAT,  ISLANDS. 


Ou  the  receipt  of  the  sad  tidings  at  Rarotonga,  they  were 
carried  with  amazing  rapidity  from  village  to  village,  and 
from  house  to  house.  The  utmost  confusion  and  distress 
prevailed,  mingled  with  an  evident  unbelief  in  the  truthful- 
ness of  the  report.  With  a view  to  communicate  full  and 
correct  information,  I gave  notice  to  the  people  of  the  dis- 
trict, that  a public  meeting  would  be  held  in  the  village 
chapel  in  the  evening  of  the  day.  Not  less  than  thirteen 
hundred  people  came  together,  nearly  all  of  whom  had  laid 
aside  their  usual  garments,  and,  according  to  their  ancient 
mourning  style,  came  in  rags  of  old  worn-out  native  cloth, 
and  pieces  of  ragged  old  mats,  either  loosely  thrown  over 
their  shoulders,  or  fastened  around  their  loins. 

After  singing  and  prayer,  I attempted  to  read  letters,  re- 
ceived from  Captain  Morgan,  and  from  the  missionaries  in 
Samoa,  giving  particulars  respecting  the  murder  of  Mr. 
Williams.  For  some  time,  I was  repeatedly  interrupted  by 
the  cries  and  lamentations  of  the  distressed  people.  Hav- 
ing at  length  completed  the  details,  I gave  a short  exhorta- 
tion, aud  was  followed  by  several  of  the  elder  members  of 
the  church,  who  spoke  to  the  people  in  most  touching  terms 
of  Wiliamu’s  first  visit  to  Rarotonga;  of  his  prudence  in 
not  landing  among  them  then ; of  his  subsequent  instruc- 
tions and  labours  for  their  welfare  ; and  of  their  grief  at 
his  untimely  end,  by  the  hand  of  the  heathen  : the  whole 
scene  was  deeply  impressive,  and  was  worthy  of  their 
love  to  him  to  whom  they  owed  so  much.  But  not  one 
word  of  reproach,  or  ill  will,  was  uttered  towards  his  mur- 
derers, the  heathen. 

Amongst  the  last  speakers  was  a middle  aged  man.  He 
had  been  born  a heathen,  and  had  lived  the  years  of  his 
youth,  and  early  manhood,  in  the  service  of  idolatry  and 
heathenism..  When  the  gospel  of  Jesus  was  first  preached 
in  Rarotonga,  he  was  one  of  the  most  daring  warriors  and  in- 


1ST, AND  OF  EROMANGA. 


Ill 


veterate  cannibals  of  his  tribe.  But  his  savageism  had  been 
subdued,  his  miud  enlightened,  and  his  heart  renewed;  and 
on  rising  to  address  the  congregation,  after  wiping  away  the 
tears  which  rolled  down  his  cheeks,  he  said  : — “ Brethren, 
listen  to  me  ! This  is  a day  of  sorrow, — we  have  not  known 
such  sorrow  since  the  word  of  God  was  brought  to  our  land. 
Wiliauiu,  our  father,  is  dead ; he  has  been  murdered  by  the 
savages — blind  savages ! Ah ! he  was  a warrior,  a great 
warrior  of  Jesus,  and  he  has  fallen. 

“ But,  brethren,  I have  been  thinking,  why  should  we 
weep  for  him  ? You  remember  how  we  used  to  act  in  our 
heathenism.  Our  warriors  would  leave  home,  and  wives, 
and  children,  to  fight  the  battles  of  our  chief.  To  fall  in 
battle  was  esteemed  an  honour.  It  was  desired,  and  the 
friends  of  the  fallen  rejoiced  in  it.  You  know  we  used  to 
say,  that  the  warrior  who  thus  fell  would  have  great  pos- 
sessions and  honours,  in  company  with  his  chief,  in  te  ao 
a muri  a tu,  “ the  world  beyond.”  This  thought  warms  my 
heart  now ; let  us  weep  for  ourselves ; let  us  weep  for 
Wiliamu  vaine,  Mrs.  Williams;  let  us  weep  for  the  hea- 
then, but  let  us  not  weep  for  Wiliamu.  He  has  fallen,  but 
in  his  fall  he  has  only  let  go  his  hold  of  the  weapons  of  war, 
to  ascend  to  our  great  King,  and  to  be  with  him  for  ever  in 
glory. 

“ Brethren,  wipe  away  your  tears.  This  is  my  question 
to  you,  What  about  the  work  ? Who  will  stand  where 
Wiliamu  fell  ? Who  will  go  and  complete  the  battle 
which  he  began  ? 

“ Brethren,  I have  been  remembering  the  prayer  of  Jesus 
when  he  hung  upon  the  cross,  ‘Father,  forgive  them,  they 
know  not  what  they  do  ’ Should  not  this  be  our  prayer  ? 
Now,  in  conclusion,  I look  to  the  missionary,  and  I look  to 
you,  and  I tell  you  that  the  desire  of  my  heart  is,  to  be  put 
on  board  the  next  ship  that  comes  to  our  land ; that  I be 


112 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


taken  down  to  that  dark  land  of  Eromanga,  and  be  put 
on  shore,  in  the  midst  of  the  heathen  who  murdered 
Wiliainu. 

“ I will  tell  them  what  we  once  were,  and  what  the  word 
of  God  has  now  made  us;  and,  it  may  be,  they  will  under- 
stand what  I say : but  should  I fall  by  their  hands,” — 
looking  towards  another  church  member,  he  said, — “ If  I 
fall,  you,  my  brother,  follow  me ; and  if  you  fall  let  another 
come,  and  another,  and  in  this  way  the  land  of  Eromanga, 
and  all  its  people,  shall  be  gained  for  Jesus,  and  become  as 
we  are  this  day,  through  the  preaching  of  his  word.” 

Such  was  the  spirit  of  one  of  the  redeemed  from  among 
the  tribes  of  Rarotonga,  who  would  have  regarded  it  his 
highest  honour  could  he  have  gone  to  Eromanga,  and  have 
told  its  people  what  the  word  and  the  grace  of  Jesus  had 
done  for  them.  But  this  he  was  not  permitted  to  do.  Be- 
fore Eromanga  was  “ gained  for  Jesus,”  he  had  joined  the 
number  of  the  saved  and  sanctified,  around  the  throne  of 
Jesus  in  heaven. 

On  the  arrival  of  the  Camden  in  Samoa,  in  1840,  the 
missionaries  resolved  to  adopt  measures  at  once,  to  carry  out 
what  they  knew  to  have  been  the  plans  of  Mr  Williams,  iu 
reference  to  the  New  Hebrides  islands. 

The  Rev.  Thomas  Heath  was  appointed  to  visit  Tana, 
and  to  make  other  attempts  to  land  teachers  on  Eromanga. 
Two  well-tried  and  excellent  Samoan  native  Christians  were 
appointed  to  recommence  efforts  for  that  island;  and  leaving 
home  for  this  long  voyage  and  dangerous  mission,  they  were 
followed  by  the  sympathy  and  the  prayers  of  the  native 
churches,  many  of  whose  members  would  have  gladly  given 
themselves  to  the  same  work. 

Arriving  at  the  island  of  Eromanga,  it  was  not  thought 
desirable  to  visit  Dillon’s  Bay;  accordingly  the  vessel 
sailed  rouud  to  another  district.  After  laying  off  and  on 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


113 


some  time,  a party  of  Datives  came  off  to  the  ship,  with 
whom  the  missionary  succeeded  ia  getting  a favourable 
interview. 

It  should  be  remembered,  that  in  locating  native  teachers 
ou  a heathen  island,  it  is  always  necessary  to  gain  a promise 
of  protection  for  them,  from  the  ruling  chief  of  the  place ; 
and  in  most  cases,  when  this  is  secured,  it  is  all  that  can  be 
expected  on  a first  visit.  Generally  speaking  our  confidence, 
thus  inspired,  is  not  betrayed.  In  the  present  instance  a 
chief  came  on  board,  to  whom  was  explained  the  object  in 
view  ; and  he,  with  his  people,  expressed  themselves  willing 
that  the  teachers  should  land  among  them  and  that  they 
should  be  protected  until  the  next  visit  of  the  mission  ship. 
The  opening  was  considered  favourable.  The  two  Samoan 
Christian  teachers  were  landed,  under  circumstances  which 
led  the  missionary  to  rejoice,  yet  not  without  fear,  deepened 
into  sadness,  as  he  remembered  that  twelve  months  would 
pass  away  before  the  vessel  would  return. 

On  the  next  approach  of  the  missionary  ship  to  Ero- 
manga  in  1841,  a number  of  natives  came  off  to  her,  and 
having  at  a distance  cautiously  examined  her,  hastily  re- 
turned to  the  shore.  This  conduct  was  not  at  all  calculated 
to  give  a favourable  impressiou  to  the  missionary;  but  after 
waiting  some  time  in  no  little  suspense,  the  ship’s  boat  was 
lowered,  and  the  missionary  was  rowed  towards  the  shore, 
when  anxiety  was  much  relieved  by  taking  on  board 
Lasolo,  one  of  the  teachers,  and  Nanari,  said  to  be  chief 
of  the  tribe  of  the  district.  The  other  teacher  was  on 
shore,  but  the  people  were  not  at  all  disposed  to  bring  him 
off  to  the  boat.  The  landing-place  was  up  a narrow  inlet, 
between  two  cliffs,  each  of  which  was  thickly  crowded  with 
armed  savages ; and  uuder  such  circumstances  it  was  not 
deemed  prudent  to  go  nearer  the  shore.  While  thinking 
for  a moment  what  plan  to  adopt,  a Samoan  Christian 
10  * 


114 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


native  proposed  to  land,  and  try  to  bring  off,  if  possible,  the 
missing  teacher.  This  step  involved  much  danger,  but  not 
so  much  as  if  the  missionary  had  himself  gone;  aud  as  it 
was  his  own  proposal,  and  as  the  chief  of  the  district  was  in 
the  boat,  it  was  thought  that  he  might  go  with  little  appre- 
hension of  evil. 

Lalolangi,  for  that  was  the  name  of  the  Samoan,  was  not 
long  absent,  but  returned  as  he  went : he  had  seen  the  poor 
sickly-looking  teacher  in  the  midst  of  the  armed  heathen, 
but  had  not  been  allowed  to  converse  with  him,  and  was 
given  to  understand  that  he  was  not  permitted  to  come  oif 
to  the  boat. 

Things  now  began  to  wear  a somewhat  mysterious  and 
threatening  aspect ; and  to  crown  all,  the  chief,  who  had 
been  up  to  this  time  in  the  boat,  leaped  into  the  sea,  and 
began  to  swim  towards  the  land.  As  his  escape  would 
endanger  the  life  of  the  teacher  who  was  on  shore,  it  was 
necessary  that  he  should  be  recaptured.  The  boat,  there- 
fore, pursued  him,  aud  in  great  terror  he  returned  on  board. 
Kindness  however,  soon  allayed  his  fears,  and  he  was  given 
to  understand  that  the  missionaries  had  none  other  than 
friendly  feelings  towards  him,  and  that  all  that  was  desired 
was,  that  the  teacher  on  shore  should  be  permitted  to  come 
off  to  the  ship. 

Being  thus  enlightened,  and  finding  himself  in  the  power 
of  the  strangers  he  shouted  lustily,  to  the  highest  pitch  of 
his  voice,  to  the  natives  on  shore,  to  bring  off  the  teacher. 
For  some  time  they  appeared  to  give  no  heed  to  his  com- 
mands; at  length,  however,  they  came  off,  bringing  the 
teacher  with  them,  but  would  not  allow  him  to  come  to  the 
boat ; as  it  advanced  or  receded  so  they  rowed,  always  keep- 
ing at  a vexatious  distance,  in  all  probability  fearing  lest  they 
should  be  fired  on,  as  had  been  the  case  on  other  visits  of 
foreigners. 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


115 


Just  at  tills  period,  while  the  circumstances  were  so  try- 
ing, and  so  critical,  the  teacher  tore  himself  away  from  the 
natives,  plunged  into  the  sea,  and  swam  towards  the  boat. 
Poor  fellow ! he  had  well  nigh  been  drowned ; for  some  time 
past  he  had  been  in  ill  health,  and  was  now  so  extremely 
weak,  that  the  excitement  of  the  morning  induced  delirious- 
ness, which  continued  some  time. 

Having  now  secured  their  object,  the  missionaries  wished 
the  chief  to  accompany  them  on  board  the  ship ; to  this, 
however,  he  would  not  consent,  but  having  received  a few 
presents,  he  returned  to  his  party  on  shore,  and  agaiu  Pro- 
manga was  left,  and  its  ignorant  and  barbarous  people  would 
often  ponder  over  the  mysterious  conduct  of  the  white  man 
who  came  in  the  mission  ship,  in  contrast  with  that  of  him 
who  came  in  other  vessels ; and  in  this  way  prejudices  were 
overcome,  which  have  eventually  led  to  the  happy  change 
that  now  prevails  amongst  them. 

The  two  teachers  whose  rescue  has  been  detailed  in  the 
preceding  page,  were  living  on  Eromanga  twelve  mouths ; 
they  had  gained  much  knowledge  respecting  the  character 
and  habits  of  the  peopje,  had  learned  a little  of  their  lan- 
guage, and  had  been  able,  in  a limited  circle,  to  convey  some 
idea  respecting  the  gospel  mission. 

The  inhabitants  of  Eromanga,  in  their  physical  develop- 
ment, in  their  language,  and  in  many  of  their  habits,  differ 
from  their  nearest  neighbours  in  the  same  group.  They  are 
comparatively  small  in  stature,  have  crisp,  curly  hair,  and 
many  of  them  appear  to  be  closely  allied  to  the  negro  race. 
Polygamy  is  extensively  prevalent,  the  men  rove  abroad  in 
a comparative  state  of  nudity,  the  females  are  deeply  de- 
graded, they  live  in  miserable  huts,  and  in  their  heathen 
state  the  different  tribes  were  continually  engaged  in  san- 
guinary war  with  each  other;  and  so  great  were  their  cannibal 
propensities,  that  the  practice  occurred  daily ; woe  to  their 


116 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


unfortunate  neighbours,  who  by  contrary  winds,  or  other 
causes,  landed  on  their  inhospitable  shores;  and  in  their 
feasts  for  the  chiefs  and  warriors,  a body  of  a female  usually 
formed  the  principal  part  of  the  repast ! 

Amongst  these  people  the  Christian  teachers  had  been 
most  providentially  preserved  for  twelve  months;  for  the 
chief  who  had  promised  them  protection  and  support,  had 
failed  to  fulfil  his  promise.  Finding  that  their  teaching  and 
habits  were  contrary  to  his  inclination,  he  cast  them  off  soon 
after  their  landing;  not  indeed  that  their  lives  were  at  all 
threatened  by  violence,  but  the  plan  devised  seems  to  have 
been  to  leave  them  to  die  of  starvation. 

Near  the  place  where  the  two  teachers  resided,  there 
lived  a native  of  another  island,  who  through  one  of  his 
wives  had  become  related  to  an  Eromangan  family.  This 
man  was  favourably  disposed  towards  the  teachers  and  for 
seven  months  showed  them  much  kindness,  by  providing  for 
their  wants. 

But  the  time  came  for  this  man  to  return  to  his  own 
island,  and  the  teachers  were  left  in  a state  of  perfect  destitu- 
tion. The  chief  gave  orders  that  no  one  of  his  people 
should  go  near  the  house  where  they  lived,  and  in  those 
circumstances  their  health  soon  failed,  and  they  expected 
nothing  but  a lingering  yet  certain  death. 

Before  landing,  however,  they  had  counted  the  cost,  and 
now  that  the  trial  came  upon  them,  severe  and  painful  as  it 
was,  they  were  not  only  resigned,  but  acquiesced  in  the  will 
of  their  Saviour  and  Lord,  for  whom  they  had  suffered  the 
loss  of  all  things.  Their  faith  and  patience  were  sustained 
during  the  affliction,  and  at  the  time  of  deepest  extremity, 
the  providence  of  Him  in  whom  they  trusted  appeared  for 
their  deliverance.  The  same  God,  who  in  ancient  days 
was  with  the  prophet,  who  guided  him  to  the  brook,  and 
who  commanded  the  ravens  to  feed  him,  was  the  teachers’ 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


117 


God.  In  the  day  of  their  distress,  a native,  quite  a stranger 
to  them,  had  his  heart  stirred  up  with  compassion  towards 
them,  and  day  by  day  for  the  space  of  five  months,  this 
stranger  came  secretly  to  their  hut,  and  lifting  up  the  thatch, 
gave  them  necessary  supplies  of  daily  food;  and  in  this  way, 
was  the  means  of  saving  alive  the  men  who  his  savage 
brethren  designed  should  die  of  starvation.  Under  the 
influence  of  what  motives  this  kind  heathen  man  acted,  it  is 
impossible  to  conjecture,  but  in  what  he  did  we  recognize 
the  hand  of  God. 

It  would  have  been  a gratification  to  have  rewarded  this 
man,  but  the  brethren  on  leaving  the  island  were  afraid  to 
inquire  after  him,  lest  it  should  expose  him  to  the  revenge 
of  the  inveterate  heathen  party.  Now,  that  the  gospel  is 
constantly  preached  in  Eromanga,  and  many  of  its  inhabi- 
tants have  received  it  as  their  salvation,  may  this  man, 
through  faith  in  Jesus,  obtain  the  reward  of  those  concern- 
ing whom,  with  gracious  approbation,  He  said, — “ Inas- 
much as  ye  did  it  unto  these , ye  did  it  unto  Me  ” ! 


CHAPTER  X Y I . 


First  visit  of  the  John  Williams,  1845 — Favourable  interview  with  the 
people — The  landing  of  the  Bishop  of  New  Zealand,  in  company 
with  a Rarotongan  teacher — Eromangans  taken  to  New  Zealand — 
Early  history  of  a native  youth — Ilis  desire  for  the  office  of  bell- 
ringer— His  education — His  dedication  to  missionary  work — His 
marriage — His  landing,  in  company  with  another  teacher,  on  Ero- 
manga — Hopeful  prospects  of  their  mission. 


After  the  removal  of  the  two  teachers  from  Eromanga, 
under  the  circumstances  mentioned  in  the  last  chapter,  the 
island  was  not  again  visited,  until  the  arrival,  from  England, 
of  the  new  missionary  ship,  the  John  Williams,  in  1845; 
and  although  an  entrance  was  not  then  gained  for  the  per- 
manent location  of  Christian  teachers,  yet  intercourse  was 
held  with  the  people,  alike  interesting  and  instructive. 

The  vessel  cast  anchor  in  Dillon’s  Bay,  just  opposite  the 
spot  where  Williams  had  been  murdered.  No  canoes  were 
seen,  but  four  natives  swam  off,  and  after  assuring  them- 
selves that  it  was  the  mission  ship,  they  were  induced  to 
come  on  board.  At  first  they  were  fearful  and  shy,  but 
kindness  gained  their  confidence,  and  after  a little  kindly 
conversation,  they  were  taken  on  shore  in  the  ship’s  boat. 

On  landing,  crowds  of  natives  surrounded  the  boat;  a 
(118) 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


119 


few  presents  of  fish-hooks  and  other  articles  were  distributed 
to  them,  for  which  they  brought  sandal-wood,  as  an  expres- 
sion of  their  appreciation  of  kindness  shown  them.  The 
saudal-wood  was,  however,  declined,  with  assurances  that 
the  mission  ship  had  nothing  to  do  in  its  trade.  Towards 
evening,  other  natives  came  off,  to  whom  the  same  atten- 
tion wtis  shown,  and  the  island  was  again  left,  with  satisfac- 
tion, that  this  friendly  intercourse  would  better  prepare  the 
way  among  such  a people,  on  this  occasion,  than  by  re-occu- 
pation of  the  land  by  the  settlement  of  native  teachers. 
The  John  Williams  had  now  become  a marked  vessel,  and 
the  natives  were  prepared  to  welcome  her  on  her  return. 

A favourable  impression  also  was  made  on  the  Eroman- 
gans  by  two  or  three  visits  of  the  Bishop  of  New  Zealand 
to  the  island  during  the  absence  of  our  missionary  ship. 
On  his  first  voyage  to  the  New  Hebrides,  the  bishop  called 
at  Tana,  and  after  showing  much  kindness  to  our  teachers 
there,  he  took  one  of  them  on  board  his  little  ship  to  Ero- 
manga.  Both  he  and  the  teacher  landed  on  its  blood- 
stained shores,  and  while  remembering  Williams  and  Harris, 
they  knelt  together  on  the  sands,  and  wept,  and  offered  up 
prayer  to  God,  speedily  to  open  up  a way  for  the  gospel  to 
the  benighted  people.  One  or  two  of  the  natives  were 
taken  by  the  bishop  and  Captain  Erskine  to  New  Zealand, 
where  they  were  shown  much  kindness,  and  gained  know- 
ledge respecting  the  word  of  God,  and  were  safely  returned 
home. 

In  this  way  God  was  preparing  the  people  of  Eromanga 
for  the  full  reception  of  Christian  instruction,  the  com- 
mencement and  progress  of  which  it  is  our  pleasing  duty 
now  to  relate. 

Just  about  the  time  when  Williams  fell,  there  were  two 
little  native  boys,  one  on  the  island  of  Aitutaki,  and  another 
on  the  island  of  Rarotonga,  who  in  the  days  of  their  youth 


120 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


gave  themselves  to  God,  and  who  were  raised  up  by  him 
to  be  the  honoured  instruments  to  accomplish  the  good 
work  now  going  on,  on  this  island.  The  history  of  one  of 
those  teachers,  from  his  boyhood,  has  been  listened  to  with 
deep  interest  by  many  friends  in  this  country;  and  with  a 
view  to  instruct  and  to  encourage  the  young  people  in  our 
schools  and  churches,  I have  been  requested  to  give  its 
details  here. 

In  the  year  1840,  I was  one  evening  sitting  in  my  study, 
at  uiy  station,  Arorangi,  Rarotonga,  when  a little  boy  from 
the  settlement  came  and  knocked  at  the  door.  On  being 
admitted,  I asked  him  his  errand,  and  in  reply,  he  said,  that 
he  had  been  thinking  a long  time  past,  that  he  would  like 
to  do  angaanga  no  te  are  tc  Atua,  some  work  for  the  house 
of  God.  Rather  surprised  at  such  a proposition,  I asked 
him  what  he  thought  he  could  do.  He  replied,  that  he 
would  like  to  ring  the  bell. 

Now,  in  the  islands  at  that  time  we  had  no  metal  bells, 
but  a kind  of  wooden  gong,  which  answered  the  purpose; 
a piece  of  hard  wood,  about  three  feet  long  and  eight  inches 
in  diameter,  was  hollowed  out  in  the  centre,  which  being 
struck  with  a small  single  stick  of  iron-wood,  makes  a sharp 
shrill  sound,  heard  from  a mile  and  a half  to  two  miles 
distant.  This  gong  was  used  to  announce  the  time  for 
worship  in  the  chapels,  and  also  to  gather  together  the 
children  in  the  schools,  and  it  was  to  this  that  the  lad  re- 
ferred, when  he  said,  that  he  would  like  to  do  something 
for  the  house  of  God,  and  he  thought  he  could  begin  by 
ringing  the  bell. 

A few  days  after  this  interview,  Akatangi,  for  that  was 
his  name,  was  installed  into  the  office  of  bell-ringer ; and 
as  I have  gone  to  the  services,  I have  often  been  delighted, 
to  see  him  standing  at  the  place  appointed,  beating  the 
gong  with  all  his  might;  his  little  soul  beaming  forth  from 


ISLAND  OF  F.ROMANOA. 


121 


his  jet  black  eyes,  with  evident  delight  at  thus  being  em- 
ployed in  the  service  of  God. 

About  two  years  after  this  first  interview,  I established 
a boarding  school  on  our  Mission  premises,  for  the  better 
education  of  a few  lads  of  promise  who  were  in  the  settle- 
ment school.  The  evening  after  these  lads  had  been 
selected,  Akatangi  came  to  my  house,  looking  very  sorrow- 
fully, and  on  my  inquiring  the  cause,  he  said,  “ Alas ! my 
heart  has  been  crying  all  day.”  “ And  why  so  ?”  was  my 
question ; to  which  he  answered,  “ You  were  at  the  settle- 
ment school  this  morning,  and  you  selected  Tekao  and 
Nootu,  and  others,  to  come  to  your  new  school.  All  the 
time  you  were  there  I kept  looking  at  you,  and  thought  I 
would  like  to  have  come  with  them ; but  you  said  the 
number  was  complete  for  the  present,  and  when  I heard 
that,  my  heart  began  to  cry,  and  has  been  crying  all 
day.” 

“ Are  you  then  very  desirous,”  I asked,  “ to  come  to 
this  boarding  school?”  “ My  desire,”  he  replied,  “is  very 
great.”  Knowing  his  family,  I said,  “ But  how  can  you  be 
spared  from  home — your  mother  is  dead,  you  are  the  eldest 
of  your  family,  and  are  needed  by  your  father  to  assist  in 
his  plantations — how  can  you  be  spared  by  him  to  come 
and  reside  here  ?”  To  this  he  quickly  rejoined,  saying,  “ I 
think  my  father  will  give  his  consent,  if  you  will  allow  me  to 
come.” 

After  a little  further  conversation,  I gave  him  to  under- 
stand that  I would  learn  from  his  teachers  in  the  settlement 
school  his  general  conduct  and  attainments,  and  that,  if 
their  reports  were  favourable,  his  desires  should  be  gratified. 
Thus  encouraged,  Akatangi  returned  home  that  night  with 
a much  lighter  heart  than  he  had  come  with.  Inquiries 
were  made;  his  teachers  recommended  him;  his  father 
gladly  gave  him  up,  and  before  the  end  of  the  month,  the 
11 


122 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


lad  was  a resident  in  the  boarding-school,  in  the  settlement 
of  Arorangi. 

Here  he  gave  diligent  attention  to  reading,  writing, 
arithmetic,  geography,  history,  and  other  branches  of  in- 
struction attended  to  in  the  school.  Two  or  three  hours  a 
day,  also,  were  devoted  with  much  earnestness,  with  the  rest 
of  the  lads,  to  acquiring  a knowledge  of  the  use  of  carpen- 
ter’s tools — a practice  adopted  in  the  island  boarding-schools, 
with  a view  to  train  the  scholars  to  habits  of  industry  and 
usefulness.  While  these  duties  were  attended  to,  Akatangi 
did  not  give  up  his  office  of  bell-ringer.  Every  morning 
he  was  seen  beating  the  wooden  gong,  calling  the  children 
of  the  settlement  school  to  instruction,  and  then  attending 
to  his  own.  Two  or  three  years  passed  on,  and  he  became 
known  as  a youth  who  loved  to  read  the  word  of  God,  and 
daily  observed  private  prayer. 

One  night,  when  he  was  about  fourteen  years  old — and  he 
always  came  at  night,  if  he  had  anything  to  say  about  him- 
self— he  visited  me,  and  said  that  he  had  a manga  manoko 
iti,  “ a little  thought,”  which  he  wished  me  to  know.  I in- 
quired what  it  was,  when  he  replied,  that  he  would  like  to 
become  a tangata  no  te  Atua,  “ a man  of  God.”  I assured 
him,  that  was  no  little  thought,  and  that  it  was  a great  and 
a good  desire,  and  that  it  was  the  only  object  God  had  in 
view  in  loving  us.  After  some  further  conversation,  he 
said,  “ I have  been  thinking  I would  like  soon  to  join  the 
church.”  I then  remarked,  “ that  merely  becoming  a mem- 
ber of  the  church  of  God,  would  not  make  him  a man  of 
God.”  “ No,”  he  replied,  “ I know  that ; I have  given 
myself  to  God,  and  now  desire  to  give  myself  to  his 
people.” 

Some  time  passed  away  after  this  conversation,  and 
Akatangi  continued  to  give  evidence  by  his  consistent  life 
that  he  was  a child  of  God,  and  he  was  admitted  to  com- 
munion with  the  members  of  the  church  at  Arorangi. 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


123 


Months  rolled  on,  and  his  term  of  scholarship  had  well 
nigh  expired,  when  one  night  he  came  again,  for  private 
conversation.  He  said  he  had  now  been  a long  time  under 
instruction;  he  trusted  the  advantages  he  had  received  had 
not  been  entirely  puapinga  Icore,  “ profitless ;”  he  felt 
grateful  to  God  for  those  advantages,  and  that  he  was  now 
desirous  to  give  himself  to  the  work  of  God  among  the  hea- 
then. If  I thought  him  suitably  qualified,  he  wished  to  be 
admitted  into  the  college  for  the  education  of  native  teachers 
and  pastors.  This  was  not  altogether  unexpected  by  me, 
but  it  was  the  first  time  we  had  talked  together  on  the  sub- 
ject, and  shortly  after,  Akatangi  was  transferred  from  the 
school  to  the  Institution ; and  having  passed  the  usual  pro- 
bationary term  of  six  months,  he  fully  entered  on  his  studies, 
which  he  prosecuted  with  diligence  and  success. 

Early  in  the  year  1852,  the  missionary  ship  being  ex- 
pected to  call  at  Rarotonga,  on  her  return  voyage  from 
England,  and  on  her  way  to  the  heathen  lands  westward, 
Akatangi,  with  others,  was  appointed  to  proceed  in  her  as  a 
native  missionary.  I well  remember  the  interview  I had 
with  him,  when  I communicated  to  him  our  decision.  He 
wept  tears  of  joy,  and  said,  that  it  had  long  been  his  desire 
to  be  the  first  teacher  to  some  savage,  cannibal  people,  who 
had  not  yet  heard  of  the  gospel  of  Jesus. 

About  a week  passed  away,  and  the  young  missionary 
was  again  sitting  by  my  side.  For  some  moments  he  re- 
mained silent,  as  though  musing  on  some  important  subject; 
and  it  turned  out  to  be  so,  and  as  it  will  reveal  an  amusing 
and  instructive  incident  in  native  character,  it  must  be 
recorded.  After  his  silent  musing,  he  said,  that  as  his 
station  had  been  partly  fixed  on,  and  the  vessel  was  ex- 
pected shortly,  he  had  been  thinking,  if  there  was  no  great 
difficulty  in  the  way,  he  that  would  like  to  akaipoipo  vaine , 
“ get  married.” 


124 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


This  proposition  was  a?  unlooked  for  by  me,  as  it  was  se- 
rious and  important  to  his  future  history  ; and  thinking  that 
his  station  would  be  somewhere  near  the  island  of  Aneiteuin, 
where  European  missionaries  were  already  residing,  I ex- 
pressed my  concurrence  in  his  wishes,  and  inquired  whether 
he  had  thought  of  any  suitable  individual.  “ Yes,”  be  said, 
“ I have  been  thinking  of  Maria.”  This  young  woman  was 
a daughter  of  one  of  the  first  Samoan  native  pioneer  mission- 
aries, and  had  been  educated  in  the  mission  school ; consid- 
ering she  would  make  a fit  companion,  I asked  if  he  had 
made  known  bis  desires  to  her.  With  somewhat  bashful 
countenance,  he  replied,  “ No,  I have  not  yet  spoken  to  her 
on  the  subject,  but  I have  been  looking  at  her  a long  time.” 
I rejoined,  that  in  order  to  bring  things  to  a crisis,  it  was 
now  necessary  that  something  more  should  be  done  than 
merely  looking  at  her.  He  replied,  that  he  thought  so  too; 
and,  putting  his  hand  in  his  pocket,  he  took  out  a letter, 
which  he  handed  to  me.  It  contained  the  important  ques- 
tion for  Maria’s  decision.  Feelings  of  consistent  cheerful- 
ness, mingled  with  a conscious  importance  of  the  matter, 
filled  my  mind,  as  I read  it;  and  being  assured  it  will  be 
rightly  appreciated  by  the  readers  of  this  narrative,  I will 
transcribe  a copy  : — 

“ To  Maria,  the  daughter  of 

“ I,  Akatangi,  have  been  appointed  to  go  as  a missionary 
to  the  heathen,  in  the  dark  lands  westward.  I have  been 
looking  at  you  a long  time,  and  I desire  that  you  will  go 
with  me.  If  you  love  Jesus,  if  you  love  the  heathen,  and  if 
you  love  me,  let  us  go  together.  Think  of  this,  and  let  me 
know.  Blessings  on  you  from  Jesus.  Amen. 

“ Na  Akatangi.” 

A worthy  deacon  of  the  church  conveyed  the  letter  to 
Maria,  who,  on  beiug  tuld  from  whom  it  came,  betrayed  au 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


125 


expression  of  countenance  which  showed  that  his  looking  at 
her  had  produced  no  unfavourable  impression ; and  on  read- 
ing it,  she  was  pleased  to  signify  her  willingness  to  con- 
verse with  her  parents  on  the  matter;  and,  if  their  decision 
was  favourable,  she  would  give  an  affirmative  to  the  pro- 
posal. 

The  result  was,  that  Akatangi  and  Maria  were  married  ; 
and  in  March,  1852,  the  missionary  ship  John  Williams 
reached  Rarotonga.  They  embarked,  and  sailed  to  the  hea- 
then lands  of  the  New  Hebrides,  some  2500  miles  away, 
followed  by  the  affections  and  prayers  of  the  churches  in 
their  happy  island  home  in  Rarotonga. 

After  calling  at  Samoa,  they  proceeded  to  the  island  of 
Eromanga,  and  there,  in  company  with  a companion  teacher 
from  Aitutaki,  were  landed,  under  most  favourable  circum- 
stances ; and  have  been  the  means  of  subduing  the  savageism 
of  the  people,  of  instructing  them  in  the  word  of  God,  and 
of  leading  the  very  men  who  murdered  Williams  and  Harris, 
to  the  blood  of  Jesus,  that  cleanse th  from  all  sin. 

In  the  following  chapter  will  be  stated  the  present  plea- 
sing position  of  the  inhabitants  of  this  island,  as  the  result 
of  the  labours  of  these  devoted  Christian  teachers;  but  it 
has  been  thought  well  in  this  to  detail  the  incidents  in  the 
early  history  of  one  of  them,  who,  by  the  grace  of  Jesus,  has 
been  so  highly  honoured,  and  who  is  but  a specimen  of  hun- 
dreds of  like-minded  young  native  Christian  teachers ; our 
most  active  and  efficient  assistants,  in  sustaining  and  spread- 
ing the  labours  of  the  Church  of  Christ  in  Polynesia; — men 
who  began  their  practical  Christian  life,  like  Akatangi,  by 
doing  something  for  God  ; and  in  whose  case,  that  something 
was  becoming  hell-ringer  for  the  house  of  prayer,  and  for 
the  schools,  in  the  village  where  he  lived. 


11* 


CHAPTER  XVII. 


four  natives  of  Eromanga  taken  in  mission  ship  to  Samoa — Their  edu- 
cation and  consistent  deportment — Their  return  to  Eromanga,  1852 
— Interesting  address  by  one  of  them  to  his  countrymen — Beneficial 
influence  of  their  reports— Portions  of  Scripture  and  school-books 
printed  in  the  Eromangan  language — Reinforcoment  of  the  mission, 
1853 — Pleasing  interview  with  the  murderer  of  Williams — Last 
missionary  visit,  1854 — Notices  of  the  stations  now  occupied — A 
native  teacher’s  letter — A call  for  European  missionaries. 


Towards  the  close  of  the  year  1849,  the  Rev.  A.  Mur- 
ray, of  the  Samoan  mission,  visited  the  island  of  Eromanga, 
and  succeeded  in  inducing  four  native  young  men  to  come  in 
the  missionary  ship  to  Samoa.  On  their  arrival,  they  were 
placed  in  the  institution  at  Malua,  where  for  nearly  three 
years  they  resided,  attending  to  instruction,  and  it  is  hoped 
received  the  word  of  God  as  the  salvation  of  their  souls. 
On  the  return  of  the  ship  in  1852,  these  young  Eromangans 
left  Samoa  with  ardent  desire  to  return  to  their  own  island, 
to  tell  their  countrymen  what  they  had  seen  and  learnt 
during  their  absence.  One  of  them,  Nivave,  was  in  delicate 
health,  and  died  on  the  voyage.  He  had  learnt  to  read  the 
word  of  God  in  the  Samoan  language,  was  attentive  to  all 
the  means  of  grace,  lived  consistent  in  Christian  practice, 
and,  in  the  judgment  of  his  teachers,  died,  having  a hope- 
(126) 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


127 


ful  interest  in  redemption  through  Christ.  Was  he  the  first 
fruit  of  Christian  instruction,  gathered  into  the  heavenly 
home,  from  among  his  degraded  people  ? Would  the  spirits 
of  the  martyrs  recognize  him  as  such  ; and  with  renewed 
joy  sing  the  new  song  of  thanksgiving,  and  honour,  and 
dominion,  while  they  presented  to  the  Lamb  the  fresh 
triumphs  of  his  gospel,  as  witness  of  the  continued  advance 
of  that  gospel  in  heathen  lands?  At  present  we  know  not; 
but  let  us  rejoice  in  the  fact,  that  not  a few  Eromangans 
now  give  evidence  of  a renewed  nature,  who  doubtless 
will  be  found  among  the  number  of  the  washed  and  sancti- 
fied and  glorified  in  heaven. 

The  three  surviving  young  men,  who  were  being  taken 
home  in  the  John  Williams,  were  much  attached  to  the 
teachers,  and  rejoiced  when  they  knew  it  was  intended  to 
seek  an  opening  for  Akatangi  and  Yaa  to  be  placed  on  their 
island.  Under  God,  these  instructed  young  natives  of  the 
island  were  the  means  of  gaining  for  us  this  long-cherished 
desire. 

One  of  them,  Naliel,  was  a very  interesting  character. 
He  read  fluently  and  intelligently  in  the  Samoan  New  Tes- 
tament, and  gave  evidence  that  Christian  truth  had  taken 
hold  of  his  heart.  How  gracious  and  how  wise  was  the 
Providence  which  led  him  to  Samoa ! He  was  the  first 
man  fully  to  expound  to  his  countrymen  in  their  own  lan- 
guage the  doctrines  of  the  gospel. 

On  reaching  the  island,  a number  of  natives  came  on 
board  to  welcome  their  friends;  and  after  a little  while, 
Naliel  took  his  stand  by  the  mast  of  the  ship,  in  the  midst 
of  the  rude,  naked,  heathen  savages,  and  read  to  them 
from  the  New  Testament.  The  wondering  natives  listened 
with  astonishment  to  his  account  of  Christ’s  birth  and  life 
and  death. 

Pointing  to  his  hands  and  feet  he  described  to  them  the 


128 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Saviour’s  crucifixion  ; and,  lifting  up  his  hand  to  heaven, 
spoke  of  his  resurrection  and  ascension. 


AN  EROMANGA  NATIVE  EXPOUNDING  THE  SCRIPTURES  TO  HIS 
COUNTRYMEN. 

On  the  following  morning  an  interview  was  gained  with 
Naioan  and  Raniani,  the  two  principal  chiefs,  and  every  en- 
couragement was  offered  for  the  location  of  teachers;  and, 
as  an  evidence  of  their  sincerity,  Naioan  requested  that  his 
son  should  be  taken  by  the  missionaries  to  Samoa  for  in- 
struction, and  returned  on  the  next  visit  of  the  ship.  The 
teachers  theu  landed,  and,  after  sleeping  a night  on  shore, 
returned  to  the  vessel  in  the  morning,  fully  assured  that  the 
set  time  to  favour  Eromanga  was  come. 

On  the  25th  of  May,  1852,  Akatangi  and  Yaa,  with  their 
excellent  wives,  were  landed  in  the  midst  of  a great  number 
of  natives,  who  gave  them  a most  cordial  welcome.  Thus, 
after  many  years’  visitation  under  circumstances  of  painful 
interest,  possession  was  taken  of  the  land,  and  the  hopes 
then  created  have  been  fully  realized. 

Early  in  1853,  the  teachers  wrote  a most  encouraging 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


129 


letter  to  the  missionaries,  sending  rough  translations  of 
“Scripture  Extracts”  and  first  class  school-books  in  the 
Eromangan  language,  urging  that  an  edition  of  each  should 
be  printed  off  immediately  and  sent  to  them  by  the  first  ship, 
because  of  the  desire  of  the  people  to  learn  to  read  ! 

In  the  autumn  of  the  year,  another  visit  was  made  to  this 
island,  and  it  was  refreshing  to  witness  the  kindness  of  the 
natives.  They  had  fulfilled  their  promises.  A rudely-built 
chapel  and  teachers’  dwelling-house  were  built,  and  the  mis- 
sionaries were  told  by  foreigners  who  had  been  trading  with 
the  people,  that  they  could  go  now  with  safety  to  any  part 
of  the  island,  with  the  exception  of  Cook’s  Bay,  where  the 
people  were  still  hostile. 

During  this  visitation,  Raniani,  the  chief  mentioned  in 
the  preceding  page,  was  found  to  be  the  very  man  who  mur- 
dered Williams.  In  a conver- 
sation held  with  him,  respect- 
ing the  reasons  which  led  him 
to  commit  the  violence,  he  said 
that  foreigners  had  visited  his 
laud  just  before,  and  had  mur- 
dered his  son  •,  and  he  was  re- 
solved to  be  revenged  on  the 
next  white  man  who  came  on 
shore.  He  was  now  both  sorry 
and  ashamed.  The  very  club, 
with  which  it  is  said  Mr.  Wil- 
liams was  killed,  was  given  to 
the  missionary,  from  which  the 
accompanying  sketch  has  been 
taken,  and  a pocket  handker- 
chief belonging  to  Mr.  Harris, 
and  having  his  initials,  was 
got  from  the  wife  of  Raniani. 


130 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Titus  prospered  and  encouraged,  the  missionary  deputation, 
after  reinforcing  the  mission,  by  locating  two  teachers  at  a 
new  station,  with  no  ordinary  feelings  of  gratitude  to  God, 
again  left  the  island ; and  subsequent  accounts,  given  by 
the  Rev.  C.  Hardie,  who  visited  in  the  autumn  of  last  year, 
1854,  show  that  success  is  still  crowning  the  labours  of  the 
teachers;  which  inspires  confidence  that  an  ultimate  triumph 
will  ere  long  be  gained  over  the  evils  which  have  so  long 
reigned  there. 

At  the  station  last  occupied,  Bunkil,  a village  about  six 
miles  from  Dillon’s  Bay,  the  teachers  are  kindly  treated,  and 
their  instructions  well  received.  A small  chapel  has  been 
erected,  and  about  thirty  individuals  have  renounced  hea- 
thenism, and  placed  themselves  under  Christian  instruction. 

At  Dillon’s  Bay,  the  small  house  at  first  used  as  a place 
of  worship  had  become  too  small  for  the  attendants  ; a 
bamboo  chapel,  forty  feet  long  by  twenty  feet  wide,  had 
been  built,  and  lime  had  been  burnt,  and  other  materials  had 
been  prepared  for  the  erection  of  two  commodious  mission 
houses.  Sixty-seven  persons  have  renounced  heathenism, 
and  give  daily  attention  to  learning  to  read  and  to  religious 
services. 

At  a third  settlement  in  Elizabeth’s  Bay,  the  teachers 
were  hoping  soon  to  gain  a position ; and,  upon  the  whole, 
considering  the  obstacles  which  have  had  to  be  encountered 
— in  the  difficult  language  of  the  people — in  their  wild, 
unsettled  heatheu  state — in  the  continual  jealousies  and 
strifes  occurring  among  themselves — in  the  frequent  ill- 
health  of  the  teachers,  and  in  their  early  inexperience  of  the 
manners  and  customs  of  the  people; — looking  at  all  these 
things,  and  many  others  which  have  been  against  us,  we  are 
constrained  to  exclaim,  “ What  hath  God  wrought!” 

In  closing  this  narrative,  it  will  not  be  considered  out  of 
place  to  give  an  extract  from  a letter  just  received  from 
Akatangi,  under  date  Eromanga,  March,  1854 : — 


ISLAND  OF  EROMANGA. 


131 


To  Mrsi  Gilo,  my  minister,  who  taught  me  the  word 
of  God. 

“ Blessings  on  you ! The  letter  you  wrote  me  has  come 
to  hand.  I and  my  wife  read  it  with  great  desire,  and  we 
wished  much  to  see  you;  but,  alas  ! you  are  gone  to  Bere- 
taui.  We  are  still  here,  and  are  doing  the  work  of  Jesus 
our  Master,  and  he  has  prospered  our  work.  The  chief  of 
the  tribe  with  whom  I am  living  is  the  man  who  murdered 
Wiliamu;  he  is  now  living.  He  did  not  know  that  Wiliamu 
was  a missionary.  He  is  now  full  of  distress  wheu  he  thinks 
what  he  did.  But  I am  now  teaching  him  to  read  the 
word  of  God,  and  he  is  gaining  knowledge.  My  joy  is 
great  in  God,  who  has  assisted  me  in  this  work,  and  who 
has  brought  forth  the  people  to  be  instructed.  The  work 
is  still  great : send  us  missionaries  to  do  it.  This  is  my 
request  to  you.  Blessings  ou  you.” 

This,  then,  is  the  cry,  even  from  Eromanga,  “ Come  over 
aud  help  us  !”  The  door  is  open,  wide  open ; and  a zealous, 
prudent  European  missionary  should  be  sent  out  without 
delay  to  enter  on  labours  so  inviting.  The  church  of  Christ 
has  wept,  and  prayed,  and  waited.  God  has  heard  prayer, 
and  is  now  saying,  “ Arise,  and  take  possession  of  the  land  ; 
behold ! it  is  before  you.”  By  the  assistance  of  those 
laborious  and  faithful  teachers,  whose  character  and  toils 
we  have  recorded  in  this  narrative,  a missionary  would, 
without  doubt,  soon  gain  the  whole  population  to  Christian 
instruction;  settlements  would  be  formed,  regular  habits  of 
industry  induced;  and  at  no  distant  time  an  untold  number 
of  the  once  barbarous  tribes  of  Eromanga  would  be  given  to 
him  as  his  joy  here,  and  gems  in  his  crown  of  rejoicing 
before  the  throne  of  God  and  the  Lamb. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  FOTUNA. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

Geographical  position  of  the  island — Its  discovery  by  Captain  Cook — 
Its  size,  productions,  <fcc.  Heathen  condition  of  the  people  and  the 
customs — First  missionary  visit,  1839 — Landing  of  native  teachers, 
1841 — Superstitious  notions  respecting  disease — Massacre  of  Christ- 
ian teachers  by  the  natives — The  island  visited  by  the  Bishop  of 
New  Zealand— Natives  of  Fotuna  go  to  the  island  of  Aneiteum — 
Native  converts  on  Aneiteum  become  evangelists — They  land  on 
Fotuna — Their  present  successes. 

Fotuna  is  the  easternmost  island  in  the  New  Hebrides 
group,  and  is,  geographically,  the  connecting  land  between 
eastern  and  western  Polynesia ; it  is  situated  in  lat.  20°  4' 
south,  and  Ion.  170°  2F  east,  not  a day’s  sail  from  the  island 
of  Eromanga.  and  is  about  1500  miles  from  the  coast  of 
New  South  Wales.  The  island  is  comparatively  small,  aud 
has  only  a population  of  some  1200  souls ; hut  as  a mission 
station  it  has  a history  which  demands  a record  in  this  nar- 
rative, and  which  cannot  fail  to  illustrate  the  reproductive- 
ness of  Christian  churches  raised  in  heathen  lands.  After 
briefly  detailing  the  character  of  the  people  on  this  island, 
as  they  were  first  found,  and  recording  their  cruel  murder  of 

(132) 


ISLAND  OF  FOTUNA. 


133 


the  first  Christian  teachers  landed  among  them,  it  will  be 
our  pleasing  work  to  notice  their  subsequent  subjugation 
and  education  by  native  evangelists  of  the  same  group,  who 
themselves,  ten  years  ago,  were  amongst  the  most  ignorant 
and  wretched  Polynesian  tribes. 

The  inhabitants  are  evidently  descendants  from  natives  of 
the  eastern  islands,  and  in  physical  constitution,  custom, 
and  language,  unite  the  two  distinct  races  of  eastern  and 
western  Polynesia. 

The  island  is  little  more  than  fifteen  miles  in  circumfer- 
ence, and  rises,  in  the  form  of  a large  rugged  mountain,  to 
a considerable  height,  the  table-land  of  which  is  cultivated 
and  inhabited  by  the  people.  The  only  low  land  is  on  the 
lee  side,  and  yields  an  abundance  of  yams,  banana,  sugar- 
cane, and  other  tropical  fruits.  At  some  parts  of  the  land, 
the  mountains  rise  so  perpendicularly,  that  the  natives  use 
rudely  constructed  ladders  to  reach  their  settlements. 

Fotuna  was  discovered  by  Captain  Cook,  in  1774,  and  it 
is  doubtful  whether  it  was  visited  at  all,  after  its  discovery, 
until  missionary  operations  were  commenced  on  the  group 
to  which  it  belongs.  It  was  first  visited  for  missionary  pur- 
poses in  November,  1839,  by  the  Rev.  J.  Williams,  two  days 
before  the  close  of  his  eventful  life,  who  in  his  narrative  says, 
“We  began  to  doubt  whether  or  not  the  island  was  inhabited ; 
but  on  nearing  the  coast,  we  discovered  cultivated  soil  and 
little  low  huts.  Two  canoes  came  off  to  us,  in  one  of  which 
were  four  men  ; their  faces  were  thickly  besmeared  with  a 
red  pigment,  and  a long  feather  was  stuck  in  the  hair,  at  the 
back  of  the  head  ; and  various  ornaments  of  tortoise  shell 
rings  were  suspended  from  the  lobe  of  each  ear,  and  from 
the  cartilage  of  the  nose.  We  wished  them  to  come  on 
hoard  to  us,  but  every  inducement,  by  presents  of  fish  hooks, 
scissors,  small  looking-glasses,  etc.,  was  unavailing.;  we 
therefore  lowered  a boat,  when  a man  came  on  board,  who 
12 


134 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


stated  that  he  was  a chief,  and  that  he  wished  to  be  taken 
off  to  the  vessel. 

On  reaching  the  ship,  this  native  visitor  was  clothed  in  a 
new  red  shirt,  and  had  fastened  around  his  waist  a piece  of 
print;  thus  gaily  attired,  he  strutted  about  the  deck,  shout- 
ing lustily  in  admiration  of  himself.  Sea-sickness,  however, 
soon  brought  him  low;  and  the  poor  fellow,  thinking  he  was 
going  to  die,  wished  to  be  returned  to  the  shore. 

The  ship  getting  into  smooth  water,  under  the  lee  of  the 
land,  he  soon  recovered,  and  was  found  to  be  an  intelligent, 
communicative  man ; endeavours  were  made  to  explain  to 
him  the  objects  of  missionary  visits,  and,  on  being  asked  if 
he  would  like  to  have  teachers  landed  among  his  people,  he 
replied  in  the  affirmative,  stating  also  that  he  would  be  kind 
to  them. 

Mr.  Williams  accompanied  this  man  in  the  boat  to  the 
shore;  he  was  much  pleased  with  the  great  civility  and 
comparative  simplicity  of  this  tribe,  and  regretted  being  com- 
pelled to  leave  them  without  locating  among  them  a Chris- 
tian teacher. 

Two  years  after  this  visit,  the  brig  Camden  was  again 
making  a voyage  amongst  the  islands  of  the  New  Hebrides. 
On  board  there  were  the  first  fruits  of  the  Samoan  mission, 
ready  for  transplantation  in  heathen  soil.  Samuela  and 
Abela,  two  approved  young  men,  were  landed  on  the  island 
of  Fotuna,  under  very  favourable  circumstances,  and  were 
the  first  Christian  teachers  who  resided  in  the  midst  of  its 
heathen  people.  These  excellent  men  gained  an  acquaint- 
ance with  the  language,  visited  the  various  districts,  suc- 
ceeded in  explaining  to  the  natives  the  objects  of  their  mis- 
sion, and  down  to  the  year  1844,  there  was  every  prospect 
of  a triumphant,  and  speedy  conquest  over  the  dominant 
evils  of  idolatry  and  heathenism. 

Early,  however,  in  the  year  1845,  most  of  the  islands  in 


I 


ISLAND  OF  FOTUNA.  135 

this  group  were  visited,  very  generally,  with  an  epidemic, 
which  proved  fatal  in  its  consequences  ; great  numbers  of 
the  natives  died,  and  the  people  of  Fotuna  suffered  alike 
with  their  neighbours.  As  usual  amongst  those  barbarous 
tribes,  they  attributed  this  calamity  to  the  influence  of  sa- 
cred men,  who  had  to  dq  with  the  gods ; and  the  heathen 
priests  turned  the  rage  of  the  people  against  themselves, 
upon  the  Christian  teachers.  They  were  given  out  to  be 
disease-makers,  and  it  was  decreed  that  they  should  die. 
Just  about  this  time  a party  of  natives  came  from  the  island 
of  Tana,  stating  that,  when  the  disease  was  prevailing  on 
their  land,  they  had  killed  the  missionaries  and  native 
Christians,  and  that  an  immediate  check  was  given  to  the 
sickness.  They  advised  the  people  of  Fotuna  to  adopt  the 
same  plan,  to  arrest  the  progress  of  death.  This  counsel 
was  in  perfect  accordance  with  the  desires  of  the  heathen 
party,  and  an  opportunity  was  sought  to  accomplish  their 
wicked  design. 

The  devoted  teachers  were  not  unconscious  of  their 
danger,  and  calmly  awaited  the  end  of  the  calamity.  One 
day,  after  attending  to  the  duties  of  instructing  the  few 
who  were  attached  to  them,  Samuela,  accompanied  by  his 
little  daughter,  and  Abela,  the  other  teacher,  left  their 
homes  to  work  awhile  on  their  plantation  of  food,  some 
distance  inland.  They  had  long  been  watched  by  their 
enemies,  and  now  was  the  time  to  come  to  commit  the  cruel 
deed.  They  came  upon  the  teachers  in  an  unexpected 
moment;  nerved  with  satanic  rage  equal  to  the  crime,  they 
raised  their  clubs,  struck  the  blow,  and  our  devoted 
Christian  pioneers,  with  the  little  girl,  were  all  murdered 
on  the  spot.  The  circumstances  of  the  case  are  truly 
mournful,  but  it  is  a pleasing  reflection  that  neither  of  the 
teachers  offered  any  resistance.  They  had  for  some  time 
past  lived,  not  knowing  what  an  hour  might  bring  forth; 


136 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


and  when  the  worst  came,  they  died  as  they  had  lived,  men 
of  peace.  It  would  have  been  a painful  reflection,  had  they 
died  in  fight  with  their  enemies.  This,  however,  they  did 
not,  their  enemies  themselves  being  witnesses. 

After  the  murder  of  these  two  Christian  men,  the  wife 
of  Samuela  was  the  only  one  of  the  mission-family  left  on 
the  island.  She  had  remained  at  home,  and  was  quite  ig- 
norant of  what  had  happened  to  her  husband.  She  waited 
their  return.  Alas,  for  her ! After  a long  suspense,  the 
savage  murderers  came  to  her,  and  made  known  her  dis- 
tressing situation.  But,  will  not  she  be  pitied  and  spared  ? 
Is  there  no  spark  of  humanity  left  in  the  bosoms  of  these 
deluded  beings  ? Yes ; she  may,  indeed,  be  spared.  Her 
life  is  offered  her;  but  it  is  on  conditions  from  which  she 
recoils  more  than  from  death.  The  disappointed  heathen 
cannibal,  who  expected  to  place  her  among  his  heathen 
wives,  no  sooner  knows  her  decision,  than  an  infernal  shout 
is  raised,  and  the  body  of  the  Christian  woman  is  struck 
lifeless  to  the  ground ! Thus,  the  soil  of  Fotuna,  as  well  as 
that  of  Eromanga,  was  consecrated  with  the  blood  of  the 
saints,  under  circumstances,  indeed,  most  trying  to  our 
faith  and  patience,  but  happily  resulting  in  the  growth  of 
the  Christian  church. 

Before  this  island  could  be  re-occupied,  the  Bishop  of 
New  Zealand  had  favourable  intercourse  with  the  people, 
and  as  a result  of  impressions  made  by  past  instruction  in 
favour  of  Christianity,  two  youths,  Saliva  and  Irai,  were 
given  up  by  their  friends  to  go  to  New  Zealand,  to  the 
Bishop’s  school,  to  be  educated.  These  lads  were  returned 
to  their  island  home,  in  1852,  on  which  occasion  the  Bishop 
writes  as  follows  : — 

“To  day  we  have  landed  our  two  Fotuna  scholars,  and 
left  them  in  the  hands  of  their  relatives,  with  our  prayers 
and  blessiug,  but  with  great  uncertainty  as  to  their  future 
progress,  as  there  are  no  teachers  now  on  the  island.  This 


ISLAND  OF  FOTUNA. 


137 


is  one  of  the  islands  in  which  the  London  Missionary 
Society  has  obtained  a vested  interest,  by  the  death  of  two  of 
its  teachers , who  were  hilled  by  the  natives.  We  shall  be 
thankful  to  hear  that  teachers  are  speedily  placed  upon  this 
island.” 

This  prayer  for  our  prosperity  was  heard  and  answered. 
Twelve  mouths  had  not  passed  away  after  the  above  visit, 
when  a party  of  Fotuna  natives,  hearing  that  the  word  of 
God  was  gaining  ground  on  Aneiteum,  came  to  that  island 
to  be  further  instructed ; so  that,  on  the  visit  of  our  mission 
ship,  in  1853,  to  that  island,  these  natives  had  renounced 
heathenism,  and  were  anxious  to  return  home,  and  to  be 
accompanied  by  Christian  teachers.  On  Aneiteum  there 
were  converts  from  heathenism,  who  had  been  some  time 
under  instruction,  and  who  were  ready  to  be  baptized  for 
the  slain  on  Fotuna.  Two  of  this  number  were  selected  as 
pioneers ; they  went  forth  in  simple  earnest  faith  in  Christ, 
and  their  labours  have  been  blessed  among  the  people. 
They  have  had  to  endure  hardship,  to  contend  with  opposi- 
tion, but  by  patience  and  perseverance,  they  have  gained  a 
hold  for  the  gospel  which  will  never  be  lost.  So  great  is 
the  success,  that  in  his  last  communication  to  the  mission- 
aries, one  of  the  teachers  says,  “ Things  here,  on  Fotuna, 
are  even  in  advance  of  Aneiteum ; for  here  the  hearts  of 
all  the  people  are  now  in  favour  of  the  word  of  God.” 

This  island  will  never  be  occupied  by  an  European  mis- 
sionary as  a principal  station ; yet,  as  an  out-station,  it  is  of 
deep  interest;  and  the  more  so,  as  it  has  been  gained  to  us 
by  the  labours  of  the  first  native  evangelists  of  Western 
Polynesia.  Here  we  have  the  first  fruits  resown,  and  yield- 
ing results  which  illustrate  the  inherent  self-propagating 
tendency  of  the  gospel  of  Christ,  and  which  encourage  the 
Church  to  continue  to  scatter  the  seed  of  the  kingdom, 
seeing  that  wherever  it  takes  root,  it  gives  a harvest,  in 

some  thirty,  in  some  sixty,  in  some  a hundred-fold. 

12  * 


138 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


THE  ISLAND  OE  ANEITEUM. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

Notices  of  the  New  Hebrides  group  of  islands — Summary  of  missiona- 
ry  operations  on  the  island  of  Aneiteum — Extent  of  the  island — Its 
discovery  by  Captain  Cook— Heathen  manners  and  customs  of  the 
people — First  voyage  of  missionary  ship  to  the  island — -Specimen 
of  Aneiteum  language — Favourable  advance  of  the  mission,  1845. 

Aneiteum  is  the  southernmost  island  in  the  New  He- 
brides group,  which,  besides  Fat£,  includes  Eromanga, 
Tana,  Nina,  and  Fotuna.  During  the  last  fifteen  years, 
this  group  of  islands  has  shared  in  the  benevolent  enter- 
prise of  Christian  missions,  made  by  churches  in  England, 
and  the  no  less  zealous  and  self-denying  labours  of  native 
infant  churches  of  Eastern  Polynesia.  Down  to  the  pre- 
sent date,  we  are  still  contending  with  the  enemy  in  his 
strongholds,  on  Fate  and  Tana,  and  arc  there  called  to  sus- 
tain the  contest,  by  further  labours  of  faith  and  patience; 
but  on  Fotuna  and  on  Eromanga,  the  enemy  has  failed ; 
much  of  his  power  has  been  spoiled  ; and  for  labour  and 
life  expended,  we  are  reaping  an  encouraging  amouut  of 


success. 


(139) 


140 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


On  no  island,  however,  in  this  group,  has  a greater  moral, 
social,  and  spiritual  work  been  accomplished  in  so  short  a 
time,  by  modern  Christian  missions,  than  on  the  island  of 
Aneiteum. 

In  the  year  1774,  Aneiteum  was  first  discovered.  During 
sixty-seven  years  after  its  discovery,  two  generations  of  its 
entire  population  died,  in  the  same  heathen,  degraded,  neg- 
lected condition  as  the  generations  had,  from  time  immemo- 
rial, before;  until,  in  the  year  1841,  the  first  native  Chris- 
tian teachers  were  landed  on  its  shores.  The  struggle  then 
commenced : the  kingdom  of  Satan  and  the  kingdom  of  Je- 
sus were  set  up,  and  for  six  years  the  powers  of  darkness 
embodied  in  the  idolatry  and  heathenism  of  the  natives, 
and  in  the  still  more  formidable  wickedness  of  ungodly  civil- 
ized white  men,  determinately  contested  the  right  of  domin- 
ion over  the  bodies  and  souls  of  its  deluded  tribes,  when,  in 
the  year  1847,  the  position  of  the  enemy  was  so  far  in  the 
ascendant,  as  well  nigh  led  to  the  abandonment  of  the  mis- 
sion. The  crisis,  however,  turned  in  favour  of  Christianity ; 
and  in  1848,  European  missionaries  took  up  their  perma- 
nent abode  on  the  island ; and,  now,  only  after  seven  years’ 
labour,  the  cause  of  Christ  rejoices  in  its  bloodless  and  glo- 
rious triumphs  ; and  over  the  many  village  settlements,  the 
well-attended  schools,  the  consistent  Christian  churches,  the 
translated  portions  of  the  word  of  God,  we  wave  the  ban- 
ner of  Jesus;  giving  glory  to  Him  alone,  by  whose  power 
and  grace  the  victory  has  been  gained. 

Triumphs,  alike  worthy  of  the  gospel,  and  so  encouraging 
to  the  church,  demand  a detailed  record,  which  we  purpose 
to  supply  in  the  following  narrative  of  missionary  labours. 

The  island  of  Aneiteum  is  about  forty  miles  in  circum- 
ference, and  its  mountains  rise  not  less  than  two  thousand 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  Its  large  tracts  of  high  and 
low  land ; its  level  coast  in  some  parts,  and  its  bold  shore 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


141 


in  others;  its  valleys  of  greater  or  less  extent,  and  its 
deep  ravines,  running  a long  distance  inland, — present  a 
pleasing  and  rather  imposing  variety  to  the  eye  of  the  stranger 
as  he  sails  along  the  shore.  Mauy  of  the  hills  and  moun- 
tains are  perpetually  barren,  showing  nothing  but  the 
bare  red  soil  of  which  they  are  composed;  while  others 
present  a lively  and  agreeable  appearance,  and  are  well 
cultivated.  Of  its  harbours,  Aniliquahat,  on  the  southwest 
side,  is  the  largest  and  best.  The  island  is  well  wooded, 
and  has  several  fine  streams ; one  of  which,  near  the  harbour, 
is  navigable  by  boats  some  five  miles  inland. 

The  inhabitants  of  Aneiteum  are  totally  different  from 
those  of  the  eastern  islands  : in  physical  appearance,  in  lan- 
guage, in  colour,  in  manners  and  customs,  they  are  marked 
out  as  having  sprung  from  another  race.  They  are  small 
of  stature,  very  dark  and  slender;  and  in  their  heathen  state 
were  wanting  that  spirit  and  energy,  which  characterize  many 
of  the  neighbouring  tribes,  even  of  their  own  group. 

These  people  were  found  in  a much  lower  state  of  moral 
and  social  degradation  than  any  heathens  on  the  Tahiti, 
Rarotonga,  and  Samoa  islands.  Roving  about  in  a state  of 
perfect  nudity,  they  delighted  to  paint  their  bodies  various 
colours ; as  you  approach  the  miserable-looking  beings,  you 
cannot  suppress  the  emotions  of  loathing  and  disgust  which 
involuntarily  arise  in  your  mind.  Their  naked  painted  forms ; 
their  faces  besmeared  with  a pigment  of  Jjlack  lead;  their 
eyes  bloodshot  with  heathen  excitement;  their  long  hair 
either  hanging  in  tresses  on  their  shoulders,  or  tied  up  in  a 
knot  behind  the  head ; their  hands  expert  in  deeds  of  blood- 
shed, and  even  while  you  talk  with  them,  wielding  a club, 
or  spear,  or  bow  and  arrow,  watching  an  unguarded  moment, 
by  the  blow  of  death,  to  make  your  body  and  your  property 
their  own  : such  was  the  condition  of  the  people  of  Auei- 
teum  less  than  twenty  years  ago. 


142 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Could  you  have  gone  on  shore,  you  would  have  seen  the 
whole  populatiou,  divided  into  different  clans  or  tribes, 
constantly  at  war  with  each  other;  each  tribe  living  in 
wretched  hovels,  built  of  branches  of  trees  stuck  into  the 
ground,  and  fastened  to  each  other  at  the  top,  covered  with 
leaves.  For  the  most  part,  these  huts  were  ,not  more  than 
four  feet  high  from  the  ground,  six  feet  wide,  and  varying  in 
length  to  suit  the  number  of  persons  in  a family — if,  indeed, 
such  an  assembly  of  degraded  beings  may  be  called  a family; 
a man  having  three,  five,  or  seven  wives,  and  these  his  slaves ; 
the  children  of  whom  huddled  together  in  those  wretched 
hovels,  without  any  sense  of  shame,  without  any  regard  to 
propriety;  having,  in  most  cases,  only  dried  grass  to  cover 
them;  and,  in  some  instances,  burying  their  bodies  in  the 
earth,  either  for  warmth,  or  protection  from  the  musquitoes. 
Alas!  the  wretchedness,  the  abomination  of  such  beings; 
and  such,  we  repeat,  were  the  people  of  Aneiteum  less  than 
twenty  years  ago. 

Captain  Cook,  when  he  discovered  this  people,  found  and 
left  them  in  the  above  condition ; and  such  was  their  state 
when  missionaries  first  came  in  contact  with  them.  As  in 
most  heathen  lands,  so  in  this,  the  women  were  still  more  de- 
graded than  the  men.  “We  frequently  saw,”  says  Captain 
Cook,  “ troops  of  women  passing  to  and  fro,  heavily  laden  with 
fruits,  and  roots,  and  other  things,  as  though  they  were  pack- 
horses;  with  a party  of  men,  under  arms,  as  an  escort 
to  them.  Both  men  and  women  wear  ornaments  made  of 
cocoa-nuts,  of  sea-shells,  and  of  a green-coloured  stone,  upon 
which  they  set  great  value ; and  the  women  have  a kind 
of  petticoat,  made  of  the  filaments  of  the  plantain  tree.” 
The  men  have  a most  singular  method  of  dressing  their 
hair.  It  is  separated  into  small  tresses,  each  of  which  is 
bound  round  very  neatly  with  thin,  well-prepared  fibre  of  a 
slender  plant,  down  to  within  an  inch  of  the  ends;  and  as 


ISLAND  OP  ANETTEUM. 


143 


the  hair  grows,  the  binding  is  continued,  and  each  tress  is 
somewhat  thicker  than  a common  whipcord.  Hair-dressing, 
with  them,  is  a matter  of  much  importance  : it  is  done  by 
professional  men,  and  occupies  much  time  and  attention. 
On  making  a public  renunciation  of  heathenism,  the  tressed 
work  is  cut  off,  and  the  hair  is  afterwards  allowed  to  grow 
in  its  natural  style. 


In  the  month  of  March,  1841,  the  mission  ship,  Cam- 
deu,  was  off  the  island  of  Fotuna,  among  whose  people 
Christian  teachers  were  then  landed.  On  leaving  Fotuna, 


144 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Oukeama — a man  of  some  importance  there — accompanied 
the  missionary ; and,  although  a heathen,  offered  his  influ- 
ence to  secure  the  location  of  teachers  on  Aneiteum.  The 
service  was  gladly  accepted,  and  early  the  next  morning 
the  first  interview  was  gained  with  the  people  of  this  island. 
Many  of  the  wild  heathen  inhabitants,  just  in  the  same 
condition  as  they  were  left  by  Captain  Cook,  came  on  board. 
Much  time  was  spent  in  trying  to  gain  their  confidence, 
and  to  get  them  to  understand  the  object  of  the  visit. 
Finding  himself  unsuccessful  in  these  respects,  the  mis- 
sionary, with  two  Samoan  native  teachers,  went  in  a boat 
to  the  shore.  The  teachers  landed,  and  after  some  little 
time  returned,  bringing  with  them  the  principal  man  of  the 
district.  To  him,  through  the  native  of  Fotuna,  the  mis- 
sionary explained  the  wish  he  had  to  leave  on  shore  native 
Christians  from  Samoa;  who,  he  said,  would  learn  their 
language,  and  teach  them  things  good  for  them  in  this  life, 
and  that  should  be  good  for  them  in  the  life  which  is  to 
come.  This,  at  length,  the  chief  understood ; and  then  it 
was  necessary  to  know  if  he  would  pledge  his  power  and 
influence,  at  least  to  preserve  the  teachers  from  being  mur- 
dered. To  this  he  gave  a most  unmistakable  affirmation ; 
and,  to  the  great  joy  of  the  missionary,  he  was  permitted  to 
land,  that  day,  two  well-tried  Samoan  evangelists  on  the 
island  of  Aneiteum,  to  whom  the  natives,  generally,  gave  a 
very  cordial  welcome.  It  was  an  interesting  and  cheering 
sight  to  see  crowds  of  these  rude  heathen  people  collected 
on  the  beach,  who,  waving  green  boughs  as  their  sign  of 
peace,  welcomed  the  teachers  to  their  shore.  On  the  fol- 
lowing day,  the  missionary  went  on  shore  to  see  how  the 
teachers  had  fared  during  the  night,  and  to  hear  their 
report.  He  was  glad  to  find  that  they  were  as  comfortably 
located  as  could  be  expected  among  such  a people ; and 
their  purpose  to  remain  being  mutually  agreed  on,  they 


ISLAND  UF  ANEITEUM. 


145 


were  left  to  commence  aggressions  on  the  complicated  and 
combined  influences  of  heathenism,  which  had  so  long  held 
absolute  dominion  over  the  people  of  Aneiteum. 

Having  gained  a favourable  entrance  to  the  people  of  this 
island,  the  first  arduous  duty  that  devolved  on  them,  was 
the  acquisition  of  a new  and  difficult  language ; a language 
for  which  the  people  had  no  symbol  whatever  whereby  to 
represent  its  sounds.  To  teachers,  themselves  not  ten  years 
old  in  Christian  instruction,  this  was  no  easy  work,  as  will 
be  apparent  in  the  Lord’s  Prayer,  given  in  the  Rarotongan, 
Samoan,  and  Aneiteum  languages. 

The  Lord’s  Prayer.  Rarotonga. 

“ E to  matou  Medua  i te  ao  ra,  Kia  tapu  toou  ingoa.  Kia 
hie  toou  baseleia.  Kia  akonoia  toou  anoano  i te  enua  nei, 
inei  tei  te  ao  katoa  na.  0 mai  te  kai  e tau  ia  matou  i teia- 
nei  ra.  E akakore  mai  i ta  matou  ara,  mei  ia  matou  e aka- 
kore  i ta  tei  ara  ia  matou  nei.  Auraka  e akaruke  ia  matou 
kia  timataia  mai,  e akaona  ra  ia  matou  i te  kino,  noou  oki 
te  baseleia,  e te  mana  e te  kaka  e tuatau  na  atu.  Amene.” 


The  Lord’s  Prayer.  Samoa. 

u Lo  mato  Tama  eu,  o i le  lagi,  ia  paia  lou  suafa.  Ia  oo 
mai  tou  malo.  Ia  faia  lou  finagalo  i te  lalolagi,  e pie  ona 
faia  i te  lagi.  Ia  e foai  mai  i le  aso,  a matou  mea  e’ai,  ia  tusa 
ia  i matou.  Ia  e tuu  ese  i a matou  sala,  e pie  ona  matou 
faatuagaloina  atu  i e na  agaleaga  mai  ia  te  i matou.  Oua  e 
te  tuuna  i matou  i le  faaosoosoga,  a ia  e laveai  ia  i matou  ai 
le  leaga.  Oua  e ou  le  malo,  ma  le  mana,  atoa  ma  le  viiga, 
e faavavau  lava.  Amene.” 


13 


•1.1* 4 


146 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


The  Lord’s  Prayer.  Aneiteum. 

“ Ak  Etmama  an  nohatag.  Etmu  itaup  nidam.  Etmu 
iiet  pam  nelcon  ou  niuui.  Ago  nitai  merit  ou  nium  an  no- 
bohton  et  idivaig  ou  nahatag.  Alupai  carna  an  nadiat  ineig 
nitai  eaig  incama.  I im  aru  nedo  has  au  atimi  vai  rama. 
Iim  atau  icama  au  nedo  oop,  ja  immiiatamaig  cauia  va  nijih 
itai  has  : mika  et  ou  nium  nelcon,  im  nemda,  im  nimmiia- 
lipas,  ina  iijh  inesese.  Amen.” 

In  no  case  have  teachers,  going  from  Samoa  and  Raro- 
tonga, been  able  to  speak  fluently  to  the  people  of  Western 
Polynesia  in  their  own  language  in  less  than  twelve  months, 
and  even  a longer  time  is  necessary  before  they  can  effi- 
ciently teach  and  preach  among  the  people.  Sufficient  know- 
ledge, however,  is  soon  acquired  to  make  themselves  fairly 
understood  in  expounding  the  truths  of  Christianity ; and  as 
they  are,  in  every  instance,  the  first  to  reduce  the  words  of 
the  language  to  a written  form,  they  gain  fresh  acquisitions 
in  it  by  every  attempt  they  make  to  teach  the  natives. 

Just  one  year  elapsed  before  the  missionary-ship  could 
again  visit  Aneiteum  after  the  teachers  were  landed.  At  that 
time  they  were  found  progressing  favourably ; and  on  the 
third  visit,  made  in  1845,  we  were  cheered  with  evident 
tokens  of  success.  Many  of  the  adults  and  young  people 
had  gathered  around  the  teachers,  and  were  receiving  daily 
instruction  ; a few  of  whom  had  given  up  heathen  customs, 
and  the  chiefs  had  kept  their  promise,  by  protecting  the  lives 
of  the  teachers. 


CHAPTER  XX. 

Missionary  to  Aneiteum  in  1846 — Prejudicial  reaction  of  heathenism 
against  Christianity — Abandonment  of  a station — Affecting  inter- 
view with  an  Aneiteum  chief,  on  board  the  missionary  ship — Native 
teachers  again  left  among  the  people — Visit  to  a heathen  inland 
settlement — Attempts  to  kill  the  teachers — Superstitions  of  the  na- 
tives respecting  a hurricane — Experience  of  a young  native  under 
convictions  of  truth — Encouragements. 

In  attempting  to  bring  the  inhabitants  of  Aneiteum  under 
Christian  instruction,  we  had  not  to  contend,  in  so  great  a 
degree,  with  the  evils  of  heathen  war,  and  of  cannibalism, 
as  on  other  islands  of  the  same  group  : not  indeed  that  these 
evils  were  unknown  here,  but  they  were  neither  so  frequent 
nor  so  inveterate  as  there.  From  the  landing  of  the  first 
teachers  on  the  island,  down  to  the  date  of  the  last  chapter, 
events  of  the  mission  had  progressed  slowly  but  satisfacto- 
rily. Knowing,  however,  the  character  of  heathen  opposi- 
tion, when  real  advance  is  gained  by  the  gospel,  we  were 
not  overmuch  surprised,  on  a visit  in  1846,  to  find  that  a 
reaction  had  occurred,  which  placed  o-ur  cause  in  an  un- 
favourable position. 

During  the  long  absence  of  the  mission-ship,  much  siek- 
' ness  had  prevailed  among  the  tribes;  all  the  teachers  had, 
more  or  less,  suffered, — and  some  of  their  families  had  died. 

(147) 


148 


GEMS  FROM  THE  COR  AT,  ISLANDS. 


Whilst  in  the  midst  of  this  affliction,  a party  of  refugee 
native  Christian  teachers,  driven  by  persecution  and  death 
from  the  island  of  Tana,  came  to  their  brethren  on  Anei- 
teum.  Their  defeat  on  Tana  gave  boldness  to  the  heathen 
party  on  Aneiteum,  who  availed  themselves  of  the  prevail- 
ing epidemic  to  excite  the  populace,  so  as  to  raise  a perse- 
cution, so  desperate  and  so  continued,  that  the  teachers  were 
compelled  to  retire  from  the  settlements  to  an  uninhabited 
and  barren  part  of  the  country,  and  were  given  to  under- 
stand, that  they  would  not,  under  any  pretence,  be  permitted 
to  remain  on  shore  after  the  next  visit  of  the  missionary 
vessel. 

In  this  condition  we  found  them  in  October,  1846. 
Coming  to  an  anchor  off  the  station  first  occupied,  we  had 
intercourse  with  the  people;  a few  of  whom,  we  found,  un- 
derstood and  valued  the  instruction  which  they  had  re- 
ceived, and  were  anxious  to  retain  the  teachers;  but  the 
majority  of  the  population,  with  whom  were  the  chiefs  and 
priests,  would  give  no  further  protection  to  their  lives,  and 
we  were  obliged  to  receive  them  on  board. 

Sailing  round  another  station,  on  the  south-west  of  the 
island,  where  two  teachers  had  been  statioued  last  voyage, 
we  came  to  anchor  in  a beautiful  bay.  It  was  not  thought 
well  that  we  should  go  on  shore;  we  therefore  sent  an  invi- 
tatiou  to  the  chief  of  the  district,  requesting  that  he  and 
some  of  his  people  would  come  off  to  the  ship.  On  the 
following  morning  a meeting  was  held  with  the  chief  and 
many  of  his  people  on  board  the  ship  ; squatting  themselves 
on  the  quarter-deck,  we  took  our  seats  in  the  midst  of 
them,  and  with  Petero,  and  Simiona,  and  Upokumanu, 
Samoan  and  Rarotongan  teachers,  as  our  interpreters,  we 
opened  an  important  discussion — a discussion  which  was  to 
decide  the  future  destinies  of  the  island.  Should  the 
teachers  remain,  or  must  they  leave  ? that  was  the  question 


ISLAND  OF  ANE1TEUM. 


149 


to  be  decided.  They  were  willing  to  risk  the  consequences 
of  remaining,  if  the  chief  of  this  district  would  pledge  them 
his  protection  until  we  returned  to  visit  them. 

Much  had  been  gained  for  Christianity  during  the  resi- 
dence of  the  teachers  on  shore, — in  the  knowledge  of  the 
language,  in  their  extensive  acquaintance  with  the  customs 
of  the  people,  in  the  hold  which  they  had  on  the  hearts  of 
many,  and  in  the  evidences  of  conversion  of  a few ; and  we 
felt  that  this  meeting  would  be  the  turning-point,  either  in 
favour  of  or  against  these  happy  circumstauces,  and  that  the 
abandonment  of  the  island,  at  such  a time,  could  only  be 
adopted  in  the  last  extremity.  It  was  an  anxious  hour 
with  us;  hope  and  fear  alternately  took  possession  of  our 
minds,  as  we  reviewed  with  the  people  our  past  connection 
with  them,  and  argued  on  the  probable  future  results  of  that 
connection.  Sometimes  the  chief  spoke  encouragingly 
about  re-occupation,  and  at  others,  hesitatingly;  until,  at 
length,  he  decided  the  matter  by  saying — “ Let  the  teachers 
remain ; I will  do  my  best  to  protect  their  lives,  as  long  as 
they  dwell  in  my  district;  but  if  they  rove  abroad  into 
other  tribes,  they  will  be  murdered.  But  listen  to  me,” 
continued  this  heathen  chieftain,  “ here  is  the  great  evil ; 
your  ship  goes  away,  and  moon  after  moon,  moon  after  moon 
rises  and  sinks,  but  you  do  not  return  to  us.  Other  ships” 
— sandal  wood  vessels,  he  meant — “ come  here  and  go  away, 
and  in  two  or  three  moons  come  back  again  ; but  you  go 
away,  and,”  putting  his  head  on  the  deck,  he  emphatically 
continued,  “ we  sleep,  sleep,  sleep,  but  you  do  not  come 
back  again  !” 

The  truth  of  this  statement  deeply  affected  us,  and  we 
would  that  our  Christian  friends  in  Australia,  who  are  only 
three  weeks’  sail  from  those  lands,  could  have  witnessed  this 
scene,  and  have  so  realized  the  importance  of  frequent  mis- 
sionary visitation,  as  to  have  then  adopted  measures  for  its 
13  * 


150 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


accomplishment.  But  that  was  not  the  case ; we  had  to 
explain  to  the  people  the  cause  of  the  protracted  absence  of 
the  mission-ship  from  the  island,  and  were  compelled  to  tell 
them  that  it  was  now  about  to  voyage  to  England,  and  that, 
in  all  probability,  two  years  would  pass  away  before  it  re- 
turned to  them.  This  was  a startling  statement  to  these 
degraded,  long  neglected,  yet  partly  well-disposed  savages; 
it  shook  their  confidence  in  their  power  to  protect  the 
teachers  so  long  a time,  should  the  persecution  of  the  invet- 
erate heathen  tribes  continue.  The  teachers,  however,  had 
confidence  in  God, — their  desire  was  ardent — their  purpose 
was  fixed  ; and  having  received  the  assurances  of  protec- 
tion from  this  tribe,  we  resolved  not  to  abandon  the  island. 
A few  supplies  of  clothing,  medicine,  books,  and  school 
materials,  were  got  ready ; and  commending  our  native 
brethren  and  their  mission  to  the  guidance  and  blessing 
of  Jesus,  we  landed  them  again  in  the  midst  of  the  people 
of  Aneiteum.  We  had,  indeed,  many  fears  respecting  them, 
but  were  not  entirely  without  hope  that  the  crisis  had 
turned  in  favour  of  Christianity. 

The  result  has  proved  it  was  so ; but  before  we  give  an 
account  of  the  present  changed  condition  of  the  people,  as 
contrasted  with  that  in  1846,  we  must  transcribe  a few  ex- 
tracts from  letters  and  journals  of  the  teachers,  which  will 
show  the  labour  of  faith  and  patience  through  which  the 
present  successes  have  been  gained. 

The  tribe  with  whom  the  teachers  took  up  their  abode  on 
Aneiteum,  for  the  most  part  were  kindly  disposed  towards 
them,  and  a few  attended  to  daily  instruction;  but,  under 
the  influence  of  jealousy  towards  other  tribes,  the  evil  con- 
sequences that  would  attend  missionary  tours  to  those 
tribes  were  for  some  time  exaggerated.  Knowing,  however, 
that  reports  respecting  their  teaching  had  been  taken  to 
them,  and  feeling  the  importance  of  becoming  better  known 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


151 


to  them,  the  enterprising  Christian  pioneers  resolved  to 
visit  one  of  the  nearest  villages.  In  giving  a report  of  it, 
one  of  them  says : “ I and  two  brethren  determined  to  visit 
the  heathen  inland ; the  people  of  our  tribe  said  we  should 
be  murdered,  but  we  went ; and  as  we  came  nigh  to  the 
settlement,  we  were  met  by  a company  of  heathen  war- 
riors. They  were  very  wild,  and  had  spears  and  clubs  in 
their  hands.  On  coming  up  to  us,  they  so  placed  themselves 
across  the  pathway  as  to  prevent  our  advance. 

“They  said,  that  they  had  heard  of  us;  they  well  knew 
what  we  were  trying  to  do;  they  knew  that  their  gods  were 
as  true  as  ours ; aud  that  they  were  come  out  to  kill  us. 

“ One  of  our  party,  who  well  knew  their  language,  told 
us  they  were  quite  sincere  in  their  intentions,  and  inquired 
what  we  should  do.  ‘Shall  we  fight  with  them,’  he  asked, 
‘ and  thus  try  to  defend  ourselves  V To  which  I replied, 
‘No,  friend  ; let  us  do  nothing.  Let  not  our  hands  be  upon 
them.  God  is  with  us;  let  us  trust  in  him,  and  he  will 
either  save  us  out  of  their  hands,  or  strengthen  us  to  bear 
the  trouble.’ 

“ While  we  were  thus  talking,  some  of  the  heathen  party 
ran  upon  us — five  or  six  of  them  upon  each  of  us.  Only 
one  of  our  party  made  any  resistance;  the  other  two  sat 
still  on  the  ground.  The  heathen  soon  became  afraid  ; 
they  were  as  children — yea,  like  dead  men  before  us.  Being 
thus  left  uninjured,  we  praised  God,  and  proceeded  on  our 
journey.  God’s  power  and  love  were  with  us  that  day. 
We  thought  of  his  word,  ‘ He  is  a present  help  in  trouble.’ 
He  was  our  refuge  and  shield.  He  alone  is  God  ; there  is 
none  else.” 

Pursuing  their  journey,  the  Christian  teachers  came  to 
the  heathen  tribe,  and  on  inquiry  after  the  chief  were  told 
that  he  was  a very  sacred  personage.  They  said  that  they 
had  a sacred  message  to  converse  with  him  about,  and  would 


152 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


like  to  see  him.  An  interview  was  granted,  and,  after  a few 
formalities  of  heathen  etiquette,  the  chief  inquired  from 
what  land  they  had  come.  “ We  told  him,”  continues  the 
journal,  “ that  two  of  us  were  from  Rarotonga,  and  the  other 
from  Samoa.  ‘ What  has  brought  you  to  this  land  ?’ 
asked  the  chief.  1 We  have  come  to  teach  you  and  your 
people  the  word  of  Jehovah,  the  true  God,’  was  our  reply. 
‘What  is  your  God,  and  where  is  he?’  continued  the 
heathen  chieftain,  who  held  himself  to  be  allied  to  the  gods. 
1 Our  God,’  replied  the  teacher,  ‘ is  a spirit.  He  is  every- 
where present.  The  heavens,  and  the  earth,  and  all  things, 
were  made  by  him.’  We  then  told  him  about  Jesus,  the 
Son  of  God  ; how  he  became  man,  and  died  for  us  all ; 
that  he  now  lives  in  heaven,  and  is  the  only  Saviour.” 

This  was  the  first  time  the  gospel  had  been  preached  to 
this  tribe,  and  so  great  was  the  interest  excited,  and  the 
desire  to  know  more  of  its  nature  and  requirements,  that 
the  native  evangelist  remained  some  time  among  them,  and 
at  length  returned  home,  not  only  preserved  from  heathen 
cruelty,  but  encouraged  that  good  had  been  done,  and  con- 
vinced that  a favourable  door  had  been  opened  for  the 
residence  of  a teacher,  as  soon  as  one  could  be  spared  to  go 
to  them. 

WHrile  thus  called  to  rejoice  in  the  first-fruits  of  their 
labours,  these  native  Christian  husbandmen  of  Eastern 
Polynesia  continued  to  break  up  the  fallow  ground  of 
heathenism  in  this  western  island,  and  in  season  and  out  of 
season,  to  sow  the  seed  of  the  kingdom;  more  frequently, 
however,  sustained  in  their  labours  by  the  principles  of 
Christian  faith  and  patience,  than  by  manifest  tokens  of 
success. 

A new  trial  now  broke  upon  them  in  the  desolating 
calamity  of  a fearful  hurricane.  A more  severe  storm  swept 
over  the  land  than  had  been  known  for  many  generations 


ISLAND  OF  ANF.ITEUM. 


153 


The  fruit  trees  were  destroyed ; the  plantations  in  the  val- 
leys were  deluged,  and  the  whole  land  laid  waste.  This 
storm  gave  rise  to  two  conflicting  opinious  in  the  public 
mind.  The  party  just  emerging  out  of  heathen  superstition 
believed  it  to  be  a manifestation  of  Jehovah’s  displeasure, 
and  designed  as  a punishment  from  him,  for  the  continued 
opposition  of  the  heathen.  The  heathen  party  interpreted 
it  as  an  evidence  both  of  the  power  and  the  anger  of  the 
gods  of  their  forefathers,  whose  right  of  dominion  had  been 
called  in  question  by  the  Christians.  Both  parties  appealed 
to  the  teachers  for  their  opinion.  This  they  wisely  abstained 
from  giving,  by  merely  stating  that  they  believed  the  hea- 
vens, the  earth,  and  sea,  were  under  the  control  of  Jehovah, 
but  that  they  did  not  interpret  the  storm  as  a sign  of  his 
anger.  The  heathen  party,  however,  triumphed  in  the  im- 
agined superiority  of  their  gods  to  Jehovah,  the  God  of  the 
teachers,  and  for  a time  took  advantage  of  this  trying  dis- 
pensation, to  excite  opposition  and  persecution. 

But  days  passed  on,  and  the  patient  endurance  of  the 
“servants  of  Jehovah”  continued:  a part  of  their  own 
house  was  constantly  occupied  for  daily  instruction,  both  to 
the  young  and  to  the  old ; and  on  Sabbath-day  regular  ser- 
vices were  conducted  with  them,  for  prayer  aud  praise,  and 
preaching  the  word  of  God. 

Instruction  given  on  those  occasions  was  accompanied  by 
divine  power.  Rays  of  gospel  light  entered  the  heart  of 
many  a heathen  man,  producing  fears,  and  doubts,  and  con- 
victions, which  led  to  sincere  and  anxious  inquiries  about, — 
“Who  is  God?” — “What  is  truth?”  and  “What  shall  I 
do  ?” 

One  day,  as  one  of  the  teachers  was  walking  some  little 
distance  from  the  settlement,  he  was  suddenly  surprised  by 
hearing  a sound  of  weeping,  and  language  in  the  tone  of 
distress  and  supplication.  Turning  aside  from  the  path, 


154 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


and  going  towards  the  spot  whence  the  sound  came,  he  saw, 
through  the  bushes,  a heathen  place  of  worship.  An  obla- 
tion of  food  was  lying  near  the  altar  of  sacrifice,  and  a young 
man,  kneeling  on  the  ground,  with  uplifted  eyes  towards 
heaven,  was  praying  to  his  god.  “Alas!”  exclaims  the 
teacher,  “ the  compassion  of  my  heart  was  very  great  when  I 
saw  this,  and  waiting  until  he  had  finished  his  prayers,  I 
went  to  him.  He  knew  me  as  a teacher  of  the  word  of 
Jehovah,  but  was  surprised  to  see  me  there.  I asked  him 
whom  he  had  been  worshipping.  He  said  the  name  of  his 
god  was  Natmase ; and  pointing  with  his  finger  to  heaven, 
he  said,  ‘ He  is  there.’  I then  inquired,  if  his  god  heard, 
and  was  able  to  answer  his  prayer;  to  which  he  sorrowfully 
replied,  that  he  did  not  know!” 

How  interesting  and  important  a position  for  a Christian 
teacher  to  find  a heathen  young  man  ! We  are  not  told  what 
was  the  precise  burden  which  pressed  so  heavily  on  his  heart , 
but  it  is  evident  that  he  was  in  sorrow;  he  had  been  praying 
for  relief  and  direction,  and  had  brought  in  his  hand  the 
price  of  propitiation  to  his  god.  Under  these  favourable 
circumstances,  the  teacher  “ preached  unto  him  Jesus.” 
While  the  truths  of  the  gospel  were  being  expounded,  an 
old  man,  the  keeper  of  this  heathen  temple,  joined  the  com- 
pany. What  he  then  heard  induced  him  to  come  every 
Sabbath-day,  for  the  purpose  of  receiving  instruction,  by 
which  his  mind  became  enlightened  and  his  heart  changed. 
This  man  died  believing  in  the  Lord  Jesus  as  his  Saviour; 
and  was  one  of  the  first  natives  who  was  buried  in  the  soil 
of  the  land.  It  had  been  usual,  from  time  immemorial,  for 
the  people  of  Aneiteum  to  cast  their  dead  into  the  sea. 

Reviewing  the  Christian  mission  on  Aneiteum  at  this 
point  in  its  history,  we  see  a more  favourable  position 
gained  with  less  difficulties  and  opposition  than  has  been 
known,  in  so  short  a time,  on  any  other  island  in  that 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


155 


group : and  thus  encouraged,  the  devoted  native  labourers 
write  : — “ This  work  of  God  is  a good  work.  It  causes 

happiness  to  grow  in  the  hearts  of  those  who  do  it.  The 
evil  of  Satan  is  giving  way,  and  the  gospel  is  advancing. 
Many  of  this  people  have  cast  away  their  idols,  and  pray  to 
God,  in  their  families,  at  their  meals,  and  in  private.  This 
is  the  work  of  Jesus.  It  has  prospered  : it  will  continue  to 
prosper.  Cease  not  to  pray  for  us.” 


^ CHAPTER  XXI. 

First  resident  European  missionary  on  Aneiteum — Persecution  of  heathen 
party  towards  the  Christians — Meditated  attack  on  the  life  of  the 
missionary — A native  evangelist  murdered — Unsuccessful  attempts 
to  destroy  the  mission  premises  by  fire — Intended  general  war  by 
the  heathen — -Inhuman  custom  of  strangling  widows  and  others — 
Indiscretion  of  native  converts — Further  persecutions  against  the 
Christians — A heathen  mother  resolves  to  kill  her  Christian  children. 

The  success  which  had  been  gained  on  Aneiteum,  by  the 
labours  of  the  native  teachers,  together  with  the  distance 
the  island  is  situated  from  the  eastern  groups,  rendered  it 
important  that  European  missionaries  should,  without  delay, 
occupy  it  as  a principal  station ; and  it  is  encouraging  to 
observe,  that  while  the  native  converts  of  the  south  were 
preparing  the  way,  God,  in  his  providence,  was  raising  up 
in  the  distant  northern  hemisphere,  a labourer  to  come  forth 
to  occupy  the  field. 

The  Rev.  J.  Geddie,  of  the  church  in  Nova  Scotia,  about 
this  time,  was  sent  out  as  its  missionary  to  the  heathen. 
On  leaving  his  home  he  was  led,  by  a series  of  apparently 
untoward  events,  through  America  to  the  Sandwich  Islands; 
and  thence,  under  the  same  unerring  guidance,  he  was 
brought  to  Samoa,  where  he  arrived  just  at  the  time  when 
the  people  of  Aneiteum  were  crying,  “ Come  over  and  help 
(156) 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


157 


us  and  when  the  missionaries  were  anxiously  enquiring, 
“ Lord,  whom  shall  we  send  1” 

After  remaining  six  or  eight  months  in  Samoa,  gaining  a 
knowledge  of  native  character,  and  also  an  insight  into  prac- 
tical missionary  work,  the  Rev.  J.  Geddie  proceeded  to  the 
island  of  Aneiteum,  where  he  landed  in  1848,  in  the  midst 
of  a people,  prepared  by  native  teachers  to  receive  him,  just 
seven  years  after  they  had  commenced  their  work  on  the 
island. 

Although  much  had  been  done  by  these  Christian  pio- 
neers, yet  much  remained  to  be  done  and  to  be  endured  by 
our  brother,  in  taking  up  his  permanent  residence  among 
this  people.  But  few  of  the  population  were  even  willing 
to  receive  Christian  instruction,  and  only  a small  minority 
of  those  gave  signs  that  they  were  really  changed  characters ; 
while  on  the  other  hand,  heathen  idolatry,  superstitious  jeal- 
ousy, and  savage  cruelty,  were  rampant  among  the  tribes. 

Having,  however,  counted  the  cost,  Mr.  G.  gave  himself 
to  the  work ; with  devoted  heart  and  active  hands,  he  met 
the  dangers  and  difficulties  of  the  mission ; and,  down  to 
the  present  time,  he  has,  every  year,  had  to  report  success 
and  advance.  “Not,  indeed,”  he  writes,  “ that  this  success 
has  been  gained  without  conflict  and  pain.  In  measuring 
the  strength  of  our  foes,  we  feel  that  it  is  sufficient  to  van- 
quish any  other  than  a divine  arm.  Satan’s  seat  is  here, 
and  he  will  not  yield  up  his  dominion  without  a struggle  j 
but  He  who  is  with  us  is  greater  than  he  who  is  against  us.” 
In  this  spirit  the  missionary  was  prepared  for  labour  and 
trials,  and  believed  in  ultimate  triumph  over  every  foe. 

Not  long  after  taking  up  his  abode  on  Aneiteum,  the 
struggle  with  heathen  powers  and  principalities  was  recom- 
menced with  renewed  vigour.  At  first  a violent  persecution 
set  in  against  those  who  adhered  to  the  Christian  teacher, 
which  was  urged  ou  by  the  chiefs  and  the  priests  of  the  hea- 
14 


158 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


then  party.  Finding,  however,  that  this  did  not  succeed, 
they  feigned  an  interest  in  'he  “ new  religion,”  and  by  sub- 
tlety and  deceit  sought  to  involve  the  mission  in  ruin.  The 
following  will  illustrate. 

A crafty  inland  heathen  tribe  sent  a messenger  to  the 
missionary,  iuviting  him  to  come  to  them  as  soon  as  conve- 
nient; stating  that  they  had  heard  much  about  the  “ word 
of  Jehovah,”  but  as  they  did  not  understand  it,  they  wished 
to  be  instructed.  The  sanguine  and  unsuspecting  man,  de- 
lighted with  the  prospect  of  enlightening  their  minds,  made 
preparation  to  visit  them.  The  nearest  route  to  the  station 
was  by  boat  on  the  lagoon,  inside  the  reef.  A boat’s  crew 
was  selected,  and  all  things  were  ready ; but  the  morning  fixed 
for  the  journey  was  too  stormy  to  proceed,  and  it  was  re- 
solved to  postpone  the  visit.  Some  few  days  passed  away, 
and  the  disappointed  heathen  tribe  sent  another  messenger, 
expressing  their  regret  that  the  missionary  had  not  come ; 
but  stating  that  they  were  desirous  to  barter  some  native 
productions  for  a hog,  which  they  wished  to  be  taken  inland 
to  their  village.  Terms  were  proposed  and  accepted,  and 
four  young  men  of  the  mission  station  carried  the  animal 
to  its  purchasers.  These  were  followed  by  a young  native 
Christian,  who  had  distinguished  himself  by  his  zeal  for 
Christianity,  in  attempts  to  overthrow  the  system  of  heathen 
idolatry. 

The  Christian  party  had  no  sooner  got  fairly  inside  the 
village,  before  the  savages  fell  on  them,  with  an  intent  to 
murder  them  all.  Four  of  the  number  escaped,  but  the 
other,  who  was  more  the  object  of  their  hatred,  because  the 
more  decided  Christian,  lost  his  life,  and  his  body  was  there 
and  then  cooked  and  eaten  by  the  cruel  savages.  There  can 
be  no  doubt  whatever  that,  had  the  missionary  gone  on  the 
day  intended,  he  would  have  fallen  a victim  to  their  craft; 
but,  foiled  in  their  design  in  reference  to  him,  and  fearing 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


159 


lest  their  motive  should  be  detected,  they  were  in  haste  to 
execute  their  cruel  design.  This  they  did  in  the  murder 
■of  their  Christian  countryman ; but  by  the  act  they  frus- 
trated their  own  plans,  and  taught  the  missionary  lessons  of 
caution  and  prudence,  which  prevented  the  abandonment  of 
the  mission. 

Among  other  desperate  attempts  made  by  the  heathen 
people  to  overthrow  Christianity,  was  setting  on  fire  the 
mission  premises  and  buildings  erected  by  the  Christian 
party,  for  purposes  of  worship  and  instruction.  Private  huts 
were  burnt  to  the  ground,  and  the  chapel  was  only  preserved 
by  the  vigilance  of  a nightly  watch.  An  attempt  was  made 
in  this  manner  to  destroy  the  missionary’s  house,  and  him- 
self and  family  in  it.  He  had  retired  to  rest  one  night,  but 
was  awoke  by  the  smell  and  cracking  sounds  of  burning 
wood.  Rising  in  haste  from  his  bed,  he  gave  an  alarm  to 
a few  faithful  domestics,  who,  with  himself,  were  just  in 
time  to  extinguish  the  flaming  fagot,  which,  in  a few  mo- 
ments more,  would  have  caused  their  destruction. 

About  this  time  the  irritated  heathens  waxed  more  violent 
as  their  defeats  were  frequent,  and  were  determined  to  do 
their  utmost  to  excite  the  tribes  to  a general  war.  One  night 
a sudden  and  desperate  attack  was  made  upon  a tribe  near 
the  mission  settlement,  with  whom  its  people  were  in  friendly 
alliance.  Their  aid  was  earnestly  besought  to  repel  the 
enemy;  but  with  one  voice  the  native  Christians,  knowing 
the  design  of  the  heathen,  declared  that  they  would  not  again 
interfere  in  their  neighbours’  wars,  neither  would  they,  under 
any  pretence,  fight  with  those  who  opposed  “ the  word  of 
Jehovah;”  they  would  commit  their  cause  to  him,  and  in 
quietness  and  patience  possess  their  souls.  Hostilities,  how- 
ever, were  carried  on  with  the  tribe  through  whom  it  was 
designed  to  involve  the  Christians  ; many  of  them  were 
wounded,  three  men  were  killed,  and  three  women  were 
strangled. 


160 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


The  horrid  custom  of  strangling  widows  and  others  was 
found  to  prevail  to  a great  extent  among  all  the  tribes  of 
Aneiteum,  and  had  its  origin  in  their  belief  of  a future  state, 
and  apprehensions  of  the  necessities  of  that  state.  “ Those 
who  were  wives  must  die,”  they  said,  “ when  their  husbands 
die,  in  order  to  be  with  them  in  another  world ; and  those 
who  were  servants  here  must  die  when  their  masters  die,  in 
order  to  be  their  servants  there.” 

This  unnatural  and  revolting  deed  was,  by  law,  always 
done  by  a brother  or  near  relative  of  the  devoted  victim,  and 
was  not  confined  to  widows  and  servants;  but  mothers,  on 
the  death  of  their  unmarried  sons,  would  often  demand  to 
be  strangled,  in  order  to  accompany  their  spirits  to  another 
world  ! 

The  Christian  teacher,  living  in  the  midst  of  such  a peo- 
ple, and  ever  witnessing  such  deeds  of  bloodshed,  realizes 
in  his  distressed  soul,  as  we  never  can  by  mere  description, 
how  full  of  cruelty  are  the  dark  places  of  the  earth.  With 
anxious  solicitude,  he  endeavours  to  stanch  the  cruel  evils ; 
he  does  so  with  a martyrdom  of  feeling  too  sacredly  tender 
for  description,  and  which  can  only  rise  to  practical  exertion, 
as  it  is  nerved  by  deep  Christian  principles.  During  one 
year,  at  the  time  we  are  now  reviewing,  the  missionary  on 
Aneiteum  only  succeeded  in  saving  two  women,  of  the  many 
cases  in  which  he  interposed.  On  the  death  of  a petty 
chief  near  his  district,  a young  man  and  woman  were  put 
to  death;  and  a child  of  some  rank  having  died,  two 
women  were  strangled.  Strange  infatuation  ! yet  no  less 
true  than  strange,  and  the  greatest  difficulty  to  be  en- 
countered in  attempting  to  set  aside  the  custom,  was  the 
determined  purpose  of  the  victim  about  to  be  sacrificed. 

In  prosecuting  his  arduous  and  painful  work  in  the  midst 
of  this  people,  the  missionary  was  much  encouraged  and 
assisted  by  the  converts  gained  from  among  them.  They 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


161 


were  indeed  few  at  this  period  of  the  mission ; but  they 
were  truthful,  honest,  simple,  confiding  men.  By  their  im- 
prudent zeal,  however,  they  often  occasioned  unnecessary 
trouble  to  the  teacher  of  the  gospel,  and  unwittingly  re- 
tarded his  success.  They  had  but  just  received  spiritual 
sight ; and  as  they  looked  on  the  idols,  and  temples,  and 
follies  of  their  past  life,  they  were  filled  with  indignation 
and  shame.  In  such  circumstances,  and  with  such  emotions, 
it  is  not  surprising  to  find  that  they  sometimes  acted  to- 
wards the  heathen  party  with  indiscretion  and  haste.  A 
few  instances  will  show  the  peculiar  kind  of  difficulties 
which  arose  from  this  source  to  the  Christian  teacher  in  the 
early  stage  of  the  mission  on  Aneiteum. 

In  one  of  the  sacred  groves  of  the  island  there  stood 
a public  altar  to  the  gods.  From  time  immemorial,  this 
altar  had  been  held  in  high  veneration ; and  at  the  time  of 
which  we  write,  the  heathen  visited  it  with  offerings,  and  to 
pay  their  homage.  A Christian  native,  young  in  know- 
ledge and  experience,  remembered  with  disgust  his  former 
idolatry,  and  determined  to  be  revenged  on  the  system 
which  caused  his  delusion.  Without  consultation  with  his 
friends,  he  went  to  this  grove,  broke  down  the  altar,  and 
burnt  the  wood  of  which  it  was  made,  in  the  fire  which  cooked 
his  evening  meal.  This  gave  great  offence  to  the  heathen 
party,  and  had  well  nigh  been  attended  with  serious  evil. 

Another  instance  occurred  with  the  lads  who  attended 
the  mission  school.  In  the  heathen  ignorance'bf  the  people, 
nothing  was  considered  a greater  crime  than  to  eat  the  food 
placed  on  the  altars  as  an  offering  to  the  gods ; such  sacri- 
lege was  always  followed  by  death.  But  the  boys  in  the 
school  had  scarcely  gone  beyond  the  alphabet  of  learning, 
before  they  cast  off  all  restraint  on  such  matters,  and  many 
of  the  naughty  urchins  wantonly  helped  themselves  to  the 
choicest  portions  of  the  sacred  food.  The  Christian  teacher 
14  * 


162 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


censured  this  conduct,  and  enforced  caution  and  prudence 
towards  the  heathen  and  their  practices ; but  it  was  not  iu 
their  power  always  to  restrain  the  conduct  of  those  whose 
minds  were  just  enlightened  respecting  the  absurdities  of 
idolatry. 

At  another  time,  the  missionary  was  making  some  altera- 
tion in  his  dwelling-house,  in  which  he  was  residing,  by 
native  workmen.  Not  having  sufficient  wood  to  complete 
the  work,  the  men  went  to  the  mountain  districts,  to  cut 
down  wood  for  rafters.  In  their  search  for  suitable  mate- 
rials, they  came  to  a grove,  where  it  was  supposed  the  gods 
resided,  and  where,  but  a year  or  two  before,  they  would 
not  have  ventured  to  set  a foot.  But  now,  fearless  of  the 
gods,  they  wrought  heartily  with  their  axes  on  the  trees, 
and  having  cut  down  all  they  wanted,  returned  to  their 
work  in  the  village.  The  thing  soon  got  noised  abroad,  and 
the  heathen  were  filled  with  horror  and  rage,  and  threat- 
ened to  take  away  the  lives  of  the  party  concerned. 

The  consequences  of  this  unwise  step  would  have  been 
serious,  had  not  the  missionary  gone  to  the  irritated  people, 
stating  his  sorrow  at  the  thing  that  had  been  done,  and  his 
willingness  to  make  any  reparation  they  demanded.  “ No,” 
said  the  heathen,  “we  want  no  reparation;  but  if  these 
acts  are  continued,  the  gods  will  send  sickness  and  death 
on  the  land  as  punishment.” 

These  facts  show,  that  while  the  converts,  from  principle, 
abstain  from  war  and  other  glaring  offences  against  the 
heathen,  yet  it  is  difficult  to  control  their  feeling  of  scorn 
and  ridicule  towards  their  idolatrous  and  superstitious  cere- 
monies. The  utmost  that  can  be  done  is  to  counsel  them, 
and  to  show  that  the  spirit  of  Christianity  is  incompatible 
with  that  by  which  such  deeds  are  perpetrated,  and  that  its 
advance  to  triumph  needs  not  such  aid.  This  the  converts 
soon  understand,  and  after  the  first  few  years  of  missionary 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


163 


instruction  and  example,  they  generally  exhibit  forbearance 
under  provocation,  courage  under  persecution,  and  love  to 
their  heathen  enemies. 

In  closing  this  chapter,  devoted  to  details  of  various  diffi- 
culties through  which  this  mission  had  to  pass,  before  it 
gained  its  present  triumphs,  we  will  record  a scene  which 
took  place  on  the  mission  premises  in  1851. 

A young  man  and  his  two  sisters  had  become  impressed 
with  the  folly  of  heathenism,  and  in  order  to  be  instructed 
in  the  word  of  God,  had  taken  up  their  abode  with  the 
missionary.  This  much  exasperated  their  relatives,  and 
every  inducement  was  presented  to  them  to  cause  them  to 
return  to  their  former  faith  and  practices.  Failing  of 
success,  their  mother,  an  old  heathen  lady,  came  to  the 
mission-house,  armed  with  a murderous  club,  vowing  ven- 
geance in  the  name  of  her  gods,  on  her  children,  if  they 
would  not  come  with  her,  and  attend  to  certain  ceremonies 
connected  with  a heathen  feast.  The  children,  whose 
minds  were  enlightened,  were  grieved  at  the  folly  of  their 
mother,  but  feared  not  her  rage : they  feared  God,  and 
would  not  comply  with  her  wish.  Finding  she  could  not 
succeed,  she  became  much  enraged,  and  had  not  the  mis- 
sionary interposed,  she  would  have  fulfilled  her  murderous 
intentions.  She  was  told,  that  her  children  were  free  to 
act  for  themselves ; but  as  long  as  they  decided  to  remain 
on  the  mission  premises,  they  should  be  protected.  She 
then  left  them  with  her  curse,  threatening  to  murder  them 
as  soon  as  she  found  them  alone.  Ilow  true  the  words  of 
Jesus! — '‘Think  not  that  I am  come  to  send  peace  on 
the  earth  : I come  not  to  send  peace,  but  a sword.  For  I 
am  come  to  set  a man  at  variance  against  his  father,  and 
the  daughter  against  her  mother  : but  he  who  loveth  father 
or  mother  more  than  me,  is  not  worthy  of  me;”  and,  in 
the  whole  history  of  the  church  of  Christ,  we  have  few 


161 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


brighter  examples  of  faith  and  patience  and  love,  than  we 
have  in  many  of  the  early  converts  of  these  islands,  who 
with  honest  sincerity  can  say,  “ Lo,  we  have  LEFT  ALL,  and 
follow  THEE  !” 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

Good  service  rendered  to  Aneiteura  by  the  Bishop  of  New  Zealand  in 
1852 — Advancing  state  of  the  mission — General  observance  of  the 
Sabbath-day  —Notices  of  Sabbath  and  daily  instruction — Present 
state  of  education  of  the  island — Working  of  printing-press  on  the 
island  and  results — First  copies  of  Sacred  Scripture  printed  and  cir- 
culated among  the  people — Remittance  of  money  by  the  natives  to 
the  Bible  Society — Formation  of  a Christian  church  on  the  island — 
Its  efforts  to  send  the  gospel  to  the  heathen  race  beyond  them. 

We  have  already  had  occasion  to  mention  the  zeal  and 
benevolence  of  Dr.  Selwyn,  bishop  of  New  Zealand,  in  his 
attempts  to  evangelize  the  yet  heathen  tribes  of  Western 
Polynesia.  In  addition  to  his  kindness  to  the  natives,  and 
his  assistance  and  encouragement  to  our  teachers,  the  bishop 
rendered  good  service  to  our  mission  on  Aneiteum,  in  1852, 
by  giving  a passage  on  board  his  little  schooner,  to  the  Rev. 
J.  Inglis  and  wife,  who  had  purposed  to  join  the  Rev. 
J.  Geddie  on  that  island.  This  reinforcement  was  most 
opportune,  and  has  been  attended  with  invaluable  results,  to 
a brief  detail  of  which  we  purpose  to  devote  this  chapter. 

As  our  object  is  not  to  elaborate  this  narrative,  but  to 
give  information,  consecutively  and  concisely,  respecting  the 
commencement  and  progress  of  our  mission  on  the  inland,  it 
may  be  well  to  record  its  present  prosperity,  under  the  fol- 
lowing classification  : — 


(165; 


166 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


General  observance  of  the  Lord’s- day  as  a day  of  rest, 
worship  and  instruction. — Advanced  state  of  education  in 
Sabbath  and  day-schools. — Working  and  results  of  native 
printing-press. — Formation  and  growth  of  a Christian  church 
on  the  island. — Zealous  and  self-denying  efforts  to  send 
the  word  of  God  to  the  heathen. 

In  reviewing  each  of  these  particulars,  we  have  enough  to 
cheer  the  heart,  and  to  stimulate  the  zeal  of  every  friend  of 
Christian  missions,  so  as  to  urge  to  continued  and  enlarged 
aid  in  this  cause;  and  in  the  aggregate,  we  have  an  over- 
whelming and  uncontrovertible  evidence  of  the  perfect  adap- 
tation of  the  religion  of  Jesus  to  subdue  the  ferocity,  and 
to  dignify  the  character  of  humanity,  even  in  the  worst  forms 
of  its  fallen  condition,  and  under  the  accumulated  evils  of 
its  long  neglected  wreck. 

In  noticing  the  institution  of  the  Sabbath-day  on  Aneiteum, 
it  must  be  remembered,  that  the  natives,  in  their  heathen 
state,  have  no  idea  whatever  of  a periodical  observance  of  one 
day  above  another,  as  a sacred  day  of  rest  and  worship. 
All  days  to  them  are  alike.  Whenever  a Christian  teacher 
lands  among  them,  the  institution  of  the  first  day  of  each 
week,  as  the  Lord’s-day,  takes  the  precedence  of  the  other 
ordinances  of  Christianity.  Its  uniform  and  careful  obser- 
vance by  the  teacher,  from  the  first  week  of  his  residence 
with  the  people,  is  characteristic  and  influential — a tangible 
and  unmistakable  exposition  of  Christ’s  death  and  resurrec- 
tion, practically  set  forth  before  them. 

One  of  the  first  evidences  of  the  Christian  teacher’s  suc- 
cess among  a heathen  people,  is  to  see  a few  of  their  number 
preparing  their  Sabbath-day’s  food  on  the  Saturday  even- 
ing, and  their  attendance  on  the  Lord’s-day  in  his  rude 
hut  for  the  worship  of  Jehovah,  and  to  hear  his  word  ex- 
pounded. This  simple  beginning  of  things  might  have  been 
seen,  with  more  or  less  variation,  through  the  first  few  years 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


167 


of  the  teachers’  residence  on  the  island  of  Aneiteura ; but 
in  1852,  when  we  called  there,  after  eight  years’  absence, 
how  glorious  was  the  change  in  this  respect ! Each  village 
occupied  by  the  missionaries  and  teachers  was  adorned  with 
a commodious  “house  of  prayer,”  in  which  the  people  con- 
gregated, in  still  increasing  numbers,  every  Sabbath-day,  to 
worship  God. 

At  eight  o’clock  on  the  Sabbath  morning  a public  service 
was  held,  at  which  the  people  were  orderly  and  attentive. 
Should  any  impropriety  occur,  as  was  often  the  case  in  for- 
mer years,  it  was  now  followed  by  such  marks  of  disappro- 
bation from  the  audience  as  to  need  no  remark  from  the 
teacher.  After  this  service,  the  devoted  missionary’s  wife 
gathered  together  a numerous  class  of  females  for  cateche- 
tical instruction,  while  her  husband  held  a class  for  like  pur- 
pose with  the  males.  Some  part  of  mid-day  was  spent  in 
household  prayer-meetiugs,  aud  visits  to  the  disaffected  of 
the  people.  In  the  afternoon,  another  public  service  was 
held  in  the  chapel.  After  singing,  reading  the  Scripture, 
and  prayer,  a short  sermon  was  preached  by  the  missionary, 
which  was  followed  by  a simple,  pathetic,  and  effective  ad- 
dress, by  one  of  the  natives  of  the  island.  Picture  to  your- 
self, Christian  reader,  the  scene.  How  marvellous  the 
change  ! These  poor  islanders,  whose  heathen  character  we 
have  described  in  the  previous  chapters,  are  now  so  far  ad- 
vanced as  to  meet  in  such  assemblies,  and,  with  the  entire 
confidence  of  the  missionary,  to  address  their  own  country- 
men, exposing  the  wickedness  and  folly  of  heathenism,  and 
urging  them  to  turn  unto  the  Lord,  and  to  receive  his  truth. 

The  last  missionary  visit  was  made  to  this  island,  October, 
1854,  and  so  great  was  the  advance  of  the  people,  in  refer- 
ence to  Sabbath  observance,  beyond  that  of  1852,  that  at 
one  station  the  chapel  had  become  too  small ; a new  one  had 
been  built,  70  feet  long,  35  feet  wide,  having  a congrega- 


168 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLAND 


tion  of  400  individuals  every  Lord’s-day.  At  another  sta- 
tion a chapel  is  built,  of  equal  dimensions  with  the  above, 
having  850  natives  in  constant  attendance ; and,  besides 
these,  there  are  twelve  small  village  stations,  where  the  mis- 
sionaries and  teachers  conduct  Christian  worship  every  Sab- 
bath-day, with  attentive,  well-disposed,  native  congregations. 
They  sing,  in  their  own  language,  the  words  of  the  Psalmist, 
“ This  is  the  day  which  the  Lord  hath  made:  we  will  be 
glad  in  it;”  and  surely  we,  uniting  with  them,  will  take  up 
the  joyful  exclamation,  and  say,  “ It  is  the  Lord’s  doing,  and 
is  marvellous  in  our  eyes.” 

Equal  in  importance  to  Sabbath-day  instruction,  among 
such  a people,  is  the  establishment  of  daily  schools,  aud  the 
conducting  of  them  occupies  a large  portion  of  the  time 
and  labour  of  the  Christian  teacher.  At  first  he  gets  a few 
persons  to  meet  him  in  his  hut,  or  under  the  shade  of  a tree, 
or  on  the  sea-beach,  and  there,  with  limited  means,  com- 
mences writing  single  letters  of  the  alphabet,  repeating 
their  appropriate  sounds  in  the  ears  of  his  astonished 
heathen  pupils,  and  teaching  them  how  to  unite  letter  to 
letter,  so  as  to  form  the  words  of  their  language.  Such  a 
class  has  been  the  commencing  scene  which  has  led  to  all 
the  Christian  and  general  literature  now  possessed  by  the 
numberless  islands  of  the  South  Seas.  It  was  so  on 
Aneiteum.  During  five  years  after  1841,  day  by  day,  uncer- 
tain little  groups  of  old  and  young  were  in  this  way  taught 
to  read.  At  first  the  novelty  of  the  thing  made  it  a wonder, 
and  the  new-created  interest  sustained  their  zeal ; but, 
after  a while,  only  a few  were  found  who  were  willing  to 
give  the  time,  and  trouble,  and  constancy,  needful  to  pro- 
ficiency. Consequently,  the  teacher  in  this  work  has  need 
of  large  faith  and  persevering  patience;  but  that  these  prin- 
ciples are  constantly  invigorated  from  on  high,  he  would, 
surrounded  by  such  discouraging  circumstances,  give  up  his 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


169 


labour  in  utter  despair.  But  he  does  not  yield ; day  after 
day  he  pursues  his  object,  until  at  length  he  reaps  his  re- 
ward. Such  is  the  present  joy  of  the  Christian  teacher  on 
Aneiteum.  In  1851,  while  only  a few  were  regular  in  their 
attendance,  and  could  read  well,  it  was  found,  much  to  the 
encouragement  of  the  instructors,  that  many  of  the  heathen, 
who  had  never  attended  the  schools,  had  some  knowledge  of 
letters  and  words.  The  little  leaven  of  knowledge  gained 
by  the  few  had  spread  abroad,  and  was  leavening  the  mass. 
From  this  time  a more  lively  and  steady  interest  was  mani- 
fested in  the  school,  and  books  began  to  be  valued  as  the  best 
property  of  the  people.  One  poor  family  had  their  house 
destroyed  by  tire,  but  nothing  distressed  them  so  much  as  the 
loss  of  their  books,  which  had  been  consumed  in  the  flames. 

Nothing  can  be  more  encouraging  than  the  fact,  that  at 
this  time  there  are  more  than  twenty  small  village-schools  on 
the  island,  numbering  more  than  fifteen  hundred  natives, 
who  are  receiving  daily  instruction,  one  third  of  whom  can 
read  well,  and  many  of  whom  are  making  good  progress  in 
writing.  Besides  these  schools  for  elementary  instruction, 
each  missionary  has  a select  Bible-class  of  thirty  to  forty 
young  men,  who,  twice  or  thrice  a week,  receive  information 
which  they  intelligently  understand  and  value,  and  by  which 
they  are  being  prepared  to  become  invaluable  assistants  in 
the  further  advancement  of  the  mission.  Truly  these  dark 
places  of  the  earth  are  enlightened ; many  are  running  to 
and  fro ; knowledge  is  being  increased ; and  while  we  praise 
God  for  the  present  advanced  position  gained,  let  us  remem- 
ber, that  it  is  only  by  these  means  that  the  whole  world  is  to 
be  educated,  regenerated,  and  saved. 

To  sustain  and  to  extend  these  educational  efforts  on  the 
island  of  Aneiteum,  it  was  the  happiness  of  the  missionary  to 
take  with  him  a printing-press  and  a font  of  type  ; and  by 
diligent  application  and  perseverance,  he  soon  acquired  suffi- 
15 


170 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


cient  practical  knowledge  of  the  art  as  to  print  books  in  the 
language  of  the  people. 

It  was,  indeed,  cheering,  on  our  visit  in  1852  to  the  island, 
to  see  three  neat  lime  buildings  erected  in  the  midst  of  the 
harbour  settlement;  one  a chapel,  another  the  missionary- 
house,  and  the  other  a printing-office,  built  by  the  very  men 
who,  six  years  before,  were  wild,  naked  heathens,  some  of 
whom  are  now  assisting  the  missionary  in  the  composition 
and  press-work  of  books  in  their  own  language.  That  year 
two  thousand  elementary  school-books  were  printed,  and 
circulated  among  the  people,  also  one  thousand  copies  of 
Scripture  catechism  ; and,  while  we  were  there,  manuscript 
books,  in  the  language  of  Eromanga,  were  sent  over  by  the 
teachers  of  that  island,  to  be  printed  off  “ without  delay," 
and  to  be  “ forwarded  by  the  first  ship,  as  the  Eromangans 
were  in  a hurry  to  learn  to  read.”  So  that  the  inhabitants 
of  Aneiteum,  after  only  four  years1  residence  of  the  mis- 
sionary among  them,  had  had  their  own  language  reduced 
to  a written  form,  were  working  off  books  at  the  printing- 
press  for  their  own  use,  and  were  aiding  to  prepare  a supply 
of  books  for  their  heathen  neighbours,  on  islands  beyond 
them  ! 

The  Aneiteum  press,  however,  being  but  small,  and  hav- 
ing but  a limited  supply  of  paper,  it  was  thought  well  to 
send  a manuscript  translation  of  the  Gospel  of  Mark  to 
Sydney,  to  be  printed.  This  was  done,  and  in  1853  three 
thousand  copies  of  that  book  were  taken  to  the  island. 

In  reporting  this  pleasing  circumstance  to  the  British  and 
Foreign  Bible  Society  this  year,  the  missionary  says  : — “ You 
will  doubtless  rejoice  to  learn  that  the  Bible  is  now  open  to 
another  tribe  of  the  human  family ; that  another  radically 
distinct  language  is  added  to  the  many  in  which  the  word 
of  God  is  now  printed.” 

“ Twelve  copies  of  the  Gospel  of  Mark  have  been  for- 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


171 


warded  to  the  Committee  of  the  Bible  Society,  with  a state- 
ment that  the  expense  of  printing  it  in  Sydney  had  been 
£02.  This  expense  has  been  generously  met  by  that  noble 
Institution  ; a large  grant  of  paper  has  also  been  made  to 
the  mission  ; and,  by  way  of  reward  and  encouragement, 
the  people  have  shown  their  appreciation  of  this  boon,  by 
already  sending  a remittance  to  the  funds  of  the  Society, 
amounting  to  seven  pounds  six  shillings.” 

These  facts  speak  for  themselves,  and,  without  lengthening 
this  narrative  with  any  reflections  on  them,  we  pass  on  to 
notice  the  formation  of  a Christian  church  on  the  island. 

Among  the  sacred  duties  that  devolve  on  the  missionary 
in  a heathen  land,  none  is  more  important  than  the  uniting 
of  converts  into  church-fellowship ; yefe,  in  this  matter,  it 
is  found  expedient  not  to  be  in  haste.  The  observance  of 
ordinances  is  felt  to  be  secondary  to  the  evidence  of  faith 
and  regeneration.  Not  a few  converts  from  among  the  in- 
habitants of  Aneiteum  died  during  the  first  ten  years  of 
missionary  labour  there,  whose  sins  were  pardoned,  and 
whose  spirits  were  saved,  but  who  were  never  united  in  the 
visible  communion  of  church-fellowship. 

The  missionary-ship,  the  John  Williams,  made  her  fourth 
voyage  to  the  island  in  May,  1852  ; on  which  occasion,  it 
was  thought  that  the  knowledge  and  experience  of  the  con- 
verts were  so  far  advanced,  as  to  make  further  delay  in 
organizing  a church  undesirable.  After  preliminary  meet- 
ings with  the  candidates  for  communion,  a public  Sabbath- 
day  morning  service  was  held ; the  past  history  of  the  mis- 
sion was  reviewed  ; praises  to  Almighty  God  for  his  grace 
bestowed  were  offered  ; the  nature  and  requirements  of  a 
Christian  church  were  explained;  and,  at  the  close  of  the 
service,  thirteen  well-known  and  long-tried  natives  were 
baptized,  who,  in  the  afternoon  of  the  same  day,  united  with 
the  missionaries  and  teachers  in  commemorating  the  death 


172 


V 

GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 

of  Jesus,  and  publicly  testifying  themselves  to  be  his 
disciples.  Two  years  after,  which  brings  our  date  to  1854, 
the  church  of  Christ  on  Aneiteum  numbered  fifty  members, 
who,  since  then,  have  been  encouraged  and  strengthened  by 
an  addition  of  twenty  others,  all  of  whom  are  the  reward 
and  joy  of  the  devoted  men  who  have  been  the  honoured 
instruments  of  their  salvation. 

This  was  a new  and  glorious  era  in  the  history  of  this 
division  of  the  great  Polynesian  family,  and  cannot  fail  to 
be  regarded  with  deep  interest  by  the  friends  of  Christian 
missions.  Lift  up  thine  eyes,  0 church  of  the  living  Cod, 
and  see  ! all  these  gather  themselves  together ; they  come 
to  thee,  and  the  abundance  of  the  sea  is  thine. 

Having  seen  the  triumphs  wrought  by  the  gospel  in  the 
salvation  of  these  once-barbarous  people,  it  is  gratifying 
to  witness  the  zealous  and  self-denying  efforts  they  are  now 
making  to  send  that  gospel  to  the  heathen  beyond  them. 
Besides  a goodly  number  of  instructed,  consistent  Christian 
young  people,  who  are  daily  assisting  in  the  schools,  there 
are  many  evangelists  who  preach  in  the  villages  every  Lord’s- 
day.  Some  of  these  excellent  men  have  been  appointed  as 
native  missionaries  to  the  island  of  Fotuna,  and  are  there 
labouring  with  much  success  ; and  last  year,  a united  service 
was  held  by  the  members  of  the  different  village  congrega- 
tions, for  the  purpose  of  setting  apart  two  of  their  number 
to  go,  with  their  wives,  to  the  still  heathen  land  of  Tana. 
It  was  a solemn  occasion.  Six  hundred  devout  persons 
came  to  the  service.  Appropriate  addresses  were  given  by 
several  of  the  natives  to  their  brethren,  that  manifested  a 
degree  of  Scriptural  knowledge,  happily  illustrated  and 
wisely  applied,  which  astonished  and  delighted  the  mis- 
sionaries present.  How  rich  the  reward  here  received  for 
past  labours ! The  few  on  the  island  who  yet  remain 
attached  to  heathen  practices  are  scattered  and  disunited  ; 


ISLAND  OF  ANEITEUM. 


173 


idol  gods  are  cast  away;  war,  cannibalism,  and  heathen 
orgies,  are  reckoned  among  the  things  that  are  past;  and 
Christianity  is  glorious  and  triumphant.  Taking  our  stand- 
point on  the  shores  of  Aneiteum,  reviewing  its  past  history 
and  its  present  position,  we  exclaim,  “ Surely  there  is  no 
enchantment  against  Jacob,  neither  is  there  any  divination 
against  Israel  : according  to  this  time  it  shall  be  said  of 
Jacob  and  of  Israel,  What  hath  God  wrought  l” 

lb* 


174 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS, 


THE  ISLAND  OF  LIFU. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

Lifu,  an  island  of  the  Loyalty  group — Disgraceful  conduct  of  a young 
Englishman,  who  took  up  his  abode  with  the  people — Encouraging 
contrast  in  the  early  life  and  Christian  character  of  the  first  native 
teacher  to  the  island — Painful  defection  of  character  in  a Rarotongan 
teacher— Pleasing  advance  of  the  mission  in  1846 — Notice  of  heathen 
and  Christian  character  of  Bula,  the  chief — Bula’s  death — Subse- 
quent persecution — Tho  teachers  compelled  to  flee  the  island. 

The  island  of  Lifu  belongs  to  the  Loyalty  group  of 
■western  Polynesia,  and  is  about  60  miles  N.  E.  of  Marh. 
It  is  about  80  miles  in  circumference,  and  thickly  populated 
by  a people  who,  until  recently,  were  in  a state  of  heathen 
idolatry  aud  degradation.  Happily,  however,  now,  through 
the  labours  of  native  Christian  teachers,  we  are  permitted 
to  add  this  land  to  the  many  triumphs  gained  by  the  mis- 
sionary enterprise,  and  to  number  many  of  its  once  wretched 
inhabitants  among  the  brightest  gospel-polished  gems  ob- 
tained from  the  islands  of  the  sea. 

The  first  Englishman  of  whom  we  have  any  knowledge,  as 
taking  up  his  abode  with  the  people  of  Lifu,  proved  himself 
unworthy  of  his  country  and  relatives,  by  deeds  of  the  most 

(175) 


176 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


appalling  depravity.  His  whole  character  and  conduct 
much  impeded  our  early  efforts  to  introduce  Christianity; 
and  with  a hope  to  warn  young  people  who  may  read  this 
narrative,  we  give  a short  notice  of  his  inglorious  life. 

In  his  youth,  this  English  lad  was  known  as  a son  of  one 
of  the  most  respectable  Christian  families  in  the  country. 
From  his  birth  he  had  had  the  pious  example  and  instruc- 
tion of  his  excellent  parents,  and  his  character  was  then  as 
promising  as  that  of  many  a hopeful  youth  in  such  circum- 
stances now.  But  uniting  himself  to  lads  of  immoral  prac- 
tices, he  soon  became  impatient  of  the  salutary  restraints 
of  his  well-ordered  home,  and  of  his  best  friends.  Efforts 
were  made  to  check  his  onward  career  in  vice,  but  its 
force  accumulated  on  him,  until,  to  the  sorrow  of  his  rela- 
tives, he  resolved  to  sail  to  Australia.  Mingling  with  bad 
company  during  the  voyage,  he  landed  on  those  distant 
shores  more  confirmed  in  wickedness  than  when  he  left  his 
father’s  house.  For  some  time  he  remained  there,  and  fully 
gave  himself  up  to  the  full  excess  of  vicious  pleasure,  until,  at 
length,  he  engaged  himself  as  seaman  on  board  a little  trad- 
ing-vessel, bound  to  the  heathen  lands  of  western  Polynesia. 
On  the  ship’s  arrival  at  the  island  of  Lifu,  the  reckless 
young  man  determined  to  take  up  his  abode  with  its  savage 
inhabitants.  He  landed  among  them,  and  gained  their 
favour  by  giving  away  his  clothes,  and  adopting  their  mode 
of  roving  abroad  in  a state  of  comparative  nudity.  With- 
out restraint  he  delighted  in  the  practice  of  all  the  abomi- 
nations of  the  heathen ; he  assisted  the  tribe  with  whom  he 
lived  in  their  cruel  wars,  and  revelled  with  them  in  their 
abominable  cannibal  feasts ! When  the  missionary  ship 
first  visited  the  island,  this  heathen  white  man  came  off  to  it 
in  a canoe,  as  wild  as  the  wildest  heathen,  and  much  more 
detestable  to  look  on  than  they.  Oh,  ye  hopeful  youths, 
who  now  shudder  at  this  tale,  but  who  have  not  decided  for 


ISLAND  OF  LIFU. 


177 


God  and  his  service,  how  solemnly  does  it  warn  you ! Who 
can  tell  to  what  lengths  of  wickedness  even  you  may  go, 
except  God  preserve ! How  important,  then,  that  without 
hesitation  or  delay  you  should  at  once  decide  for  religion  ! 

In  contrast  to  the  above,  we  have  to  notice,  in  connection 
with  the  introduction  of  the  gospel  to  Lifu,  the  life  of  a 
native  teacher.  His  name  is  Pao'o.  He  was  born  on 
Aitutaki,  of  the  Rarotongan  group,  which  is  nearly  three 
thousand  miles  eastward  of  Lifu.  About  the  time  when 
the  Christian-born  lad  was  becoming  a heathen,  Pao'o,  the 
heathen-born  lad,  became  a Christian.  For  some  time,  he 
remained  under  instruction  of  the  Rev.  A.  Buzacott,  and 
in  1841  he  sailed  away  in  the  mission  ship,  as  a native  tea- 
cher, to  the  islands  of  the  distant  west.  He  at  first  took 
up  his  abode  with  the  teachers  of  Mare,  and  at  length  was 
taken  by  them  to  the  island  of  Lifu.  He  was  kindly  re- 
ceived by  the  people,  and  was  encouraged  by  the  early 
attentions  of  many  to  his  Christian  instruction.  Unhap- 
pily,  however,  the  evil  influence  of  the  white  heathen  was 
extensive  and  powerful,  and,  for  a time,  did  much  to  pre- 
vent the  people  from  believing  the  statements  made  by  the 
teacher  respecting  the  Holy  Scriptures.  In  addition  to 
this,  and  all  the  evils  of  heathenism,  similar  to  those  which 
we  have  noticed  in  Mark,  the  labours  of  Paoo  were  painfully 
blighted  by  the  defections  of  another  teacher  who  had  been 
located  with  him  on  the  island.  To  our  grief,  when  the 
island  was  visited  in  1845,  it  was  found  that  Paoo’s  com- 
panion and  associate  teacher,  a Rarotongan,  had  proved 
himself  a very  unsuitable  person  for  the  work  he  had  under- 
taken. By  his  constant  disagreement  with  Paoo,  by  his 
general  inconsistent  conduct,  and  by  his  subsequent  im- 
moral life,  he  was  a bane  to  the  mission,  and  had  well-nigh 
caused  its  ruin. 

In  recording  this  painful  case,  it  is  right  that  we  should 


178 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


append  our  gratitude  to  God,  that  such  instances  of  defection 
in  our  staff  of  teachers  have  heen  but  rare.  Most  of  those 
sent  out  from  the  native  churches  as  teachers  and  pastors 
have  proved  themselves  to  be  men  of  God, — living  illustra- 
tions of  the  word  of  God, — faithfully  and  unreservedly 
devoting  themselves  to  their  mission.  Such  was  the  life  of 
Paoo;  and  although  he  had  peculiar  trials  to  endure  in  the 
prosecution  of  his  labours,  from  the  conduct  of  the  wicked 
resident  white  man,  and  from  the  unfaithfulness  of  his  com- 
panion teacher,  yet  he  remained  a firm,  consistent,  and 
working  man. 

In  company  with  the  Rev.  H.  Nishet,  I visited  this 
island  in  1846,  about  five  years  after  the  time  when  Paoo 
took  up  his  abode  with  them ; and  we  were  much  encou- 
raged to  witness  the  improved  disposition  of  the  people. 
The  Englishman,  through  ill-health,  had  been  compelled  to 
leave  the  island;  the  apostate  teacher  had  returned  to 
his  home;  the  station  had  been  reinforced  by  two  excellent 
Samoan  teachers,  and  the  progress  gained  was  in  advance 
of  that  on  any  other  island  of  the  Loyalty  group.  Although 
not  more  than  one-third  of  the  heathen  tribes  had  been 
visited,  and  even  the  great  mass  of  the  people  where  the 
teachers  lived  were  still  naked  savage  cannibals — yet  a large 
reed  building  had  been  erected  as  a house  of  God,  in  which 
a goodly  number  of  natives  met  every  morning  for  Christian 
instruction,  several  of  whom  were  sufficiently  advanced  to 
take  part,  by  reading  and  prayer,  in  the  religious  services 
of  the  Sabbath. 

One  of  the  most  advanced  and  interesting  characters  we  saw 
was  Bula,  the  chief  of  the  district.  He  was  about  five-and- 
thirty  years  old,  and  the  most  amiable  heathen  I had  seen; 
but  for  some  years  he  had  been  afflicted  with  total  blindness. 
From  the  first  landing  of  Paoo,  Bula  had  been  his  friend, 
and  now  he  had  made  considerable  advance  in  scriptural 


ISLAND  OF  LIFU. 


179 


knowledge  and  Christian  experience.  Through  hi3  example 
and  influence,  the  first  blow  was  given,  which  had  led  to 
the  complete  overthrow  of  heathenism,  and  the  entire  sub- 
jugation of  the  people  to  the  gospel  of  Christ.  The  priests 
and  warriors,  however,  of  the  district  were  much  enraged  at 
him,  and  did  all  they  could  to  induce  him  to  cast  off  his 
adherence  to  Christianity.  Finding  him  firm  in  his  faith, 
the  priests  had  recourse  to  incantation,  which  issued,  it  was 
said,  in  his  blindness ; but  this  affliction  more  closely 
cemented  his  attachment  to  the  teacher,  and  more  firmly 
fixed  his  heart  in  Christian  truth. 

In  this  state  of  mind,  Bula  much  regretted  that  his  tribe 
would  not  cease  their  wars  with  that  of  the  other  side  of 
the  island,  and  was  frequently  pained  with  the  daring  con- 
duct of  the  warriors,  who  brought  the  bodies  of  their  victims 
before  him,  tauntingly  inviting  him  to  partake  of  their 
cannibal  feast,  as  in  former  days.  These  deeds  he  reproved 
with  indignation,  mingled  with  Christian  mildness,  always 
affirming,  that  he  had  become  a praying  man  to  Jehovah, 
that  he  would  have  no  more  to  do  with  heathen  practices, 
and  assured  the  people,  that  the  time  would  come  when  they 
would  mourn  over  their  wickedness  and  folly. 

Bula  visited  us  on  board  the  mission  ship ; we  had  much 
conversation  with  him  through  the  faithful  teacher,  and 
were  delighted  with  his  whole  behaviour.  He,  with  his 
followers,  dined  on  board,  and  it  was  a deeply  affecting  sight 
to  see  him  lift  up  his  hands,  and  to  hear  him,  in  his  own 
language,  acknowledge  Jehovah  as  the  bountiful  giver  of 
daily  food,  and  ask  his  blessing. 

The  children  of  the  Samoan  mission  school,  having  heard 
of  the  love  and  zeal  of  the  children  in  purchasing  the  John 
Williams  as  a missionary  ship,  were  stimulated  by  their 
example,  and  resolved  to  purchase  a good  supply  of  mis- 
sionary canoes  for  the  use  of  the  destitute  teachers  in  wes- 


180 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


tern  Polynesia.  Twenty  of  these  canoes  were  put  on  board 
the  mission  ship,  on  our  way  to  the  islands  ; and  as  the 
Lifu  canoes  were  much  inferior  to  those  of  Samoa,  we  gave 
Bula  one,  as  a present  from  the  Christian  children  in  Samoa. 
He  could  not  see  it,  but  his  naturally  mild  countenance, 
made  more  so  by  the  benign  influences  of  the  gospel,  be- 
spoke the  feelings  of  his  heart,  while,  with  his  hands,  feeling 
over  every  part  of  the  canoe,  he  frequently  exclaimed,  “Ah  ! 
the  greatness  of  their  compassion  to  us.  This  is  one  fruit 
of  the  word  of  Jehovah 

Although  thus  encouraged  by  the  conduct  and  example 
of  Bula,  and  a few  others  like  him,  yet  it  must  be  remem- 
bered, that  at  this  time  (1846)  the  entire  population  of 
Lifu,  with  these  few  exceptions,  were  determinately  opposed 
to  Christianity  ; were  constantly  devising  schemes  to  crush 
its  infant  existence  on  the  island,  and  only  tolerated  the 
life  of  the  teachers  because  Bula  was  their  patron  and 
friend  : humanly  speaking,  the  future  success  of  the  mission 
depended  on  his  life. 

But  days  of  trial  and  affliction  were  appointed  for  the 
teachers,  under  circumstances  they  had  least  expected. 
Bula  just  at  this  time  was  taken  ill;  at  first  he  was  thought 
to  be  only  slightly  indisposed,  and  no  danger  was  appre- 
hended;— simple  medicines  at  hand  were  administered,  but 
he  grew  worse;  prayer  was  offered;  his  disease,  however, 
still  advanced  : strange  and  unexpected  emotions  took  pos- 
session of  the  teachers’  hearts, — alive  to  their  situation,  they 
meditated  on  their  circumstances  with  much  anxiety,  and 
employed  every  effort  to  relieve  the  sufferer,  but  all  was  in 
vain  ; their  worst  fears  came  to  pass, — Bula  died. 

By  this  apparently  untoward  event,  the  powers  of  dark- 
ness regained  an  unrestrained  dominion  over  the  inhabit- 
ants of  Lifu,  which  nothing  but  the  power  of  God  could 
have  subdued.  From  time  immemorial  it  had  been  a 


ISLAND  OF  LIFU. 


181 


custom  with  this  people,  on  the  death  of  a chief,  to  strangle 
two  or  three  of  his  household,  with  a view,  as  we  have  ob- 
served on  other  islands,  that  their  spirits  should  accompany 
his  spirit  to  the  unseen  world.  On  this  occasion,  the 
priests  and  warriors  united  with  the  whole  heathen  party  in 
determining  that  Bula’s  friends,  the  teachers,  should  be  put 
to  death ; they  came  armed  with  clubs  and  spears,  and  were 
about  to  execute  their  purpose,  when  providentially  Bula’s 
successor  rushed  forward  to  interpose,  saying,  — “Cease 
awhile,  cease  awhile ; Bula  has  not  died  as  our  father^ : he 
has  died  a praying  man  to  Jehovah.  He  left  with  me  his 
request,  to  which  I have  yielded,  not  to  injure  these  his 
friends.” 

This  man  who  had  come  into  power  was  a heathen,  but 
by  his  frequent  intercourse  with  Bula  had  gained  some 
knowledge  of  Christian  truth,  and  evidently  desired  to  be 
further  instructed.  Repeated  and  desperate  efforts  were 
made  by  the  heathen  to  accomplish  their  object,  but  they 
were  frustrated ; and  Bula  was  buried,  according  to  his  re- 
quest, by  the  teachers  in  a Christian  manner. 

Soon  after  this  the  tribe  became  divided  against  itself, 
one  party  being  disposed  to  allow  the  teachers  to  continue 
unmolested  in  their  work,  while  the  other  resolved  to  bring 
their  work  to  a speedy  end.  A war  commenced,  and  was 
carried  on  with  much  cruelty,  in  which  many  of  the  people 
on  both  sides  were  murdered.  At  this  crisis  the  teachers 
could  do  nothing.  By  the  protection  of  Bula’s  successor, 
their  lives  were,  with  great  difficulty,  preserved,  until  at 
length  they  were  advised  by  him  to  retire  awhile  to  the 
island  of  Mar£,  and  there  await  the  cessation  of  hostilities. 

It  was  a day  of  severe  trial  to  the  devoted  men,  but  it 
was  the  only  plan  to  be  adopted  to  secure  their  own  safety 
and  future  success.  Followed  by  a few  of  their  attached 
adherents,  they  put  to  sea  in  their  canoes,  weeping  over 
16 


182 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


the  wickedness  of  the  people  ; yet,  trusting  in  God  to  pre- 
serve and  to  bless  the  seed  which  had  been  sown,  they 
believed  the  time  would  come  when  they  would  again  return 
to  reap  an  abundant  harvest  of  reward.  The  details  of  the 
next  chapter  will  show  they  were  not  disappointed. 


CHAPTER  X XI Y. 

Tho  teachers  after  a short  stay  at  Mare,  visit  Lifu — Their  reception  by 
the  people — Daily  meetings  held — Manifest  power  of  Christian  in- 
struction— Teachers  return  to  Mare — People  of  Lifu  send  special 
messengers  to  invite  their  return  to  the  island — Teachers  recom- 
mence their  labours,  1850 — Settlements  formed — Chapels  and  good 
houses  built— People  go  to  Mare  to  prepare  wood  for  the  building 
— Prosperous  advance  of  the  mission — The  teachers’  joy — Appeal 
for  English  missionaries. 

Arriving  at  Mark  in  safety  just  at  the  time  when  the 
affairs  of  the  mission  there  had  turned  in  favour  of  Christ- 
ianity, the  Lifu  teachers  and  their  party  were  received 
with  kindness,  and  treated  with  hospitality;  and  remaining 
there  in  anxious  suspense  for  some  months,  not  having 
heard  from  Lifu,  they  resolved  to  return  to  the  island  for  the 
purpose  of  deciding  how  far  it  was  prudent  again  to  take  up 
their  abode  among  the  people.  In  sending  an  account  of 
this  visit,  one  of  the  teachers  writes,  “ We  had  a safe  passage 
from  Mare  to  Lifu ; but  as  we  approached  the  landing-place, 
we  were  much  distressed.  The  beach  was  crowded  with 
the  warriors  of  the  tribe,  who  placed  themselves  in  fighting 
attitude.  Some  of  them  poised  their  spears  at  us,  others 
violently  struck  the  ground  with  their  clubs,  and  the  whole 
party  appeared  determined  either  to  oppose  our  landing,  or 
on  landing  to  lay  violent  hands  on  us. 


(183) 


184 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Fortunately  for  the  teachers,  a number  of  influential 
people  of  Marfe  had  gone  with  them,  through  whom  a safe 
landing  was  effected.  The  chief,  Bula’s  successor,  and  his 
party,  rejoiced  at  again  seeing  the  men  whose  character  and 
instruction  they  had  learnt  to  value ; and  even  the  opposing 
party,  learning  that  the  teachers  did  not  intend  to  remain, 
but  had  merely  come  as  visitors,  did  nothing  to  interfere  with 
the  will  of  their  chief.  This  visit  was  protracted  beyond 
the  intended  limits  of  the  visitors,  for  it  was  found  that 
each  party  had  much  to  report  concerning  their  respective 
islands.  Day  by  day  large  gatherings  of  people  came  to- 
gether. The  teachers  said  but  little ; they  left  their  friends 
from  Mare  to  tell  the  wondrous  tale  about  the  progress  of 
Christianity  on  their  island — of  the  light,  and  peace,  and 
happiness,  they  were  now  enjoying,  as  contrasted  with  their 
state  in  former  years ; while  those  of  Lifu  had  to  report  of 
wars  and  desolation.  These  meetings  were  the  means  of 
doing  much  good;  so  much,  that  when  the  teachers  and 
their  party  proposed  returning  to  Mark,  many  of  the  peo- 
ple of  Lifu  urged  them  to  remain,  and  recommence  their 
missionary  work  on  the  island.  Providence,  however,  led 
them  to  decline  acceding  to  the  proposal.  Not  that  they 
were  unwilling  to  remain  ; but  as  they  had  only  come  to 
visit  for  a short  time,  it  was  thought  better  to  return  to 
Mare,  and  there  wait  a still  further  and  more  general  ex- 
pression of  the  people’s  desire  for  the  reoccupation  of  the 
island. 

Under  these  circumstances,  the  inhabitants  of  Lifu  were 
again  left  in  1849;  but  so  great  were  the  results  of  the 
Christian  instruction  given  in  former  years,  as  to  make  it 
impossible  for  Bula’s  tribe  to  continue  their  heathen  prac- 
tices. Many  of  the  people  were  attached  to  the  teachers, 
and,  by  prudence  and  forbearance  towards  their  fellow- 
countrymen,  exerted  a beneficial  influence  in  favour  of 


ISLAND  OF  LIFU. 


185 


Christianity.  Early  in  1850  peace  was  restored  between 
the  different  tribes,  and  a very  general  desire  expressed  that 
the  teachers  should  return  to  the  island.  The  late  inter- 
course with  the  people  of  Mare  had  led  them  to  see  how 
much  they  had  lost  by  a continuation  of  war  and  idolatry, 
and  without  delay  they  resolved  to  send  special  messengers 
with  importunate  entreaties  that  the  teachers  would  return 
immediately. 

These  Lifu  messengers  reached  Mare  in  safety,  and  were 
gladly  welcomed  by  the  Christian  men,  who  had  been  so 
long  praying  and  waiting  for  the  result  now  brought  about. 
As  soon  as  possible,  arrangements  were  made  for  the  teach- 
ers’ departure,  and  having  a prosperous  voyage  in  their 
canoes,  they  reached  Lifu,  and  were  permitted  to  re-enter 
on  their  labours  in  the  midst  of  a people  prepared  by  the 
providence  of  God.  A marvellous  change  had  also  taken 
place  in  the  disposition  and  deeds  of  the  heathen  party — 
even  they  lent  a helping  hand  in  the  erection  of  reed 
buildings  for  school-houses  and  chapels ; in  these,  daily  in- 
struction was  given  to  an  increasing  number  of  adults  and 
children,  and  the  whole  population  speedily  became  pre- 
pared to  announce  their  abandonment  of  heathenism,  and 
to  place  themselves  under  Christian  instruction. 

As  things  thus  advanced,  the  people  of  the  principal 
settlement  felt  their  need  of  a larger  and  more  substantial 
place  of  worship,  and  the  teachers  were  willing  to  render 
all  the  assistance  in  their  power  to  give  them  this  desire. 
In  good  earnest  they  set  to  work  to  burn  lime,  and  to  col- 
lect suitable  stones,  for  they  had  determined  to  have  a stone 
building.  But  they  had  not  advauced  far  in  the  work  be- 
fore they  felt  themselves  in  difficulties  respecting  the  wood 
required  for  the  roof,  and  fitting  up  of  the  house.  There 
was  no  lack  of  timber-trees  in  the  island,  but  the  teachers 
had  no  supply  of  pit-saws,  hand-saws,  axes,  planes,  and 
16  * 


186 


OEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


other  tools  necessary  for  the  work.  In  this  difficulty  they 
waited  some  time,  hoping  that  the  missionary  ship,  or  some 
other  vessel,  might  come  to  supply  their  wants.  How  pleas- 
ing, and  as  important  as  pleasing,  this  fact ! To  see  these 
barbarous  tribes,  so  recently  brought  under  Christian  in- 
struction, mourning  over  the  want  of  means  by  which  to 
advance  in  civilization,  proves  that  while  the  gospel  creates 
wants  among  a heathen  people,  it  also  supplies  to  them  an 
energy  by  which  they  arise  to  meet  those  wants.  This  was 
most  strikingly  illustrated  in  the  conduct  of  those  of  whose 
difficulties  we  are  now  speaking.  Not  having  the  means  at 
hand  to  work  the  wood  required,  many  of  the  best  workmen, 
accompanied  by  one  of  the  teachers,  fitted  up  a fleet  of  canoes, 
and  sailed  to  the  island  of  Mare,  which,  it  will  be  remem- 
bered, is  some  sixty  miles  from  Lifu.  There  they  were  al- 
lowed to  fell  as  many  trees  as  they  needed,  and  were  assisted 
in  sawing  and  otherwise  preparing  rafters  and  planks,  to  the 
number  required.  This  work  occupied  three  or  four  months, 
and  when  completed,  the  delighted  people  put  to  sea  in  their 
canoes,  each  drawing  after  it  a raft  of  prepared  wood  for  the 
new  house  of  prayer  to  Jehovah. 

The  next  missionary  visit  was  made  in  the  John  Williams 
to  this  island  in  1852.  On  approaching  the  shores  a number 
of  natives  came  on  board,  and  it  was  evident,  in  their  ex- 
ternal appearance,  that  a great  change  had  come  over  them 
since  they  were  last  visited  : their  bodies  were  clothed,  their 
wildness  was  subdued,  and  their  whole  demeanour  bore 
witness  to  the  benign  influences  of  the  word  of  God.  It  is 
not  easy  to  describe  the  feeling  of  grateful  surprise  which 
filled  the  hearts  of  the  missionaries  as  they  landed  in  the 
midst  of  a well-ordered  settlement,  where  but  a few  years 
before,  deeds  of  heathen  cruelty  and  bloodshed  were  ram- 
pant, and  as  they  saw  the  large  commodious  stone  chapel 
standing  on  the  very  spot  where  Satan’s  seat  was — all  the 


ISLAND  OF  LIFU. 


187 


result  of  native  teachers’  instruction.  The  chapel  was  one 
hundred  feet  long,  forty  feet  wide,  and  the  walls  three  feet 
thick.  Besides  being  well  furnished  with  seats,  it  had 
pulpit,  reading-desk,  doors,  and  neat  Venetian  blinds  for 
windows,  all  of  which  was  the  work  of  the  people  of  Lifu, 
under  the  superintendence  and  assistance  of  their  native 
Christian  teachers. 

About  two  years  had  now  elapsed  since  the  return  of 
the  teachers  from  Mar6,  and  during  that  short  time  this 
great  revolution  had  taken  place,  the  inhabitants  of  the 
whole  land,  about  one  hundred  miles  in  circumference,  had  re- 
nounced heathenism,  idolatry,  war,  and  cannibalism.  As  far 
as  their  limited  means  of  books  would  allow,  these  were 
being  taught  to  read,  and  a goodly  number  were  able  to  read 
fluently.  Three  hundred  persons  were  in  select  classes  for 
Biblical  instruction,  all  of  whose  lives  were  in  outward  con- 
formity to  the  requirements  of  Christianity;  and  not  a few 
of  the  more  advanced  were  engaged  in  teaching  their  fellow- 
countrymen,  and  in  taking  part  in  religious  services. 

The  honoured  man  Paoo,  the  first  teacher  who  landed  on 
Lifu,  a notice  of  whose  early  life  we  gave  in  the  foregoing 
chapter,  is  still  living.  After  an  anxious  season  of  labour 
and  persecution,  he,  with  his  fellow-labourers,  is  permitted 
to  rejoice  while  reaping  an  abundant  harvest  from  the  seed 
sown  during  the  first  years  of  the  mission.  In  one  of  his 
letters  (1853)  he  writes  : — “ This  is  a joyful  season.  The 
work  of  God  is  now  advancing.  Idols  and  things  the 
- people  held  sacred  in  heathenism  are  cast  away.  This  is  a 
great  reward.  We  have  more  work  thau  we  can  do.  There 
are  five  villages  where  the  people  now  wish  for  resident 
teachers.”  This  wish  was  met  as  far  as  possible  by  the 
location  of  Christian  labourers  from  Samoa,  and  the  island 
was  again  left.  Fourteen  months  afterwards  it  was  re- 
visited ; and  as  the  missionary  went  on  shore  at  the  first 


188 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


station  many  hundreds  of  the  people  gave  him  a cordiai 
welcome,  and  manifested  their  joy  and  gratitude  in  every 
practicable  way.  It  had  been  arranged  to  bring  a present 
of  yams  to  the  mission  ship — but  the  roughness  of  the 
sea  prevented  the  gratification  of  receiving  them  on  board. 
It  was  indeed  delightful  to  see  the  orderly,  kind,  and 
decent  behaviour  of  the  people,  who  came  from  all  parts 
of  the  land,  all  of  whom  would  have  rejoiced  could  the 
missionary  have  remained  among  them,  to  have  aided  their 
advance  in  Christian  instruction  and  civilization.  Painful 
were  the  emotions  of  the  heart,  when  in  reply  to  inquiries 
of  an  intelligent  native  about  getting  a missionary  to  come 
and  live  among  the  people,  being  told  that  one  would 
come  some  day,  he  rejoined,  “ Say  not  some  day — I do  Dot 
like  to  hear  that  word  some  day,  why  not  say  to-day  ?”  Truly 
the  fallow-ground  has  been  broken  up — the  seed  has  been 
scattered — the  fields  are  already  white  unto  the  harvest; 
but,  alas ! the  labourers  are  few. 

The  last  missionary  visit  to  Lifu  was  made  in  October, 
1854.  The  strength  of  wind  and  sea  beating  on  shore 
prevented  the  brethren  having  any  intercourse  with  the 
people  at  Mu,  the  first-formed  station.  Arriving  off  Ue, 
the  ship’s  boats  were  lowered  to  convey  teachers  and  mis- 
sionaries to  the  shore  ; but  a heavy  swell  across  the  bay 
obliged  them  to  loose  away  before  all  had  disembarked,  and 
a gale  of  wind  blew  off  the  ship  for  five  days,  when,  on 
returning  to  the  island  the  missionaries  landed,  3000  na- 
tives met  on  the  shore  to  give  them  a Christian  welcome ! 
The  whole  population  had  made  rapid  advance  in  instruction 
and  civilization,  and  more  than  one  hundred  of  these  once 
savage,  idolatrous  people  were  bringing  forth  fruit  of  true 
conversion  to  God,  and  were  ready  to  be  united  in  church 
communion. 

The  call  for  European  missionaries  to  reside  on  this  island, 


ISLAND  OF  LTFU. 


189 


to  advance  the  work  thus  begun,  is  loud  and  imperative ; 
and  surely  it  is  the  duty  of  the  churches  of  Christ  to  see 
that  missionaries  shall  be  sent  to  a field  so  inviting — so  that 
by  further  cultivation  it,  as  well  as  others,  may  become  a 
centre  of  light  and  influence  which  shall  bless  the  dark 
regions  yet  beyond. 

Pao'o,  the  faithful  teacher,  (1854,)  in  his  last  letter,  thus 
appeals.  May  it  be  heard  as  it  deserves  ! — “ Brethren,  is 
your  compassion  for  this  people  come  to  an  end '(  We  have 
now  eleven  small  villages  where  the  people  wait  to  be  taught 
the  word  of  God.  My  heart  is  grieved  continually  at  our 
want  of  means  to  supply  them  all.  Oh,  ye  brethren,  who 
are  being  instructed  for  the  work  of  the  ministry,  come  to 
our  help.  Cease  not  to  pray  for  us,  but  come  also;  oh, 
come  to  our  help.” 


THE  ISLAND  OF  TOKA. 


CHAPTER  XXV, 

Its  geographical  position — Frequent  visits  of  the  people  of  Toka  to 
Mare  and  Lifu — Their  early  desire  for  native  teachers — Attempts  of 
the  natives  themselves  to  introduce  Christianity  to  their  island — 
Settlement  of  the  first  native  teacher  in  1852 — Encouraging  ad- 
vance of  the  people  in  1853 — Now  a prosperous  out-station  to  the 
islands  of  Lifu  and  Mare. 

Near  to  the  island  of  Lifu,  and  about  midway  between 
it  and  Marh,  is  the  island  of  Toka.  It  is  a block  of  coral 
land,  and  one  of  those  tiny,  low,  isolated  abodes  of  men 
which  so  numerously  bestud  the  Pacific  ocean,  and  which 
raise  their  lofty,  evergreen,  graceful,  cocoa-nut  tops  far 
above  the  coral-beach  below,  alike  to  gratify,  to  guide,  and 
to  warn  the  voyager  as  he  sails  between  the  larger  islands. 

During  the  reign  of  heathenism  on  Mare  and  Lifu,  the 
island  of  Toka  was  frequently  visited  by  parties  vanquished 
in  war,  descendants  of  whom  at  length  made  it  their  home, 
and  within  its  limited  circumference  of  seven  miles,  prac- 
tised on  a miniature  scale  all  the  superstitions  and  barbarities 
of  heathen  life. 

Frequently,  during  their  first  years  of  toil  and  persecu- 

( 190) 


ISLAND  OF  TOKA. 


191 


tion  on  the  two  large  islands,  the  teachers  had  visited  Toka ; 
they  had  had  favourable  intercourse  with  its  inhabitants, 
and  spoke  to  us  of  their  faith,  that  the  time  would  come 
when  they  should  rejoice  over  the  fruits  of  peace  and  right- 
eousness in  the  people,  as  they  then  did  in  the  natural 
beauty  of  this  coral  isle. 

Between  the  years  1849  and  1851,  when  Christianity  was 
gaining  its  first  triumphs  on  Mare  and  Lifu,  some  of  the 
people  of  Toka  visited  these  lands.  There  they  were  brought 
into  immediate  contact  with  the  Christian  teachers,  and  be- 
came so  far  enlightened  concerning  the  truths  of  the  gospel 
as  to  adopt  them  as  their  own ; and  on  returning  home,  they 
entreated,  with  much  importunity,  that  one  of  the  teachers 
would  accompany  them.  Never  was  a people  evidently  more 
prepared  to  receive  instruction,  and  never  was  the  cry, 
“ Come  over  and  help  us,”  more  sincere  and  urgent,  than  in 
their  case.  But  the  teachers  were  not  then  in  a position  to 
comply  with  this  appeal.  Sickness  and  death  had  reduced 
their  numbers,  and  those  who  remained  found  themselves 
more  than  fully  occupied  in  duties  arising  out  of  the  encoura- 
ging state  of  the  mission  under  their  more  immediate  care. 

The  natives  of  Toka  were,  therefore,  compelled  to  return 
home  alone ; but  so  seriously  impressed  were  they  with  the 
importance  of  Christianity,  that  according  to  the  knowledge 
they  had  gained,  they  began  to  teach  their  fellow-country- 
men respecting  the  new  and  strange  things  taught  and  done 
by  the  servants  of  Jehovah;  and,  what  was  better,  they 
manifested  their  sincerity  by  casting  away  their  idols,  by 
giving  up  heathen  practices,  by  observing  the  ordinances  of 
Christian  worship  in  their  families,  and  by  keeping  holy 
the  Lord’s  day.  God  put  honour  on  these  men,  and  gave 
success  to  their  deeds;  so  much  so  that  in  1852,  an  applica- 
tion was  again  made  by  the  people  of  the  island  to  the 
teachers  on  Mare,  that  one  of  them  would  come  to  their  help. 


192 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Solia,  an  excellent  Samoan  evangelist,  was  at  this  time  set 
apart  to  this  work,  and  to  the  joy  of  the  people,  took  up 
his  permanent  abode  among  them.  This  arrangement  was 
made  by  the  teachers  themselves,  in  the  absence  of  mission- 
ary instruction,  and  alike  illustrates  their  zeal  and  their  pru- 
dence, in  circumstances  which  demanded  their  own  unaided 
and  independent  decision. 

On  the  next  visit  of  the  mission  ship  to  the  island,  it  was 
gratifying  to  witness  as  a result  of  this  step,  that  the  whole 
of  the  people  had  renounced  their  idols,  and  that  by 
far  the  larger  part  of  the  adults  and  children  on  the  island 
were  under  instruction.  On  landing,  the  missionary  was 
delighted  to  see  a neat  plastered  chapel  finished,  large 
enough  to  hold  the  entire  population,  and  to  learn  that  it 
was  well  filled  on  Sabbath-day  for  worship,  and  that  on  other 
days  it  was  occupied  by  the  schools.  The  people  had  also 
assisted  the  teacher  in  building  a good  mission-house,  and 
those  attached  to  his  instruction  voluntarily  and  freely  sup- 
plied him  with  all  the  necessaries  of  life,  thus  leaving  him 
without  anxiety  to  devote  his  time  and  talents  to  his  proper 
work. 

We  have  already  observed  that  this  island  is  small,  and 
the  population  but  limited,  so  that  it  can  only  be  considered 
as  an  out-station  to  Mark  and  Lifu,  to  be  occupied  by  a na- 
tive pastor ; but,  as  such,  it  is  one  of  the  many  instances 
which  occur  in  the  islands  of  the  Pacific,  of  the  importance 
and  efficiency  of  native  agency,  and  cannot  fail  to  encourage 
the  friends  of  Christian  missions. 

That  which  was  spoken  is  come  to  pass.  The  Lord’s 
Anointed  is  become  light  and  salvation  to  the  heathen. 
They  sing  unto  him  a new  song.  From  the  ends  of  the 
earth  his  praise  is  heard, — yea,  the  inhabitants  of  the  rock 
do  sing;  the  isles,  and  the  people  thereof,  give  glory  unto 
the  Lord. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  UE A. 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 

Situated  to  the  north-west  of  Lifu — The  people  of  Uea  hear  of  tho  native 
teachers’  labours  on  the  larger  islands — First  visited  by  a missionary 
ship  in  1846 — An  account  of  its  reef-bound  coast — Attempts  to  enter 
the  lagoon  frustrated — Subsequent  visit  of  the  Bishop  of  New  Zea- 
land— The  island  peopled  by  three  different  tribes — Christian  hope 
for  the  island  in  the  labours  of  native  teachers — Summary  view  of 
the  Loyalty  group  of  islands. 

By  reference  to  the  map  of  the  Loyalty  islands,  there  will 
be  seen,  about  eighty  miles  to  the  north-west  of  Lifu,  a 
cluster  of  island  reefs,  called  Uea. 

In  the  year  1846,  while  visiting  Lifu,  the  natives  gave  us 
to  understand  that  the  people  of  Uea  had  heard  of  the  intro- 
duction of  Christianity  on  the  other  islands  of  the  group, 
and  that  some  of  them  had  come  to  Lifu  in  their  canoes,  for 
the  purpose  of  becoming  better  acquainted  with  this  new 
thing.  These  people  from  Uea  had  returned  to  their  island 
some  time  before  our  visit  in  the  mission  ship,  and  had  left 
an  urgent  request  that  we  would  go  to  them,  and  take  them 
a Christian  teacher. 

Accordingly  we  set  sail,  and  after  fifteen  hours’  passage, 
IT  (196) 


194 


OEMS  FliOM  THE  COItAL  ISLANDS. 


made  the  lee  of  the  mainland.  Working  to  windward,  we 
discovered  that  the  inhabited  side  of  the  island  was  sur- 
rounded by  an  almost  unbroken  chain  of  rocky  islands,  vary- 
ing from  a quarter-of-a-mile  to  a mile  in  circumference, 
stretching  some  sixty  miles  round  to  the  north,  from  one 
point  of  the  mainland  to  the  other,  forming  an  extensive 
lagoon  of  more  than  sixteen  miles  in  diameter.  The  whole 
presented  a most  picturesque  and  romantic  appearance,  which 
could  not  fail  to  gratify  the  eye.  But  our  circumstances 
made  our  hearts  too  anxious  thoroughly  to  enjoy  the  scene. 
A strong  contrary  gale  was  blowing  upon  us ; the  sea  was 
rough  ; uncertain  and  deceitful  shallows  lay  under  our  course ; 
and  although  the  lagoon  inside  was  calm,  and  safe  for  an- 
chorage, yet  no  break  between  the  numberless  islets  could 
be  discovered  large  enough  to  admit  our  ship. 

Perplexed  as  to  our  duty,  not  knowing  how  far  we  could 
proceed  with  safety,  we  came  to  two  patches  of  reef,  which 
appeared  about  thirty  to  forty  feet  apart.  Into  this  opening 
we  resolved  on  makiug  an  attempt  to  enter  the  lagoon  ; but, 
alas  ! our  dangers  increased  : the  shallows  extended  from  each 
reef  further  into  the  narrow  channel  than  we  had  seen;  and 
labouring  some  minutes  in  awful  suspense  against  a head 
wind,  and  a short,  buoyant,  broken  swell,  we  were  glad  to 
back  all  sail,  and  drift  again  into  the  open  sea. 

While  thankful  for  our  safety,  we  were  still  anxious  to 
find  an  entrance  for  our  ship  into  the  lagoon  ; but  being  at 
least  twenty  miles  from  the  inhabited  part  of  the  mainland 
of  Uea,  we  saw  no  natives,  and  after  making  another  fruit- 
less attempt  to  enter,  we  were  compelled  most  reluctantly 
to  abandon  our  design  of  communicating  with  the  people 
that  voyage. 

We  are  happy,  however,  to  state  that  since  our  voyage 
referred  to  above,  the  Bishop  of  New  Zealand,  in  his  mis- 
sionary schooner,  has  visited  Uea,  and  has  had  inter- 


ISLAND  OF  UEA. 


195 


course  with  the  people.  The  population  is  found  to  consist 
of  tlu-ec  distinct  tribes, — the  aborigines,  who  dwell  for  the 
most  part  in  the  interior  hilly  district;  a tribe  from  New 
Caledouia,  who  have  settled  on  the  southern  coast;  and  a 
tribe  from  Wallis  Island,  some  thousand  miles  eastward, 
who,  two  or  three  generations  ago,  left  their  owil  island  in 
canoes,  and,  without  design  on  their  part,  were  brought  by 
the  stormy  winds  and  the  waves  to  this  island,  to  which  they 
gave  the  name  of  Uea. 

The  people  of  this  island  have  good  canoes,  and  are  in  the 
habit  of  having  frequent  intercourse  with  those  of  Lifu. 
Therefore,  we  are  not  left  without  hope  that  they,  as  well  as 
those  of  Toka,  shall  ere  long  be  brought  under  Christian 
instruction,  by  the  enterprising  zeal  and  pious  devotedness 
of  the  native  teachers  and  their  converts. 


196 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


This  completes  our  narrative  of  missionary  labours  on  the 
Loyalty  group  of  islands,  which  includes  Mare,  Lifu, 
Toka,  and  Uea.  Down  to  the  year  1841,  the  entire  inha- 
bitants of  these  lands  had  been  idolatrous,  naked,  cannibal 
savages  of  the  most  degraded  character — sinking  deeper  and 
yet  deeper  in  ignorance,  and  depravity,  and  wretchedness, 
as  their  generations  successively  passed  into  eternity.  In 
that  year,  Christian  teachers  from  eastern  Polynesia  first 
landed  on  the  shores  of  Mare,  and  twelve  months  after  on 
the  island  of  Lifu.  A radically  new,  and  unwritten  lan- 
guage had  to  be  learnt;  abominable  vices,  previously  deified 
as  virtues,  had  to  be  uprooted  ; an  absurd  yet  inveterate 
system  of  idolatry  had  to  be  abolisbed;  ferocious  cannibal 
propensities,  gratified  and  increased  by  cruelties  inflicted  on 
them  by  intercourse  with  the  white  man,  had  to  be  subdued. 
This  great  work  had  to  be  done  by  agents  confessedly  as 
feeble  as  they  were  few, — men,  themselves  the  very  first 
fruits  of  Christian  instruction  in  eastern  Polynesia.  For 
eight  years  after  the  landing  of  these  native  evangelists, 
they  were  left  alone  among  the  people,  labouring  in  the 
midst  of  want  and  persecution,  and  often  in  jeopardy  of 
their  lives  ; but  tbe  Almighty  and  ever-living  God  was  with 
them,  his  Spirit  and  grace  were  their  strength  and  their  joy, 
and  they  endured  as  seeing  Him  who  is  invisible. 

Now,  as  a result  of  those  labours  and  that  endurance, 
they  are  permitted  to  see  the  gigantic  evils  which  opposed 
them  fallen  to  the  dust;  nearly  the  whole  population  of  the 
group  brought  under  moral,  social,  and  civil  culture;  many 
portions  of  the  word  of  God,  and  other  books,  are  printed 
in  their  language,  and  are  in  the  hands  of  the  people ; the 
Lord’s-day  is  observed  as  a day  of  rest  and  instruction;  and 
not  a few  of  those  once  heathen,  idolatrous,  savage  men,  are 
now  intelligent,  active,  consistent  Christians. 

In  viewing  these  triumphs  of  Christianity,  we  challenge 


ISLAND  OF  UEA. 


197 


the  sceptical  unbeliever  to  tell  us  if,  without  Christianity, 
his  system  has  ever  done  so  much  as  these  simple-hearted 
devoted  native  Christians  have  done,  to  restore,  and  to  dig- 
nify the  degraded  nations  of  the  world.  Alas,  for  him  ! 
his  system  is  as  heartless  in  sympathy,  and  as  inefficient  in 
practice,  as  it  is  false  in  principle.  It  is  only  as  moral 
suasion  and  benevolent  effort  are  directed  and  sanctified 
by  the  religion  of  Jesus,  that  such  results,  as  we  have  been 
recording,  can  be  secured.  The  agency  has  been  human, 
but  the  power  has  been  divine.  To  God  be  all  the  praise. 
But  let  the  church  of  Christ  increase  and  sustain  this  in- 
strumentality, which  God  has  commanded,  and,  which  he 
has  ever  blessed,  until  it  come  to  pass,  in  the  whole  heathen 
world,  as  it  is  written  : — “ The  Lord  alone  shall  be  exalted 
in  that  day,  and  the  idols  he  shall  utterly  abolish.” 

17* 


198 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


fiEYV  I'ALLDOMA. 


THE  ISLAND  OF  NEW  CALEDONIA. 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 

The  island  discovered  by  Captain  Cook — Christian  teachers  landed  in 
1841 — The  importance  of  the  event — Circumstances  attendant  on  the 
landing  of  the  first  teachers — The  second  missionary  visit — The 
teachers’  report — Success — Burning  of  idols — Praying  people  to 
Jehovah  among  the  natives — Heathen  persecution — Superstitious 
views  on  the. appearance  of  a comet — Lives  of  the  teachers  threat- 
ened— Desolations  of  heathen  war — Subsequent  occupation  of  tho 
island  by  the  French. 

New  Caledonia  is  one  of  the  largest  of  the  western 
Polynesia  islands,  being  more  than  three  hundred  miles  long, 
and  seventy  or  eighty  miles  broad.  It  was  discovered  by 
Captain  Cook,  in  the  year  1744.  The  inhabitants  were 
found  in  the  same  state  of  ignorance,  idolatry,  and  degrada- 
tion, as  those  on  the  surrounding  islands.  The  first  at- 
tempts to  instruct  and  civilize  them  were  made  in  the 
year  1841,  when  the  Rev.  R.  Murray  succeeded  in  landing 
two  native  teachers  ; in  reference  to  which  event,  he  writes  : 
It  is  an  interesting  and  important  moment  in  a nation’s 
history,  when  the  first  Christian  teachers  set  foot  on  its 
shores.  It  is  a transition-point  from  which  dates  a new  era, 

(199; 


200 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


and  commences  a series  of  events  which  includes  an  entire 
breaking-up  and  subversion  of  the  reign  of  darkness,  and 
the  establishment  and  ascendency  of  the  kingdom  of  light, 
which  is  destined  to  elevate  and  bless  man  for  time  and  for 
eternity. 

It  was  under  influences  which  such  views  as  these  inspire, 
that  we  landed  the  teachers  of  Christianity  on  the  island  of 
New  Caledonia. 

Towards  evening  of  the  10th  of  April,  we  were  sailing 
abreast  that  part  of  the  island  to  which  our  guide  belonged. 
As  we  drew  near  the  shore,  a large  number  of  natives  were 
seen  collecting  on  the  beach.  Between  us  and  them,  however, 
there  was  a barrier-reef  over  which  the  sea  broke  heavily. 
As  night  was  at  hand,  we  lowered  a boat,  and  pulled  in  suffi- 
ciently near  as  prudence  would  dictate,  so  as  to  convince 
the  people  of  our  friendly  intentions.  After  some  consider- 
able hesitancy,  several  of  them  waded  out  to  the  inner  side 
of  the  reef,  and  for  some  time  it  appeared  doubtful  whether 
or  not  any  could  cross  it  so  as  to  speak  with  us.  At  length, 
however,  we  were  cheered  by  seeing  one  and  another  making 
their  way  through  the  heavy  breakers  towards  the  boat, 
until  they  became  so  numerous  that  our  boats  had  well  nigh 
been  swamped. 

Happily  there  was  among  the  visitors  a young  man,  the 
son  of  the  chief,  who  had  seen  our  teachers  on  the  Isle  of 
Pines.  Through  his  influence,  the  boat  was  cleared,  and 
taking  two  or  three  of  the  natives  with  us  on  board,  we 
returned  to  the  ship. 

Early  on  the  following  morning,  we  again  visited  the  shore, 
and  brought  off  to  the  ship  Nathotha,  the  chief,  to  whom  we 
explained  the  object  we  had  in  view.  Nathotha  expressed 
his  willingness  to  receive  the  teachers,  engaged  to  do  his 
best  to  protect  them,  to  see  that  they  were  supplied  with 
the  means  of  subsistence,  and  to  aid  the  object  of  the  mis- 


ISLAND  OF  NEW  CALEDONIA. 


201 


sion  as  much  as  possible.  Under  these  favourable  circum- 
stances, two  excellent  teachers  were  landed,  and  sanguine 
hopes  were  entertained  for  the  future  success  of  the  mission. 

It  will  occur  to  the  reader,  that  teachers  thus  left  with 
a barbarous  and  uncertain  people  should  be  visited  fre- 
quently, and  hence  the  necessity  for  a mission  ship.  The 
Camden,  in  which  we  first  went  to  these  islands,  was  much 
taken  out  of  its  intended  route,  at  the  time  of  which  we  now 
write,  owing  to  the  lamented  death  of  the  llev.  John  Wil- 
liams, so  that  it  could  not  again  return  to  New  Caledonia 
for  more  than  two  years  after  the  landing  of  the  teachers. 
To  our  great  grief,  it  was  found  that  one  of  them  had  been 
taken  ill  after  a few  weeks’  residence  on  the  island,  and  had 
died.  The  other  had  made  good  progress  in  the  language, 
and  had  gained  a favourable  hold  on  the  tribe  with  whom  he 
lived,  but  he  had  not  been  able  to  visit  other  tribes.  He  was 
encouraged  by  a reinforcement  of  two  teachers,  and  again 
they  were  left.  The  Camden  had  to  come  to  England,  and 
her  successor,  the  Johu  Williams,  did  not  reach  the  island 
for  two  years  after.  Hitherto,  these  delays  have  been  un- 
avoidable ; but  it  is  hoped  that  an  efficient  missionary  aux- 
iliary will  be  formed  in  Australia,  which  shall,  ere  long,  take 
the  entire  oversight  of  those  islands,  and  secure  a more  fre- 
quent visitation  of  those  under  instruction,  and  a more  rapid 
aggression  on  those  which  are  yet  in  heathen  darkness. 

Could  this  have  been  done  ten  years  ago,  in  all  probability 
we  should  not  have  to  record  the  painful  reverses,  the  long- 
continued  struggles,  the  desolating  calamities,  over  which  we 
now  have  to  mourn  in  this  group. 

In  recording  the  events  which  took  place  on  their  land- 
ing, one  of  the  teachers  writes  : “We  have  joy;  for  the 
word  of  God  is  growing  in  this  land  of  New  Caledonia. 
Many  of  the  people  have  learned  to  read,  and  are  attentive 
to  worship  every  Sabbath-day.  A few  days  ago,  a heathen 


202 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


came  to  me  to  inquire  about  casting  away  his  idols.  I told 
him  au  idol  is  nothing  at  all;  that  Jehovah  is  the  true 
God ; that  he  made  the  heavens,  the  earth,  and  all  things  ; 
that  he  had  pitied  us  in  our  sins  and  death,  and  had  sent 
his  Son,  Jesus,  to  be  our  Saviour.” 

This  man,  after  the  above  conversation,  brought  his  idols 
to  the  teachers,  and  requested  that  they  would  burn  them. 
A few  of  the  people  were  gathered  together ; the  man  pub- 
licly gave  up  his  false  gods,  and  the  teachers  addressed  the 
assembly  somewhat  as  follows  : “ Brethren,  you  see  this  your 
countryman  has  given  up  his  gods;  they  are  no  gods,  but 

idols;  he  wishes  us  to  burn  them While  he  was  thus 

going  on  to  speak,  one  of  the  crowd  rushed  in,  and  bore  away 
the  rejected  gods,  and  thus  saved  them  from  being  destroyed. 

As  the  idols  had  been  brought  to  the  teachers  to  be 
burnt,  it  was  well  that  they  convened  this  public  service, 
and  thus  relieved  themselves  from  an  act  which  might  have 
brought  on  them  the  revenge  of  the  whole  heathen  party. 
The  man  who  gave  up  his  idols  remained  steadfast  under 
Christian  instruction. 

After  this,  a native  of  some  importance,  of  a near  tribe, 
having  heard  of  the  teaching  of  the  men  of  Jehovah,  came, 
accompanied  by  his  brother.  Desiring  to  be  instructed,  they 
took  up  their  abode  with  the  teacher.  These  men  learned 
to  read,  and  understood  much  about  the  gospel.  They  re- 
turned to  their  own  district  fully  persuaded  of  the  truth  of 
the  gospel,  and  daily  attended  to  its  instruction,  and  to 
singing  and  prayer,  in  worship  to  Jehovah. 

Another  instance  of  the  progress  of  Christianity,  recorded 
by  the  teacher,  is  as  follows  : “ A petty  chief,  and  a few  of 
his  people  came  to  me  to-day.  On  entering  my  house,  he 
said — ‘ 0 Taunga,  I have  brought  you  my  gods ; they  have 
deceived  me  ; false  gods ! burn  them.'  But  I replied,  ‘ No; 
I do  not  burn  the  gods.  They  are  yours,  and  you  must  do 


ISLAND  OF  NEW  CALFDONTA. 


203 


as  you  please  with  them.’  Upon  which,  the  man  himself 
took  them  up.  and  cast  them  into  the  fire,  and  they  were 
consumed.”  Taunga  continues  : “ The  name  of  this  man  is 
Kai  ; he  received  into  his  house  Mataio,  the  first  teacher 
who  landed  in  1841.  His  son  is  a good  young  man,  and  is 
dilisrent  in  making  known  the  word  of  God  whenever  he 
meets  his  fellow-countrymen.  He  has  not  yet  learned  to 
read,  but  he  remembers  what  he  hears  on  the  Sabbath-day, 
and  this  he  makes  known  to  others.  His  name  is  Kiamo.” 

While  the  truths  of  Christianity  were  thus  evidently 
taking  hold  on  some  of  the  people  of  New  Caledonia,  Satan, 
by  the  agencies  of  heathen  and  idolatrous  superstitions, 
raised  a fearful  persecution.  The  chiefs  and  priests  of  the 
heathen  party  surrounded  the  settlement,  where  the  teachers 
resided,  for  the  purpose  of  war.  The  people  of  this  place 
gave  themselves  to  prayer,  one  of  whom  was  heard  to  use 
the  following  language  in  private  : — 

“ O God,  my  new  God,  Jehovah,  I call  to  thee.  I and 
my  people  now  look  to  thee.  With  thee  is  power;  with 
thee  is  love.  We  look  to  thee  to  save  us.  Besides  thee 
there  is  no  true  God.  On  thee  we  trust.  Oh,  save  us !” 

Subsequently,  a fight  took  place  between  the  two  tribes ; 
many  natives  on  both  sides  were  killed,  but  those  who  were 
spared  of  the  Christian  party  remained  firm  in  their  attach- 
ment to  the  gospel. 

About  this  time  a comet  was  seen  night  after  night,  rising 
higher  and  higher  over  their  land.  From  time  immemorial 
these  long-tailed  stars  had  been  omens  of  disease,  and  war, 
and  death,  among  the  people;  and  strange  to  say,  just  as 
the  comet  now  seen  became  visible  on  New  Caledonia,  a very 
general  and  fatal  sickness  broke  out  among  the  people.  The 
heathen  party,  supposing  it  to  be  the  fire  of  Jehovah,  vowed 
vengeance  on  the  teachers  of  the  new  religion,  and  com- 
bined all  their  forces  to  extirpate  both  them  and  their  con- 
verts. 


204 


OEMS  FROM  TOE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


On  the  Isle  of  Pines  there  lived  a dominant  tribe,  whose 
chief,  Mathuku,  was  one  of  the  most  wild,  savage,  despotic 
men  known,  even  in  Polynesia.  He  had  frequently  sent  his 
messengers  to  the  natives  of  the  district  where  the  teachers 
lived,  demanding  that  they  should  be  put  to  death.  Find- 
ing his  orders  were  not  obeyed,  he  sent  his  last  command, 
saying,  “ If  you  do  not  kill  the  Samoan  and  Rarotongan  men, 
I will  come  and  kill  them  and  you  too.”  With  this  inten- 
tion he  came,  followed  by  a large  number  of  his  warriors, 
all  of  whom  were  armed  with  clubs  and  spears  for  battle. 

Giving  an  account  of  these  circumstances,  Taunga  says: 
“ The  people  of  our  settlement  wished  us  to  flee  to  the 
mountains  and  hide  ourselves;  but  we  said,  ‘No;  Jesus  is 
our  mountain,  we  will  fly  to  him.’  On  the  day  appointed, 
it  was  arranged  that  nine  or  ten  of  the  heathen  savages 
should  come  to  the  teachers’  house,  and  commence  an  angry 
discussion  about  the  resurrection  of  the  dead.  As  the  dis- 
cussion advanced,  one  of  the  party,  pointing  to  some  graves 
near,  demanded  of  the  teachers,  in  an  angry  tone  of  voice, 
‘ When  will  these  men  live  again  V With  mingled  positive- 
ness and  kindness,  the  teachers  replied,  ‘ They  will  live 
again  at  the  end  of  the  world.  Jesus,  the  Son  of  God,  will 
come,  and  all  who  have  lived  will  live  again,  and  will  be 
judged ; those  who  love  him  will  then  live  with  him  in 
heaven  for  ever,  but  those  who  love  him  not  will  live  in 
everlasting  fire.’  ‘ By  this  we  know  you  are  deceivers,’  re- 
joined the  heathen;  ‘and  we  are  going  to  kill  you.  You 
are  liars.’  Upon  this,  four  men  rushed  forward,  armed  with 
hatchets;  one  of  them  seized  Noa’s  right  arm  in  his  left 
hand,  and  raised  his  hatchet  to  strike  the  fatal  blow. 
Another  stood  behind  Taunga,  with  his  weapon  over  the 
head  of  his  intended  victim.  * The  teachers  bowed  their 


* For  a more  particular  account  of  this  scene,  see  “ The  New  He- 
brides,” a little  volume  published  by  the  Board.  Editor. 


ISLAND  OF  NEW  CALEDONIA. 


205 


heads  aud  calmly  resigned  themselves  into  the  hands  of  God. 
All  was  ready.  It  was  as  though  the  deed  was  already 
done.  But,  strange  to  relate,  the  man  at  whose  nod  the 
hatchets  were  to  fall,  silently  signified,  ‘Not  yet;’  and  the 
solemn  crisis  turned  in  favour  of  the  devoted  teachers.  A 
positive,  yet  unseen  Power  was  there.  The  company  dis- 
persed, and  the  ‘ men  of  Jehovah  ’ were  left  under  the  ex- 
perience of  emotions  similar  to  those  of  him  who  said  in 
former  days,  ‘ Now  I know  that  God  hath  sent  his  angel, 
and  hath  delivered  me  out  of  the  hand  of  Herod.’  ” 

We  would  that  the  missionary  ship  could  have  visited  this 
island  just  as  this  great  conflict  began ; but  this  was  not 
the  case.  Many  months  passed  away  before  it  was  again 
off  its  shores;  and  when  it  did  arrive,  persecution  and  dis- 
tress had  increased  so  much  that  it  was  not  deemed  safe  to 
leave  the  teachers.  They  were  quite  willing  to  remain — 
yea,  they  wept  much  on  being  taken  on  board  the  ship  ; but 
being  assured  that  the  heathen  party  had  fully  made  up 
their  minds  to  murder  them,  the  missionary  did  not  see  it 
his  duty  to  consent  to  their  remaining  on  shore. 

Subsequent  events  justified  our  worst  apprehensions  re- 
specting the  heathen  tribes  of  this  group.  Soon  after  the 
removal  of  the  teachers,  the  people  of  the  Isle  of  Pines 
maintained  a desperate  war  with  those  of  the  southern  por- 
tion of  New  Caledonia;  they  slew  nearly  the  whole  of  the 
persons  who  had  professed  attachment  to  Christianity,  and 
the  warriors  were  seen  by  a captain  of  a whaling-ship,  who 
had  gone  to  the  island,  returning  to  their  homes  in  all  the 
horrid  revelling  of  heathen  victory,  with  the  skulls  of  the 
slain  stuck  on  high  poles,  and  their  fingers,  in  almost  end- 
less number,  hung  on  strings  around  the  necks  of  the  war- 
riors of  the  conquering  tribe. 

As  we  approached  the  shores  of  this  land  on  the  next 
missionary  visit,  having  on  board  the  banished  teachers,  and 
18 


206 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


still  desirous  to  renew  our  attempts  to  bless  its  people,  all 
was  silence  and  desolation.  As  we  advanced  near  shore,  we 
discovered  that  the  entire  settlement  had  been  destroyed  by 
fire;  the  grass,  the  bush,  and  even  the  lofty  cocoa-nut  trees, 
were  yet  black  as  coal,  and  not  a single  native  was  seen. 
Some  distance  inland,  the  smoke  of  a single  fire  was  ascend- 
ing, which  confirmed  our  opinion  that  the  district  was  yet 
in  the  hands  of  the  enemy,  and  that  they  were  lurking  in 
secret  in  order  to  decoy  us  on  shore. 

We  had  on  board  two  Christian  youths,  natives  of  New 
Caledonia,  who  had  followed  the  teachers  when  they  left  the 
island.  Poor  fellows  ! with  the  teachers,  they  sobbed  aloud, 
and  refused  to  be  comforted  when  they  found  we  were  not 
able  to  land. 

The  circumstances  of  the  ship  had  now  become  dangerous. 
In  the  morning  of  the  day,  while  the  tide  was  high,  we  had 
sailed  over  a sunken  reef,  which  extends  seven  or  eight 
miles  from  the  land,  and  now  that  the  tide  was  ebbing  we 
saw  breakers  astern  of  us.  To  have  remained  the  night 
here  would  have  increased  our  danger,  owing  to  the  known 
hostility  of  the  natives;  but  how  to  get  out  in  open  sea 
again  was  our  difficulty.  Sunken  reefs  and  rocks  were  all 
around  us ; a contrary  wiud  and  current  were  fast  taking 
us  into  further  danger.  We  had  tacked  about  several  times, 
but  could  make  no  headway  windward  towards  the  end  of 
the  far-extending  reef ; and  for  some  time  our  circumstances 
justified  the  most  appalling  apprehensions.  Just  at  this 
time,  in  the  very  crisis  of  our  extremity,  a sharp  squall  blew 
over  us,  in  which  the  wind  shifted  a few  points,  and  by 
which  our  safety  was  secured. 

In  1852,  the  Bishop  of  New  Zealand  visited  New  Cale- 
donia, and  he  was  then  much  gratified  in  reporting  a more 
peaceful  state  of  the  tribes.  One  of  the  principal  chiefs  of 
the  island  urged  a lengthened  stay,  in  order  to  be  instructed. 


ISLAND  OF  NEW  CALEDONIA. 


207 


The  decks  of  his  little  missionary  vessel  were  crowded  night 
and  day  by  natives,  who  were  not  only  friendly,  but  anxious 
to  be  instructed,  and  urgently  requested  that  an  English 
missionary  might  come  and  reside  with  them. 

Before,  however,  this  could  be  secured  to  them,  the 
French  Government  had  taken  possession  of  the  land,  and 
now  number  it  amongst  their  possessions  in  the  Pacific. 
How  far  this  possession  will  prevent  any  Protestant  mission- 
ary society  in  England  or  the  Australian  colonies  from  again 
making  attempts  to  instruct  the  natives,  has  yet  to  be  seen. 
But,  whatever  may  be  the  future  history  of  this  land,  the 
self-denying  labours  of  our  Christian  teachers  there  will  never 
be  forgotten  ; whatever  of  light,  or  docility,  or  desire  for  in- 
struction its  inhabitants  now  manifest,  is  the  result  of  those 
labours ; and  we  have  knowledge  of  not  a few  of  them  who 
have  been  subdued,  instructed,  and  sanctified,  and  who  are 
amongst  the  spiritual  gems  of  Christ’s  kingdom,  representa- 
tives of  their  respective  tribes,  and  rich  rewards  for  mission- 
ary enterprise  in  the  islands  of  the  South  Sea. 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS, 


20S 


NATIVE  OF  NEW  CALEDONIA. 


THE  ISLE  OF  PINES. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

Its  position  and  political  importance  to  New  Caledonia. — Missionary  visit 
in  the  ship  Camden — Favourable  intercourse  with  the  people  in 
184.2 — An  idol  temple  converted  into  a house  of  prayer  to  Jehovah — • 
Circumstances  of  a religious  service — Savage  character  of  its  heathen 
chief — The  people  bring  presents  of  food  to  the  missionary  vessel — ■ 
Desire  for  an  English  missionary — First  intercourse  of  the  people 
with  sandal-wood  traders — Subsequent  troubles — Massacre  of  the 
native  teachers — Devoted  heroism  of  a Christian  mother. 

The  Isle  of  Pines  is  a small  but  important  island, 
about  thirty  miles  from  the  north-east  end  of  New  Cale- 
donia. It  is  rather  low,  having  but  one  volcanic  looking 
mountain,  which  rises  about  the  centre  of  the  island,  and  from 
which  the  land  gradually  slopes  towards  the  sea.  Much  of 
the  land  is  covered  with  beautiful  pine  trees,  from  which  cir- 
cumstance Captain  Cook  gave  it  its  present  name;  the  native 
name  of  the  island  is  Korie.  For  some  time  past  it  has 
been  one  of  the  principal  sandal-wood  depots,  and  may  be 
called  the  seat  of  political  power  for  the  south  end  of  New 
Caledonia. 

The  mission-vessel  Camden,  conducted  by  the  Rev. 
18  * ( 20(J  ) 


210 


GEMS  FROM  THF.  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Thomas  Heath,  just  five  months  after  the  murder  of  Messrs. 
Williams  and  Harris,  visited  this  island  and  succeeded  in 
landing  two  native  Christian  teachers  amongst  its  people. 
After  twelve  months’  residence,  they  were  found  to  have 
made  considerable  advance  in  the  language,  and  most  of  the 
people  understood  the  real  object  they  had  in  view. 

The  missionary  ship  had  cast  auchor  in  a very  fine  bay, 
opposite  the  principal  station,  where  the  chief  resided;  and 
having  received  favourable  reports  from  the  teachers,  the 
missionaries,  with  their  wives,  went  on  shore.  These  Eng- 
lish ladies  were  the  first  that  had  ever  set  foot  on  the  Isle  of 
Pines,  and  were  the  subjects  of  no  little  surprise  and  amuse- 
ment to  the  natives. 

The  chief,  with  a number  of  his  people,  met  the  mission- 
ary party  on  landing,  and  was  evidently  pleased  to  be  their 
guide  to  his  inland  house.  On  reaching  it,  they  were  told 
that  the  building  had  been,  in  the  days  of  their  ignorance, 
appropriated  to  the  worship  of  the  idols  ; “ but  now,”  they 
said,  “ since  we  have  known  the  true  God,  we  have  destroyed 
our  idols,  and  worship  him  here.”  This  was  good ; but  the 
missionaries  seeing  a great  number  of  females  outside  the 
building,  inquired  why  they  did  notenter;  when  they  were 
told  that  it  was  a sacred  place,  and  that  females  had  never 
entered  within  its  walls.  This  led  to  an  exposition  of  the 
wickedness  and  injustice  of  this  heathen  practice,  which 
ended  in  an  invitation  being  given  to  all  the  women  outside 
to  enter  in.  This,  however,  they  did  very  reluctantly,  as  if 
they  did  not  really  believe  the  invitation  was  sincere.  The 
presence  and  kind  attentions  of  the  English  missionary  wives 
at  length  inspired  them  with  confidence,  and  numbers  of 
them  got  inside. 

The  old  chief  was  a thorough  heathen  despot,  and  although 
he  had  given  his  protection  to  the  teachers,  and  had  re- 
nounced some  of  his  heathen  practices,  yet  he  was  still  a 


ISLAND  OF  PINES. 


211 


savage  cannibal  man.  He  was,  moreover,  desirous  to  make 
an  impression,  respecting  his  authority,  ou  the  minds  ot‘  the 
visitors.  Iu  order  to  attain  this  object,  and  to  have  due 
respect  shown  him,  each  individual,  in  passing  him,  was 
ordered  to  do  so  in  a crouching  position.  Some  of  the 
poople  did  not  bow  sufficiently  low  to  please  the  savage 
tyrant,  upon  which,  to  the  surprise  and  alarm  of  the  mis- 
sionaries and  their  wives,  he  rushed  upon  the  offenders  and 
beat  them  most  unmercifully  with  his  club.  One  of  his  sons, 
too,  came  to  his  assistance,  and  freely  used  his  club  also  among 
the  people  ; so  that  a sad  uproar  prevailed,  and  the  foreign 
visitors  did  not  feel  very  comfortable ; they  were  quite  in  the 
power  of  the  savages,  and  the  scenes  now  acted  led  them  to 
apprehend  danger.  The  chief,  perceiving  their  alarm,  begged 
the  teachers  to  speak  to  their  friends  and  allay  their  fears. 

Order  having  been  obtained,  the  chief  requested  that  a 
religious  service  should  be  conducted,  iu  complying  with 
which,  one  of  the  missionaries  gave  an  address  from  the 
words,  <l  Unto  you  is  the  word  of  this  salvation  sent,”  which 
was  interpreted  by  one  of  the  teachers.  The  people  listened 
with  attention,  and  were  evidently  interested.  After  this 
service,  a long  train  of  the  people  followed  the  missionaries 
to  the  boat,  and  they  went  on  board  for  the  night. 

On  the  following  morning  the  people  brought  large  pre- 
sents of  sugar-cane,  bananas,  yams,  and  other  articles,  and 
their  whole  deportment  manifested  a desire  to  show  a friend- 
ly feeling.  The  old  chief  more  than  once  expressed  a desire 
that  foreign  missionaries  should  come  and  take  up  their 
abode  with  him.  In  this  he  was  evidently  sincere,  and 
could  it  have  been  accomplished  then,  or  soon  after,  we 
should  doubtless  have  been  spared  the  painful  events  which 
have  subsequently  occurred  on  the  island  to  blight  our 
former  hopes.  On  being  asked  whether  he  would  pro- 
tect missiouarios  and  their  property,  if  they  came  to  live 


212 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


with  his  people,  the  chief  was  much  grieved  at  the  im- 
plied suspicion,  and  under  some  excitement  retorted,  “If  a 
foreign  ship  has  been  here,  and  been  repaired,  and  left  with- 
out injury;  if  a canoe  of  strange  natives  from  Tonga  has 
been  cast  on  our  shore,  and  remained  uninjured,  is  it  likely 
that  we  shall  kill  or  injure  missionaries?” 

“ A soft  answer  turneth  away  wrath,”  and  a few  quiet 
words  calmed  the  irritated  feelings  of  the  chief.  He  was 
assured  that  the  missionaries  had  confidence  in  the  sincerity 
of  his  professions ; reminding  him  of  the  fact  of  their  having 
spent  the  best  part  of  two  days  on  shore  with  him,  and  his 
people.  He  was  promised  that  an  appeal  should  be  made  to 
England  without  delay,  for  an  English  missionary  to  come 
out  to  take  the  superintendence  of  the  Isle  of  Pines,  and 
also  with  a view  to  sustain  the  mission  in  New  Caledonia. 

Such  were  the  more  than  ordinary  encouraging  circum- 
stances of  the  first  year’s  mission  on  this  island,  and  but  for 
adverse  influences  brought  to  bear  on  the  people  by  sandal- 
wood expeditions,  we  should  long  ere  this  have  had  flourish- 
ing Christian  stations  there.  But  things  of  most  contrary 
character  are  sometimes  mysteriously  linked  together  in  this 
world;  means  innocently  employed  by  good  men,  bringing 
about  evil  results,  as  unlooked  for  as  they  are  to  be  deplored. 
So  it  has  been  in  the  history  of  the  Isle  of  Pines. 

On  one  of  the  first  visits  of  the  missionary  ship,  the  Cam- 
den, it  was  discovered  that  sandal-wood  grew  in  great  abun- 
dance on  the  island  ; and  one  of  the  crew,  knowing  something 
of  its  value,  took  means  to  secrete  a few  billets  of  it  in  his 
chest;  and  on  his  arrival  in  Sydney,  he  made  it  known  to 
parties  who  were  prepared,  at  any  expense,  to  embark  a 
commercial  enterprise  in  its  trade.  A number  of  vessels 
were  fitted  out,  the  services  of  the  party  referred  to  were 
secured,  and  the  quiet  little  island,  hitherto  almost  unknown, 
became  a scene  of  premature  bustle  aud  excitement ; and  in 


ISLAND  OF  PINKS. 


213 


instances  not  a few,  the  pride,  and  covetousness,  and  immo- 
rality and  revenge  of  the  heathen  people  were  perpetuated 
and  increased  before  the  corrective  influences  of  Christianity 
had  been  brought  to  bear  on  the  mass  of  the  population. 

While,  however,  we  were  yet  hoping  to  overtake  these 
evils  by  native  Christian  agency,  by  moie  frequent  visita- 
tion, and  ultimately  by  the  residence  of  an  English  mission- 
ary, a disastrous  circumstance  occurred  which  frustrated  our 
plans  in  reference  to  the  island. 

It  has  been  reported  by  some  of  the  teachers  that  a white 
man,  who  had  been  living  on  one  of  the  Samoan  islands,  and 
who  had  gained  a knowledge  of  the  Samoan  language,  was 
on  board  a sandal-wood  ship  as  one  of  the  crew ; that  he 
wrote  a letter  in  the  Samoan  language,  purporting  to  be 
written  by  the  missionaries,  which  letter  gave  instructions 
to  the  teachers  to  assist  the  captain  in  filling  the  vessel  with 
sandal-wood.  By  this  means  the  teachers,  in  the  eyes  of 
the  people,  got  more  or  less  directly  connected  with  the  deeds 
of  the  foreigners.  On  this  occasion  some  difficulties  occurred 
between  the  natives  and  the  traders,  and  the  natives  became 
so  enraged  that  they  ordered  the  teachers  to  leave  their 
shores,  and  revealed  their  intention  to  be  revenged  on  the 
foreigners  by  destroying  their  ship. 

An  opportunity  too  soon  occurred  for  them  to  carry  out 
their  purpose,  and  in  order  not  to  be  suspected,  they  took  off 
to  the  vessel  a quantity  of  good  sandal-wood,  carrying  with 
them  their  adzes  which  they  use  in  dressing  the  wood.  The 
wood  pleased  all  on  board,  and  was  immediately  bought,  and 
the  natives  were  allowed  to  remain  on  board,  to  grind  their 
adzes.  One  of  the  crew  was  turning  the  grindstone,  and  the 
captain  stood  close  by,  when  at  a given  moment,  the  native 
swung  round  his  adze,  and  struck  the  captain  dead  on  the 
spot,  and  in  a few  minutes  seventeen  of  the  crew  were  killed, 
most  of  whose  bodies  were  devoured  bv  the  infuriated  savages 


214 


flEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


in  a cannibal  feast.  The  ship  was  then  stripped  of  sails  and 
rigging,  everything  was  taken  out  of  the  cabins,  and  then 
they  destroyed  her  by  fire. 

It  was  in  this  awful  massacre  that  our  three  excellent 
Christian  teachers  were  murdered,  and  our  mission  on  the 
Isle  of  Pines  broken  up.  We  have  no  doubt  whatever  that 
the  whole  affair,  as  far  as  the  teachers  are  concerned,  was 
the  result  of  misunderstanding;  but  it  had  been  vain,  soon 
after  the  above  tragedy,  to  have  sought  access  again  for 
missionary  operations.  There  is,  however,  at  the  present 
time  reason  to  hope  that  the  people,  through  our  successes 
on  Mare  and  Lifu,  are  now  better  acquainted  with  our  plans 
and  aims,  and  more  fully  understand  the  difference  which 
exists  between  the  Christian  teacher  and  the  white  merchant- 
man. But  how  far  the  occupation  of  New  Caledonia  by  the 
French  may  prevent  further  attempts  to  recommence  our 
labours  there,  we  cannot  at  present  say. 

Captain  Erskine,  of  H.M.S.  Havana,  who  had  a long 
and  somewhat  favourable  opportunity  of  knowing  the  people 
during  his  cruise  about  those  lands,  says: — “ It  is  to  be  re- 
gretted that  attempts  to  christianize  the  people  of  this  is- 
land have  not  been  renewed  by  the  London  Mission,  who 
first  occupied  the  ground.  They  are  certainly  not  behind 
any  in  intelligence.  They  are  ready  to  embark  on  board 
English  vessels  where  they  not  only  quickly  acquire  our 
lansuase,  but  are  said  to  make  excellent  seamen.  One  lad 
served  for  more  than  a year  on  board  the  Bramble,  and  was 
considered  as  efficient  as  any  of  the  crew.” 

In  closing  this  short  yet  painfully  interesting  account  of 
missionary  efforts  on  the  Isle  of  Pines,  it  will  be  gratifying 
to  the  Christian  to  know  that  we  have  on  Rarotonga  and 
other  islands,  a noble  band  of  devoted  men,  who  are  in 
heart  and  mind  ready  and  willing  to  land  on  the  blood  stained 
shores  where  their  brethren  fell,  as  soon  as  Providence  may 
open  up  the  way. 


ISLAND  OF  PINES. 


215 


One  of  the  Rarotongan  teachers,  who  fell  on  the  Isle  of 
Pines,  was  called  Rangi.  He  wa3  the  only  child  of  his 
widowed  mother.  She  had  at  some  sacrifice,  being  a poor 
woman,  willingly  given  him  up  to  the  cause  of  Christ  and 
of  his  gospel.  When  information  reached  us  respecting 
her  son’s  murder  by  the  heathen,  I well  remember  the  he- 
roic Christian  devotedness  of  her  heart.  She  wept,  and 
wept  much,  as  any  mother  would  weep ; but  after  the  first 
burst  of  her  distressed  heart  had  been  relieved,  she  tried  to 
wipe  away  the  tears  as  they  involuntarily  rolled  down  her 
cheeks,  and  she  said,  “ It  is  not  wrong  to  weep,  for  he  was 
my  son  ; but  I do  not  weep  tears  of  sorrow  for  him.  No; 
my  Rangi  is  with  Jesus  : he  has  fought  a good  fight ; he  is 
crowned  by  his  King  in  glory.  Oh,  that  I had  another  son 
to  give ! I would  give  him  up,  to  go  and  land  amongst  the 
very  men  who  murdered  my  Rangi.  They  are  dark  as  we 
were  before  we  understood  the  word  of  God.  I have 
not  another  son ; but  his  cousin  is  with  me.  I will  go  home 
and  talk  to  him  about  the  poor  heathen,  and  pray  that  he 
may  be  raised  up  to  teach  the  men  who  murdered  my  son.” 
This  excellent  Christian  woman,  who  was  one  of  the  first 
converts  to  Christianity  on  Rarotonga,  went  home,  talked 
with  Rangi’s  cousin,  and  prayed  for  the  salvation  of  the 
heathen.  God  has  heard  her  prayers,  and  this  young  man 
is  now  one  of  the  most  intelligent,  pious,  active  young  men 
on  our  mission  premises ; he  has  endorsed  the  vows  of  his 
aunt,  and  is  burning  with  holy  desire  to  fulfil  her  purpose, 
and  to  be  taken  to  preach  the  gospel  of  reconciliation  to  the 
very  men  who  murdered  her  Rangi. 


216 


GEMS  FROM  TIIE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


NATIVES  AND  VOLCANO. — TANA, 


THE  ISLAND  OF  TANA. 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 

One  of  the  largest  islands  in  western  Polynesia — Its  cultivated  and  fer- 
tile soil — Its  large  active  volcano — Natural  degradation  of  the  peo- 
ple— Their  diversity  of  language — Christian  teachers  landed — 
European  missionaries  reside  with  the  people,  1842 — Hopeful  pro- 
gress among  the  people  of  one  tribe — Persecution  oommenced  by 
the  heathen  priesthood — Superstitious  notions  respecting  the  mis- 
sion printing-press — Prevalence  of  a fatal  epidemic — Trying  cir- 
cumstances of  danger  to  the  mission  family — In  peril,  they  escape 
to  sea  in  a boat — Are  driven  back  by  contrary  winds — Another 
attempt  on  their  lives — -Merciful  arrival  of  a ship — The  missionaries 
leave  for  Samoa. 

Tana  is  the  largest  island  in  the  southern  portion  of  the 
New  Hebrides  group,  and  we  doubt  not,  that  when  its  na- 
tural and  physical  resources  are  developed,  it  will  hold  an 
important  civil  and  commercial  position  amidst  the  groups 
of  western  Polynesia.  It  is  situated  about  thirty  miles  to 
the  west  of  Aneiteum,  and  is  from  eighty  to  one  hundred 
miles  in  circumference.  Captain  Cook,  its  discoverer,  was 
much  pleased  with  its  appearance,  and  impressed  with  its 
importance.  It  has  numerous  and  lofty  mountains  in  the 
interior,  and  large  tracts  of  lowland  round  the  coast.  The 
19  (217) 


218 


GEMS  FROM  TITF.  CORAE  TSLANDS. 


soil  is  exceedingly  fertile.  Even  the  highest  mountains  are 
covered  with  the  richest  vegetation  to  their  very  summits. 
The  cocoa-nut,  bread-fruit,  and  bananas  are  neither  so  plen- 
tiful nor  so  good  as  on  the  eastern  islands;  but  the  sugar- 
cane, sweet-potato,  taro,  fig-tree,  and  yams,  are  not  only 
plentiful,  but  superior  in  quality  : some  of  the  yams  sold  by 
the  natives  to  ships,  have  been  three  feet  in  length,  and 
more  than  forty  pounds  in  weight. 

The  most  interesting  natural  object  on  the  island,  is  a 
large  active  volcano,  the  crater  of  which  forms  the  top  of  a 
comparatively  low  mountain,  about  three  or  four  miles  inland 
from  Port  Resolution.  This  mountain  is  held  in  great 
veneration  by  the  people,  and  its  precincts  inhabited  by  the 
principal  men  of  the  idolatrous  priesthood  of  the  island. 
Its  burning  elements,  always  vomiting  up  vast  quantities  of 
fire  and  smoke,  are  sometimes  exceedingly  troubled,  causing 
a deep,  long,  rumbling  noise,  like  the  roar  of  distant  heavy 
thunder,  which  is  followed  by  prodigious  columns  of  lurid 
blaze,  and  casting  up  of  great  burning  stones  into  the  air. 
At  the  base  of  this  mountain  there  are  many  hot-springs  of 
sulphurous  water,  in  which  the  mercury  in  Fahrenheit’s 
thermometer  rises  to  190°  or  200°.  Pure  sulphur  is  found 
in  vast  quantities  near  these  springs,  and  the  water  is  used 
by  the  natives  for  cooking  their  food. 

The  moral  and  social  condition  of  the  people  of  Tana  is  much 
the  same  as  that  of  the  people  of  Aneiteum  during  the  time 
of  their  heathenism.  “ The  men  are  generally  of  short  stature, 
but  muscular  and  athletic  for  their  size ; the  colour  of  their 
skin  is  a slimy  black,  and  their  bodies  are  covered  thickly  with 
hair  or  a kind  of  down.  The  nose  is  generally  flat;  the  eyes 
of  chocolate  colour,  and  their  ears  are  pierced,  having  flat 
rings  of  tortoise-shell  and  other  ornaments  hanging  from 
them.”  They  have  no  clothing,  but  roam  about  in  a com- 
plete state  of  nudity.  The  women  wear  a petticoat  of  leaves, 


ISLAND  OF  TANA. 


219 


which  gives  them  a more  decent  appearance  than  we  see  on 
some  of  the  islands.  The  island  of  Tana  is  inhabited  by  a 
greater  number  of  different  tribes  than  we  have  found  on 
any  other  island ; and  is  confounded  by  several  radically 
different  languages,  so  different  that  the  people  of  one  dis- 
trict cannot  understand  those  of  another.  Their  idolatry, 
heathen  practices,  war,  and  cannibalism,  are  inveterate  in 
the  extreme. 

Any  native  going  beyond  the  boundary  of  his  own  tribe, 
is  in  peril  of  his  life.  Some  little  time  after  the  location  of 
Christian  teachers  on  the  island,  two  young  men  stole  their 
way  to  a spot  where  they  might  see  the  harbour,  in  order  to 
have  a view  of  a foreign  vessel  laying  at  anchor ; but  they 
were  discovered  by  the  savages  to  whom  the  harbour  dis- 
trict belongs,  and  were  murdered,  and  their  bodies  eaten  by 
the  cannibals. 

This  island  was  the  first  in  western  Polynesia  visited  by 
the  Christian  teachers.  The  Rev.  John  Williams,  the  day 
before  his  lamented  fall  on  Eromanga,  called  here  and  had 
intercourse  with  the  people.  He  found  it  difficult  to  con- 
vey to  them  any  correct  idea  of  his  object,  their  language 
being  so  perfectly  different  from  those  of  the  eastern  islands, 
which  he  knew.  In  presenting  to  the  chief  three  teachers 
whom  he  wished  to  be  received  by  them,  he  succeeded  in 
making  them  understand  that  they  were  “ men  of  Jehovah,” 
the  foreigners’  God.  The  chief  consented  to  receive  the 
teachers,  to  treat  them  kindly,  and  to  listen  to  their  instruc- 
tions. So  great  was  the  desire  of  the  people  to  retain  the 
strangers,  that  when  it  was  proposed  that  they  should  go  to 
the  ship  for  their  luggage,  they  manifested  much  anxiety 
lest  they  would  not  return,  and  could  only  be  satisfied  by 
having  two  other  teachers  left  on  shore  as  hostages,  and  by 
allowing  the  presents  which  they  had  brought  to  the  ship, 
to  remain  on  the  beach  until  their  appointed  teachers  came 


220 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAH  ISLANDS. 


back.  All  things  being  got  ready,  the  three  excellent 
teachers  were  then  landed  on  Tana,  to  make  it  their  future 
home,  and  with  the  sole  view  of  teaching  its  inhabitants  the 
truths  of  Christianity,  as  a means  to  their  enlightenment, 
civilization,  and  salvation.  It  was  in  reference  to  this  island, 
and  to  these  circumstances,  that  Mr.  Williams  wrote  his  last 
lines,  as  follows  : “ Thus  terminated  one  of  the  most  inter- 
esting visits  we  have  ever  yet  been  privileged  to  have  with  a 
heathen  people  in  their  barbarous  and  savage  state,  when 
taking  to  them  the  word  of  life;  and  none,  perhaps,  mani- 
fested a more  friendly  demeanour  to  strangers  such  as  we 
were  among  them.” 

“ When  will  you  come  back  ?”  inquired  the  excited  na- 
tives, as  Williams  left  their  shore;  “When  will  you  come 
back  ? ” Alas  ! the  events  of  the  next  day  gave  a melancholy 
reply.  These  events  occasioned  a long  delay  of  the  mission- 
ary vessel’s  return,  which,  together  with  the  unfavourable 
influence  of  other  vessels  that  had  visited  the  island,  pro- 
duced a prejudicial  impression  on  the  minds  of  the  peo- 
ple, and  gave  time  for  evils  to  grow  which  have  not  yet 
been  fully  overcome.  Two  of  the  teachers  soon  fell  victims 
to  the  climate,  and  on  the  second  visit  of  the  missionaries, 
it  was  discovered  that  other  islands  of  the  group  would,  in 
all  probability,  yield  a harvest  of  reward  before  Tana.  The 
great  number  of  distinct  tribes  into  which  the  people  were 
divided,  the  diversities  of  their  languages,  their  supersti- 
tions respecting  disease,  and  the  envy  and  rage  of  the  hea- 
then priesthood  were  felt  to  be  formidable  difficulties, 
which,  together  with  the  importance  of  the  island,  and  its 
probable  early  occupation  by  sandal-wood  traders,  led  us  to 
desire  that  without  delay  it  should  be  made  a principal  sta- 
tion by  the  residence  of  English  missionaries.  With  these 
views  the  Directors  of  the  London  Missionary  Society  sym- 
pathized, and  appointed  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Turner  and  Nisbet 


ISLAND  OF  TANA. 


221 


to  the  island,  who,  with  their  wives,  landed  in  1842,  under 
circumstances  of  some  hope,  not  however  wholly  unshadowed 
by  clouds  of  approaching  trial  and  disappointment.  These 
trials,  however,  they  were  willing  to  endure,  hoping  thereby 
to  secure  the  present  and  eternal  welfare  of  the  people. 

Recording  their  first  interview  with  the  people,  the  de- 
voted missionaries  say  : — “ After  landing  without  hesitation 
or  alarm,  we  wished  the  principal  people  of  the  district  to 
come  together.  They  did  so,  and  we  explained  to  them  the 
object  we  had  in  coming  among  them ; this  they  seemed  to 
understand,  and  promised  to  hold  our  lives  and  property 
secure  from  injury.  We  have,  however,  reason  to  fear  that 
avarice  and  pride  are  the  ruling  motives  of  their  minds,  but 
by  the  divine  blessing  even  these  may  be  overruled  for  good. 
Poor  creatures ! they  are  indeed  in  a degraded  state ; but 
naked,  painted  savages,  as  they  now  are,  we  look  upon  them 
with  the  deepest  interest  and  compassion.” 

With  devoted  heart  and  active  hands,  the  brethren  ap- 
plied themselves  to  the  arduous  and  self-denying  labours  of 
their  station,  and  in  three  months  after  landing  they  had 
picked  up  sufficient  of  the  barbarous  language  to  make 
themselves  in  a measure  understood. 

For  a few  months  things  progressed  as  favourably  as  could 
be  expected,  but  it  was  not  long  before  troubles  and  dis- 
tresses accumulated  on  the  missionaries,  a detail  of  which 
cannot  fail  to  excite  Christian  pity,  love,  and  prayer. 

The  first  opposition  to  the  progress  of  Christian  instruc- 
tion was  raised  by  the  numerous  body  of  heathen  cannibal 
priests,  who  lived  in  the  vicinity  of  the  volcano.  They  saw 
that  as  the  word  of  Jehovah  was  attended  to,  they  were  no 
longer  either  feared,  or  honoured,  or  fed.  Feeling  this  to 
be  a hard  case,  they  were  aroused  by  Satanic  influence  to 
vow  death  to  the  servants  of  Jehovah.  To  accomplish  this 
purpose  they  made  several  daring  open  attempts,  from  which 

the  brethren  were  mercifully  preserved. 

19  * 


222 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


Another  exciting  cause  of  danger  to  the  missionaries,  was 
a wonder-working  little  printing-press  they  had  with  them, 
and  by  which  they  were  multiplying  books  in  the  language 
of  the  people.  At  this  time  books  were  looked  upon  by  the 
ignorant  people  as  the  voice  of  the  foreigners’  God,  and  the 
heathen  chiefs  and  priests  saw  that  as  the  people  attended 
to  the  books,  they  lightly  esteemed  what  they  formerly  held 
sacred ; hence  their  fear  and  their  rage  against  the  press, 
and  resolve  to  stop  its  work. 

In  addition  to  these  evils,  just  at  this  time  dysentery 
broke  out  and  raged  with  fatal  violence  among  the  tribes, 
leaving,  however,  the  immediate  district  where  the  mission- 
aries resided  wholly  unaffected.  This  significant  fact  in- 
duced the  heathen  priests  to  give  out  that  the  whole  cala- 
mity had  been  brought  upon  them  by  the  missionaries. 
Explanation,  truth,  and  kindness  were  resorted  to,  in  order 
to  disabuse  the  minds  of  the  poor  deluded  people ; but  all 
that  could  be  done  was  of  no  avail,  and  the  whole  of  the 
savage  tribes  made  a desperate  and  final  resolve  that  the  mis- 
sionaries should  either  leave  the  island  or  die.  Many  anxious 
days  and  nights  were  passed,  and  as  one  succeeded  another, 
danger  became  more  and  more  imminent.  The  enraged 
savages,  like  ravening  wolves,  were  collecting  all  their  forces, 
and  ev(^y  day  coming  nearer  to  the  mission  premises.  The 
little  party  of  friendly  natives  did  all  they  could  to  protect 
the  missionaries  from  harm,  but  they  were  very  few  in  num- 
ber, and  very  feeble.  At  length  even  these  lost  courage, 
and  the  two  devoted  missionaries,  with  their  wives,  accom- 
panied only  by  two  or  three  Samoan  native  teachers,  were 
left  to  suffer  alone. 

At  first  the  body  of  savage  warriors  proposed  to  the  tribe 
where  the  missionaries  were  living,  that  they  should  join  in 
the  attack.  This,  however,  they  refused ; but  before  any 
thing  could  be  done  by  the  enemy,  even  while  the  infuriated, 


ISLAND  OF  TANA. 


223 


» 


demon-spirited  men  were  in  the  very  act  of  getting  ready 
their  clubs  and  spears  to  accomplish  their  vile  purpose,  a 
sudden  and  violent  thunder-storm  broke  upon  them,  and  hur- 
ried their  proceedings  to  a close  that  day. 

During  the  following  night,  however,  a native  of  the 
favourable  party  was  killed,  and  war  was  declared.  “ Now 
we  will  fight  for  it,”  was  the  cry  of  both  parties.  It  was 
known  that  the  missionaries  had  in  their  possession  one 
formidable  defensive  weapon,  a single  gun  ; making  sure  of 
obtaining  this  as  a means  of  protection,  a few  of  the  kindly 
disposed  came  for  it.  “ No,  no  ! ” was  the  reply  of  the  mis- 
sionaries ; “ we  cannot  give  it  up.”  Strange  and  unaccount- 
able to  the  minds  of  the  natives  was  this  refusal.  Again 
and  again,  with  wonder-smitten  hearts,  they  asked  for  the 
gun ; but  “ No,  no  ! ” was  the  reply.  “We  dare  not  be  the 
cause  of  taking  away  life.  We  give  ourselves  to  Jehovah’s 
protection.  Live  or  die,  we  will  not  allow  you  to  use  the 
gun  on  our  account.” 

The  crisis  now  advanced.  Flames  of  burning  huts  and 
plantations  were  seen  all  around  them.  By  the  light  of  these 
flames  hundreds  of  wild,  naked,  savage  cannibals  were  seen 
advancing  nearer  and  still  nearer  to  the  mission-house.  It 
was  a night  of  agonizing  anxiety.  To  remain  was  certain 
death,  at  least  to  the  missionaries,  and  worse  than  death  to 
their  beloved  wives.  Alas  ! what  is  to  be  done  ? They  have 
one  boat ; to  this  they  flee  for  refuge,  and,  followed  by  the 
faithful  teachers  in  their  Samoan  canoe,  at  midnight  they 
put  to  sea.  About  thirty  miles  eastward  there  was  the 
island  of  Aneiteum,  where  they  might  gain  a temporary 
rest,  could  they  reach  it;  hut  the  contrary  winds  and 
waves  prevented  them  from  steering  to  that  island.  Ero- 
manga  was  to  the  north  of  them,  but  its  inhabitants  at  that 
time  would,  in  less  than  twenty-four  hours  after  lauding, 
have  devoured  their  bodies  in  a cannibal-feast.  The  only 


224 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


alternative  to  this,  appeared  to  be  a lingering  death  at  sea. 
Alas  ! in  such  trying  circumstances,  how  mysterious  do  the 
ways  of  Divine  Providence  appear  ! Wherefore  should  the 
heathen  be  permitted  to  say,  “Where  is  now  their  God?” 
But  under  such  trials  we  have,  in  the  calm,  firm,  yea,  happy 
confidence  of  Jehovah’s  servants,  no  less  an  evidence  of  his 
power  and  love,  than  we  could  have  in  a sudden  defeat  of 
their  foes. 

After  having  resolved  to  abide  at  sea  for  the  night,  the 
missionary  party  were  driven  from  their  purpose  by  a series 
of  contrary  squalls  of  wind,  which  compelled  them  to  return 
to  the  shores  of  Tana.  Faint  with  anxiety  and  toil,  they 
again  reached  their  house,  unobserved  by  the  natives,  about 
four  o’clock  in  the  morning.  At  daybreak,  however,  just  as 
they  had  finished  commending  themselves  to  God  by  prayer, 
and  had  asked  sustaining  grace  for  the  events  of  the  day,  a 
fiendish  yell  or  war-whoop  was  heard,  and  hundreds  of  the 
savages  close  upon  them ; but  for  an  hour  or  two  they  are 
kept  from  striking  the  fatal  blow,  and  in  an  unexpected 
moment,  shouts  of  “ Sail,  oh  ! sail,  oh  ! ” are  heard  from  a 
thousand  voices,  which  but  a moment  before  were  vocifera- 
ting death  and  destruction.  This  was  life  from  the  dead  to 
the  mission-party.  The  eye  of  their  unslumbering  Protector 
had  been  upon  them,  and  in  the  hour  of  extremity  he  hon- 
oured their  faith  and  rewarded  their  hope. 

The  ship  seen  off  the  island,  was  the  Highlander,  of  Ho- 
bart Town.  Communication  was  had  with  her,  and  her 
obliging  commander,  Captain  Lucas,  received  the  mission- 
aries on  board,  and  brought  them  to  Samoa. 

Thus,  for  a time  this  mission  was  abandoned.  There 
were  some  of  the  natives  who  knew  and  loved  the  mission- 
ary; but  the  heathen  who  rejected  Heaven’s  best  boon,  knew 
not  what  they  did.  Alas  ! for  them.  How  sad  have  been 
the  consequences  of  their  misguided  conduct ! 


CHAPTER  XXX. 


Native  Christians  mourn  the  departure  of  the  missionaries — Reoccupa- 
tion of  the  island  in  1845  by  native  teachers — Narrative  of  events 
• which  took  place  after  the  missionaries  left  the  island — Progressing 
success  of  the  mission — A chapel  built — Schools  formed — A season 
of  trial  in  sickness,  persecution,  and  death — Two  of  the  teachers 
die — One  teacher  is  murdered — Others  in  jeopardy — Teachers 
escape  on  board  a ship — A white  man  murdered — Teachers  return 
to  Tana — Subsequent  success — Two  letters  by  natives — Introduc- 
tion of  small-pox — Present  hopeful  state  of  the  island — Necessity 
for  English  missionaries. 

The  day  the  missionaries  left  Tana,  under  the  circum- 
stances recorded  in  the  preceding  chapter,  a goodly  number 
of  their  attached  people  followed  them  on  board  the  ship, 
to  “ weep  farewell for  they  sincerely  mourned  over  the 
causes  which  had  afflicted  their  teachers,  and  which  now 
caused  their  departure.  There  had  been  no  fighting  since 
the  arrival  of  the  ship,  but  it  was  evident  that  the  contest 
was  not  over.  Some  of  the  poor  natives,  in  their  ignorance, 
wished  the  captain  to  arm  the  men  of  his  vessel,  and  send 
them  on  shore  to  shoot  the  leaders  of  the  opposing  party. 
Finding  they  could  not  gain  this  point,  they  were  grieved, 
yea,  terrified  at  being  left  in  the  hands  of  their  ill-disposed 
countrymen.  “ They  implored  us,”  say  the  missionaries, 
“ notwithstanding  all  that  had  happened,  not  to  abandon 

( 225) 


226 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


them  entirely,  but  still  to  have  compassion  on  them.  This 
we  promised  to  do,  and  said  the  mission-ship  would  visit 
them  on  her  next  voyage.” 

More  than  two  years  passed  away  before  this  promise  could 
be  fulfilled.  On  the  arrival  of  the  John  Williams  from 
England,  in  1845,  on  her  first  voyage,  she  was  employed  in 
taking  back  the  Samoan  and  Rarotongan  teachers  to  Tana. 
Her  arrival  was  hailed  with  delight,  not  only  by  the 
remnant  of  the  Christians,  but  by  many  of  the  very  men 
who  had  excited  the  persecution  in  1848.  God  in  his 
providence,  had  created  a general  desire  for  the  teachers’ 
return  to  the  island.  The  war  of  persecution,  which  drove 
them  away,  had  terminated  in  favour  of  Christianity. 
The  fatal  epidemic  had  made  destructive  havoc,  after  the' 
teachers  left,  especially  among  the  heathen  tribes ; so  nu- 
merous were  their  dead  that  they  could  not  be  buried. 
Conviction  of  having  done  wrong,  wrought  powerfully  on 
the  minds  of  the  people ; they  held  the  missionaries’  house 
to  be  “ tapu,”  sacred, — strict  prohibitions  were  given  not 
to  take  any  property  left  by  the  teachers;  and  a few  of 
the  more  enlightened  met  together,  every  Sabbath-day,  for 
prayer  to  Jehovah,  and  for  religious  conversation.  Nothing 
was  known  of  the  condition  of  the  people  in  the  far  interior, 
but  the  above  was  the  favourable  state  of  things  in  the 
Bay : the  door  was  open,  and  a noble  band  of  teachers,  not 
only  willing  but  anxious  to  recommence  Christian  instruc- 
tion, were  landed,  and  being  commended  to  the  power  and 
love  of  Jesus,  were  again  left  among  the  people  of  Tana. 

Having  gained  so  favourable  an  introduction,  the  teachers 
applied  themselves  to  their  work  in  good  earnest.  They 
were  permitted  to  locate  themselves  in  three  or  four  villages 
in  the  mountain  district  round  the  Bay ; the  mission- 
lmuse,  built  by  the  English  missionaries,  at  the  principal 
station,  was  occupied  as  school-house  and  chapel,  and  a 
goodly  number  of  the  people  there  came  to  be  instructed. 


ISLAND  OF  TANA. 


227 


At  another  important  station,  also,  the  objects  of  the 
mission  soon  began  to  advance,  and  to  give  promise  of 
future  success.  Anxious  to  commence  daily  schools,  the 
teacher  here  had  a conference  with  the  people  on  the  sub- 
ject ; during  which  he  produced  some  books  in  their  lan- 
guage, and  said  that  he  wished  to  teach  both  the  adults  and 
children.  To  this  the  people  replied,  “That  the  missionary 
was  good — that  his  word  was  good,  but  that  they  were  afraid 
of  the  books ; it  was  the  books  that  caused  trouble  formerly.” 
Yielding  to  their  scruples,  they  were  left,  not  indeed  with- 
out hope  that  some  little  advance  had  been  made.  Some 
time  after,  another  conference  was  held  with  the  same 
people,  on  the  same  subject ; and  it  was  encouraging  to 
find  that  their  minds  were  more  enlightened — their  hearts 
less  afraid,  and  that  each  took  a book  to  practise  in  reading 
at  home  : so  interested  did  they  become,  that  they  assisted 
the  teacher  to  build  a chapel,  which  was  well  attended  by 
parties  desirous  to  be  further  instructed. 

An  influence  for  good  was  extending  over  the  heathen 
tribes ; and  more  than  once  the  teachers  succeeded  in  restor- 
ing peace,  when  war  had  been  declared.  On  one  occasion, 
by  reasoning  and  persuasion,  they  prevented  a heathen  feast 
being  held  on  the  Sabbath,  which  had  been  designed  to 
interfere  with  the  religious  services  of  the  Christian  party. 
At  another  time  the  teacher  was  permitted  to  preach  with- 
out molestation  to  more  than  three  hundred  heathen,  who 
had  met  together  at  a cannibal  feast.  Besides  this  good 
influence  on  the  masses,  there  were  many  known  to  the  de- 
voted teachers,  who  were  bringing  forth  fruits  which  proved 
the  effectual  working  of  the  gospel,  by  the  Holy  Spirit, 
on  their  hearts — who  had  abandoned  their  idolatries — who 
were  spiritual  worshippers  of  Jehovah,  and  known  disciples 
of  Jesus. 

But  another  time  of  trial  is  at  hand  : the  faith,  and 


228 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


patience  and  love  of  the  Christian  evangelists  are  tested, 
and  the  progress  of  the  mission  is  again  retarded.  The 
strength  of  the  labourers  is  weakened,  the  faith  of  the  con- 
verts is  confounded,  and  the  heathen  again  rejoice  in  the 
elements  of  another  conflict. 

These  troubles  commenced  in  the  midst  of  the  unhealthy 
season  of  the  year,  when  fever  and  ague  prevail  on  the 
island.  Pita  and  Petero,  two  Samoan  teachers,  were 
laid  prostrate  by  those  diseases  : Pita’s  child  died  ; Rangia 
was  also  laid  low,  and  Vasa  Vaine  and  two  other  teachers 
died.  Just  at  this  time  the  impending  evils  were  brought  to 
a crisis  by  the  death  of  a daughter  of  a chief  of  one  tribe, 
the  son  of  a chief  of  another  tribe,  and  an  influential  chief 
of  a third;  and,  as  might  be  expected  in  such  a people,  these 
events  inflamed  the  smouldering  elements  of  pride,  and 
superstition,  and  war ; and  vengeance  is  vowed  on  the  lives 
of  the  “ servants  of  Jehovah.” 

The  Christian  party,  with  a good  old  man,  called  Viavia, 
at  their  head,  did  all  they  could  to  set  aside  the  evil  designs 
of  the  wicked,  and  to  encourage  the  few  and  feeble,  sickly 
teachers  ; but  the  storm,  already  high,  rises  yet  higher,  and 
its  first  fury  falls  on  the  person  of  Ioane,  one  of  the 
teachers.  Recovering  from  a severe  illness,  he  had  gone 
to  one  of  the  hot  springs,  for  the  purpose  of  bathing  ; while 
there,  a heathen  savage  rushed  from  behind  a bush,  and 
with  a terrible  blow  of  his  club,  struck  the  unsuspecting 
man  to  the  ground.  His  death  was  intended,  but  assistance 
being  at  hand,  he  escaped  and  gradually  recovered.  But 
the  day  of  death  was  not  distant  to  another  of  these 
devoted  men.  One  evening,  while  its  shadows  were  closing 
upon  the  land,  Vasa,  as  was  his  custom,  went  to  a bush, 
some  little  distance  from  his  house,  to  pray.  While  on 
his  knees,  in  the  act  of  prayer,  a fatal  blow  was  struck 
by  an  uuknown  savage ; he  died,  and  his  distressed  com- 


ISLAND  OF  TANA. 


229 


panions  in  tribulation  carried  him  to  bis  grave,  not  knowing 
who  would  be  the  next  to  fall.  They  were  prepared  for  the 
worst.  Writing  at  this  time,  one  of  them  says, — “ We 
know  not  what  a day  will  bring  upon  us,  but  we  do  know 
that  these  can  only  kill  the  body;  the  soul  is  in  the  hands 
of  our  Master.”  This  man  was,  one  day,  going  to  a village 
to  preach,  and  was  met  by  a company  of  heathen  men,  who 
had  determined  to  murder  him ; hut  standing  before  them 
and  folding  his  hands,  in  the  attitude  of  prayer,  he  said, 
u 0 Lord  Jesus,  my  Lord,  into  thy  hands  I commit  my 
soul.”  His  life  was  spared  that  day,  but  in  the  intention 
of  the  savages  it  was  only  a reprieve. 

Before,  however,  they  could  finish  their  deeds  of  blood- 
shed, God  interposed  for  the  teachers.  A merchant  vessel 
put  into  the  Bay,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  yams  and 
other  supplies.  The  captain,  hearing  the  teachers’  tale  of 
distress,  offered  to  give  them  a passage  to  the  island  of 
Aneiteum.  A consultation  was  held  by  the  teachers  and 
their  native  friends,  and  it  was  decided  that  they  had  bet- 
ter retire  awhile  until  the  rage  of  the  enemy  had  subsided. 
This  course  was  adopted.  They  embarked  for  the  passage, 
but  before  the  vessel  got  under  weigh,  the  captain  sent  a 
boat’s  crew  to  a distant  station,  round  the  coast,  to  obtain 
more  yams.  While  there  a disturbance  occurred,  and  one 
of  the  crew  was  killed  by  the  natives.  This  outrage  much 
exasperated  the  captain,  and  he,  with  his  men,  resolved  to 
be  revenged.  The  ship’s  fire-arms  were  prepared,  and  por- 
tions of  powder,  in  great  abundance,  were  measured,  to  be 
ready  for  the  attack.  Alas  ! for  the  poor  teachers,  that 
they  should  have  been  on  board,  under  such  circumstances; 
they  endeavoured  to  dissuade  the  injured  captain  and  crew 
from  their  purpose,  but  they  would  not  be  satisfied  without 
revenge. 

In  the  mean  time  about  forty  natives,  who  had  not  heard 
20 


230 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAL  ISLANDS. 


of  the  murder  of  the  white  man,  came  off  to  the  ship  for 
purposes  of  barter.  These  were  all  taken  prisoners,  and 
put  down  in  the  hold.  Message  after  message  was  then 
sent  on  shore,  announcing  it  as  the  captain’s  intention  to 
fire  on  their  village,  if  they  did  not  bring  to  him  the  body 
of  the  unfortunate  man.  But  this  they  could  not  do,  for 
awful  to  relate,  the  very  hour  it  fell  into  their  hands,  it  was 
divided  among  the  tribe,  and  devoured  by  them ! 

Alas  ! Christian  reader,  you  sicken  at  the  tale  ; but  after 
having  recovered  from  the  emotions  of  disgust  and  horror 
you  so  justly  feel,  we  beseech  you  to  calmly  realize  the 
depths  of  degradation  to  which  these  beings  are  sunk,  so  as 
to  compassionate  them,  as  the  love  of  God  in  Christ 
alone  can  enable  you ; and  as  expressed  by  your  devoted 
missionaries,  when  living  in  the  midst  of  them,  they  said, 
“ Poor  creatures  ! naked,  painted,  savage  cannibals,  as  they 
now  are,  we  look  on  them  with  the  deepest  interest  and 
commiseration.”  Remember  also,  for  your  encouragement, 
the  triumphs  of  divine  power  and  love,  already  won  by  hu- 
man instrumentality,  over  tribes  such  as  these  in  Anei- 
teuin,  MarS,  Lifu,  and  Eromanga,  and  know  that  by  the 
same  power,  and  agency,  like  triumphs  shall  yet  be  gained 
on  Tana. 

The  teachers,  under  the  circumstances  related  in  the  fore- 
going page,  left  the  island,  and  abode  awhile  on  Aneiteum. 
But  so  great  was  the  desire  of  the  Christian  party  for  their 
return,  that  they  fitted  out  canoes  and  took  a voyage  to  the 
island,  for  the  very  purpose  of  taking  them  back,  and  when 
visited  twelve  months  afterwards,  it  was  encouraging  to  find 
that  the  two  principal  stations  had  been  reoccupied,  and 
that  others  were  ready  to  receive  teachers,  whom  they  had 
formerly  ill  treated. 

The  following  is  an  extract  from  a letter,  written  by  one 
of  the  teachers  to  the  church  in  Rarotonga  in  1850 : — 


ISLAND  OF  TANA. 


231 


“My  brethren,  blessings  on  you  all  from  our  Lord  Jesus 
the  Messiah.  I and  my  companions  are  still  alive  on  Tana. 
We  are  continuing  to  do  the  work  of  Jesus  in  this  dark 
land.  Our  hearts  are  often  crying  because  of  the  wicked- 
ness of  the  people  of  this  land,  hut  we  are  not  quite  desti- 
tute of  joy.  Our  work  is  a work  of  joy  ; and  Jesus  is  ful- 
filling his  word,  ‘ Lo  ! I am  with  you  even  to  the  end  of  the 
world.’  The  work  is  growing  here.  We  want  more  bre- 
thren to  help  us.  I am  now  very  ill.  I cannot  say  what 
will  befall  me,  whether  I am  to  live  or  to  die.  * Oh,  pray  for 
Tana,  and  send  us  more  help.” 

This  excellent  young  man  died,  soon  after  writing  the 
above,  and  one  of  his  fellow-labourers  wrote  the  following 
letter  to  his  father;  its  record  will  he  another  evidence 
of  the  piety  and  intelligence  of  these  native  Christian 
brethren  : — 

“ My  friend,  Tiotekai,  the  father  of  Tumataiapo,  and  yon, 
his  brothers  and  sisters  : may  you  all  be  united  to  Jesus 
the  Saviour,  from  whom  come  streams  of  consolation.  I, 
Obedia,  now  write  to  you.  I,  and  your  relative,  Tumataiapo, 
have  dwelt  together  in  this  land ; but  now  he  is  dead,  and  I 
am  left  at  my  station  alone.  He  lay  ill  a long  time,  but 
Jesus  was  near  him.  My  friends,  this  is  my  word  to  you; 
receive  it.  Do  Dot  grieve  on  his  account.  He  is  now  in 
the  beautiful  mansions  of  heaven,  with  his  Master.  He  has 
rested  from  his  work ; he  has  gained  his  reward.  Do  not 
grieve  for  him.  Like  him,  may  you  all  be  united  to  Jesus, 
by  faith,  like  branches  in  the  true  vine;  then  you  will 
again  see  him,  and  our  King,  in  joy  and  glory,  which  will 
abide  for  ever.  Amen.” 

In  addition  to  illness,  induced  by  the  unhealthiness  of 
the  climate,  at  certain  seasons  of  the  year,  this  mission  suf- 
fered much  last  year,  1854,  by  the  introduction  of  small- 
pox, from  a Caledonia  vessel,  bound  to  Sydney.  A great 


232 


GEMS  FROM  THE  CORAE  ISLANDS. 


number  of  the  natives  died,  and  several  of  the  teachers  also 
fell  victims  to  the  virulence  of  the  disease.  So  great  was 
this  calamity  that  it  had  well  nigh  caused  the  breaking  up 
of  all  our  stations  on  the  island.  But,  thanks  be  to  God, 
just  iu  this  time  of  distress,  the  island  of  Aneiteum  had 
attained  the  position  of  a prosperous  Christian  station ; and 
its  natives,  our  first  converts  there,  came  to  our  help.  Two 
of  these  have  already  been  set  apart  to  the  office  of  evange- 
lists, and  are  now  labouring  on  Tana. 

Reports  of’the  happy  change  on  Aneiteum,  have  so  excited 
and  interested  the  people  of  Tana,  that  many  of  them  recently 
visited  that  island,  and  were  much  gratified  at  what  they 
there  saw  and  heard.  They  made  a tour  of  the  island  with- 
out club  or  spear,  and  in  delighted  astonishment  said,  that 
they  had  never  before  thought  it  possible  for  people,  of 
different  tribes,  to  live  together  on  an  island  without  fighting. 

Thus  instructed,  and  inspired  with  confidence,  they  re- 
turned to  Tana,  and  are  now  assisting  the  Aneiteum  brethren 
in  making,  what  we  trust  will  prove,  the  final  and  victorious 
struggle  over  the  various  evils  of  their  heathen  land,  which 
have  for  so  long  a time  opposed  our  advance,  but  which  have 
never  entirely  defeated  our  plans. 

A large  sandal-wood  depot  has  been  established  at 
Resolution  Bay,  and  the  time  has  come  when  the  success 
of  this  mission  demands  the  residence  of  European  mis- 
sionaries. The  churches  in  Nova  Scotia  have  nobly  come 
to  our  aid,  in  meeting  this  demand.  Already  they  support 
the  Rev.  J.  Geddie  on  Aneiteum,  and  they  have  now  sent 
to  this  country,  at  their  own  expense,  the  Rev.  S.  N.  Gor- 
don, to  proceed  in  the  John  Williams,  as  their  second  mis- 
sionary, to  the  New  Hebrides;  and,  moreover,  they  are  wil- 
ling to  remit,  through  the  London  Missionary  Society,  funds 
for  the  support  of  another,  as  soon  as  their  cry  shall  be 
heard  saying,  “ Here  are  we,  send  us." 

THE  END. 


* . 


